8000-INIS RevA

IN Series X-Ray Generator Installation & Service Manual
P/N 8000-INIS Revision: A, May 12, 2006
CPI Canada Inc.
PRE-INSTALLATION
SERVICE AND INSTALLATION MANUAL

P.N. #740990
INSTALLATION
CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING
ACCEPTANCE TEST
TROUBLESHOOTING
REGULAR MAINTENANCE
THEORY OF OPERATION
SPARES
SCHEMATICS
The original version of this manual (11 March, 2002) has been drafted in the English language by: Communications & Power Industries communications & medical products division.
Indico 100 Rad Service Manual
Ch # 740991-00
Rev. A
Page 0-1
CPI Canada Inc.
(This page intentionally left blank)
Page 0-2
Rev. A
Indico 100 Rad Service Manual
Ch # 740991-00
CPI Canada Inc
Pre-installation
CHAPTER 1 PRE-INSTALLATION
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1
Purpose This manual applies to the Indico 100 family of generators and provides instructions for the installation and maintenance of all models of that generator. This Chapter contains the following sections. SECTION TITLE Introduction Safety Preparing for installation Compatibility listing Generator layout and Major Components
1A 1B 1C 1D 1E
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-01
Rev. A
Page 1-1
1 Pre-installation
CPI Canada Inc
(This page intentionally left blank.)
Page 1-2
Rev. A
Ch # 740895-01
CPI Canada Inc.
Introduction
1A
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1A INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS:
Section Title 1A.1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................1A-2 1A.1.1 Purpose..................................................................................................................................................1A-2 1A.2.0 GENERATOR DESCRIPTION...................................................................................................................1A-2 1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................................1A-3 1A.4.0 APPLICATIONS.........................................................................................................................................1A-5 1A.5.0 FEATURES................................................................................................................................................1A-5 1A.6.0 ROTOR CONTROL ...................................................................................................................................1A-6 1A.7.0 AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUTS................................................................................................................1A-6 1A.8.0 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION ...................................................................................................................1A-6 1A.9.0 REGULATORIES AND DESIGN STANDARDS ........................................................................................1A-7 1A.9.1 Environmental Specifications.................................................................................................................1A-7 1A.9.2 Applicable Standards .............................................................................................................................1A-7 1A.9.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ..................................................................................................1A-11 1A.10.0 TECHNIQUE FACTORS DEFINITIONS ...............................................................................................1A-11
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. K
Page 1A-1
1A
Introduction
CPI Canada Inc.
1A.1.0 INTRODUCTION 1A.1.1 Purpose This manual provides instructions for the installation and service of Millenia and Indico 100 X-ray generators. This section of the manual applies to the Millenia and Indico 100 family of X-ray generators. Some of the sections / chapters in the balance of this manual are common to Millenia and Indico 100 X-ray generators; other sections / chapters are unique to each generator series.
1A.2.0 GENERATOR DESCRIPTION Depending on configuration and options, the generator provides the power and interfacing to operate X-ray tubes, Buckys, Rad tables, GI (gastro-intestinal) tables, remote R&F tables, tomographic devices, and digital imaging systems. The generator consists of power supply and control systems housed in the upper and lower cabinets, a control console, and an optional remote fluoro control along with the necessary interconnecting cable(s). Major items provided are: X-ray generator housed in upper and lower cabinets. Control console. Optional remote fluoro control. Interconnecting cable(s). Operator's manual. Service and installation manual.
Page 1A-2
Rev. K
Ch # 740904-00
CPI Canada Inc. 1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Introduction
1A
Figure 1A-1 shows the outline of the Millenia series X-ray generator, control console, and remote fluoro control. Figure 1A-2 shows the Indico 100 series X-ray generator outline.
Figure 1A-1: Generator outline drawing (Millenia)
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. K
Page 1A-3
1A
Introduction
CPI Canada Inc.
1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT) Figure 1A-2 shows the outline of the Indico 100 series X-ray generator.
Figure 1A-2: Generator outline drawing (Indico 100)
Page 1A-4
Rev. K
Ch # 740904-00
CPI Canada Inc. 1A.4.0 APPLICATIONS RAD SYSTEMS: Bucky table, tabletop and off-table radiography. Vertical bucky/cassette radiography. Conventional tomography. R&F SYSTEMS Fluoroscopic and spot film applications. Tomography with conventional and/or remote R&F tables. Optional digital compatible. Optional high-level fluoro for therapy simulators (Indico 100).
Introduction
1A
1A.5.0 FEATURES High frequency generator. One or two tube operation, Rad or Rad / Fluoro. Single or dual filament supplies. Low speed or dual speed X-ray tube stator supply. Optimal matching of X-ray tubes by PROMs. Repetitive self checks of generator functions, provides display of system faults and operating errors. Optional AEC, up to four inputs. Optional ABS with kV or kV/mA fluoro stabilizer. Optional remote fluoro control box for tabletop use or SFD mounting. Optional Dose-Area Product (DAP) display (Indico 100). X-ray Tube protection. The generator allows setting the following limits: a) Maximum mA, adjustable for each focal spot. b) Maximum kV, adjustable for each X-ray tube. c) Maximum kW, adjustable for each focal spot. d) Maximum filament current limit, adjustable for large and small focal spots. e) Anode heat warning and anode heat alarm levels. Calibration features: a) Microprocessor design allows all calibration and programming to be performed via the Console. b) mA calibration is automated. Messages and diagnostic information: For users and service personnel, the generator console displays various messages indicating status or equipment problems. The user is prompted in case of errors. Error log stores last 200 errors and associated generator settings. Service and diagnostic information available via a laptop computer (optional). KV range: Radiography 40 to 150 kV. Fluoroscopy 40 to 125 kV. mA range: Radiography 10 to 320 mA (30 kW), 10 to 400 mA (32 kW), 10 to 500 mA (40 kW), 10 to 630 mA (50 kW), 10 TO 800 mA (65 kW) and 10 to 1000 mA (80 and 100 kW). Fluoroscopy 0.5 to 6.0 mA, 0.5 to 20 mA with optional high-level fluoroscopy. mAs range: tube dependent, max 1000 mAs. Time range: Radiography 1.0 to 6300 ms (Indico 100), 2.0 to 6300 ms (Millenia). Fluoroscopy 0 to 5 or 0 to 10 minutes.
Refer to the compatibility statement / product description (end of section 1D) for compatibility and features of this specific generator.
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. K
Page 1A-5
1A
Introduction
CPI Canada Inc.
1A.6.0 ROTOR CONTROL The generator will be equipped with a low speed starter, or optional dual speed starter. DUAL SPEED STARTER Number of tubes permissible: Current monitoring Dual speed starter output frequency Braking Rotor boost time Duty cycle LOW SPEED STARTER Current monitoring Duty cycle
Maximum of 32 tube types. Tube type is switch selectable Both stator circuits 50 or 60 Hz (low speed) 150 or 180 Hz (high speed). (Independent of line frequency) Dynamic braking when in high speed rotation Determined by tube selection plus incremental boost time changes from 100 to 700 msec. Not to exceed 2 high speed starts per minute.
Both stator circuits Not to exceed 5 consecutive boosts, followed by a minimum 10 second wait period.
1A.7.0 AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUTS The generator supplies the following power outputs for X-ray room equipment: 24 VDC, 4 Amp. 120 VAC, 2.5 Amp. 240 VAC, 1.5 Amp.
2.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 120 VAC OR 1.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 240 VAC, BUT BOTH ARE NOT AVAILABLE SIMULTANEOUSLY. The above voltage sources are not compatible with: Collimator lamps (24 VDC 150 watts). These lamps exceed the 4 Amp rating of the 24 VDC supply. Fluorescent lamps. These have high starting currents and generate transients when the tube strikes. Some inductive loads may cause difficulties (some motors and solenoids).
1A.8.0 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION The Millenia and Indico 100 series of X-ray generators includes the following documentation: Operators manual. Service and installation manual. Insert and application notes as required.
Page 1A-6
Rev. K
Ch # 740904-00
CPI Canada Inc. 1A.9.0 REGULATORIES AND DESIGN STANDARDS 1A.9.1 Environmental Specifications OPERATING Ambient temperature range Relative humidity Atmospheric pressure range TRANSPORT AND STORAGE Ambient temperature range Relative humidity Atmospheric pressure range 10 to 40 C 30 to 75% 500 to 1060 hPa (375 to 795 mm Hg) -20 to 70 C 10 to 95%, including condensation 500 to 1060 hPa (375 to 795 mm Hg)
Introduction
1A
1A.9.2 Applicable Standards A) SAFETY The Millenia / Indico 100 family of generators comply with the following regulatory requirements and design standards: FDA Center for Devices & Radiological Health (CDRH) - 21 CFR title 21 subchapter J (USA). Radiation Emitting Devices Act - C34 (Canada). Medical Device Regulations (Canada). EC Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices (European Community). IEC 60601.1, IEC 60601.2.7, CSA 601.1, UL2601.1 -Type of protection against electric shock: Class I equipment. -Degree of protection against electric shock: Not classified. -Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water: Ordinary equipment. -Mode of operation: Continuous operation with intermittent loading (standby - exposure). -Equipment not suitable for use in presence of a flammable anesthetic mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide. IEC 60601.1.4, ISO 14971.1
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. K
Page 1A-7
1A
Introduction
CPI Canada Inc.
B) EMC (IEC 60601.1.2:2001) Guidance and manufacturers declaration electromagnetic emissions The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray generators are intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the VZW2926 or VZW2930 series should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test
RF emissions CISPR 11
Compliance
Group 1
Electromagnetic environment - guidance

The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray generators use RF energy only for their internal functions. Therefore, the RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment. The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray generators must be used only in a shielded location with a minimum RF shielding effectiveness and, for each cable that exits the shielded location, a minimum RF filter attenuation of 40dB from 30 MHz to 230 MHz and 47dB from 230 MHz to 1 GHz. (The minimum at 30 MHz is 40dB and the minimum at 230 MHz is 47dB).
RF emissions CISPR 11
The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series is suitable for use in all Harmonic establishments other than domestic and those directly connected emissions to the public low-voltage power supply network that supplies IEC 61000-3-2 buildings used for domestic purposes. Voltage Not Applicable fluctuations/ flicker emissions IEC 61000-3-3 NOTE It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded location be verified to assure that they meet the minimum specifications.
Class A (The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray generators in combination with shielded location) Not Applicable
Page 1A-8
Rev. K
Ch # 740904-00
CPI Canada Inc.
Introduction
1A
Guidance and manufacturers declaration electromagnetic immunity The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray generators are intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the VZW2926 or VZW2930 series should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2 Electrical fast transient/burst IEC 61000-4-4 Surge IEC 61000-4-5
IEC 60601 test level

6 kV contact 8 kV air 2 kV for power supply lines 1 kV for input/output lines 1 kV differential mode 2 kV common mode < 5 % UT (> 95 % dip in UT) for 0.5 cycle 40 % UT (60 % dip in UT) for 5 cycles 70 % UT (30 % dip in UT) < 5 % UT (> 95 % dip in UT) for 5 s 3 A/m
Compliance level
6 kV contact 8 kV air 2 kV for power supply lines 1 kV for input/output lines 1 kV differential mode 2 kV common mode < 5 % UT (> 95 % dip in UT) for 0.5 cycle 40 % UT (60 % dip in UT) for 5 cycles 70 % UT (30 % dip in UT) < 5 % UT (> 95 % dip in UT) for 5 s 3 A/m
Electromagnetic environment guidance

Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic tile. If floors are covered with synthetic material, the relative humidity should be at least 30%. Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital environment.
Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital environment.
Voltage dips, short interruption, and voltage variations on power supply input lines IEC 60601-4-11
Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital environment. If the user of the VZW2926 and VZW2930 series X-ray generator requires continued operation during power mains interruptions, it is recommended that the X-ray generator be powered from an uninterruptible power supply or battery.
Power frequency Power frequency magnetic fields should be at (50/60 Hz) levels characteristic of a typical location in a typical commercial or hospital environment IEC 61000-4-8 NOTE: UT is the A.C. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. K
Page 1A-9
1A
Introduction
CPI Canada Inc.
Guidance and manufacturers declaration electromagnetic immunity The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray generators are intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the VZW2926 or VZW2930 series should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test
Conducted RF IEC 61000-4-6
IEC 60601 test level

3 Vrms 150 kHz to 80MHz
Compliance level
3 Vrms 150 kHz to 80MHz
Electromagnetic environment - guidance

The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray generators must be used only in a shielded location with a minimum RF shielding effectiveness and, for each cable that enters the shielded location, a minimum RF filter attenuation of 40dB from 30 MHz to 230 MHz and 47dB from 230 MHz to 1 GHz. (The minimum at 30 MHz is 40dB and the minimum at 230 MHz is 47dB.) Field strengths outside the shielded location from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site survey, should be less than 3 V/m.a Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with the following symbol:
Radiated RF IEC 61000-4-3
3 V/m 80MHz to 2.5 GHz
3 V/m 80MHz to 2.5 GHz
NOTE 1 These guidelines may not apply all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people. NOTE 2 It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded location be verified to assure that they meet the minimum specification. a Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the VZW2926 or VZW2930 series of X-ray generators is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the X-ray generator should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the X-ray generator.
Page 1A-10
Rev. K
Ch # 740904-00
CPI Canada Inc. 1A.9.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Introduction
1A
In accordance with the intended use, this X-ray generator complies with the European Council Directive concerning Medical Devices. The CE marking affixed to this product signifies this. One of the harmonized standards of this Directive defines the permitted levels of electromagnetic emission from this equipment and its required immunity from the electromagnetic emissions of other devices. It is not possible, however, to exclude with absolute certainty the possibility that other high frequency electronic equipment, which is fully compliant to the EMC regulations, will not adversely affect the operation of this generator. If the other equipment has a comparatively high level of transmission power and is in close proximity to the generator, these EMC concerns (the risk of interference) may be more pronounced. It is therefore recommended that the operation of equipment of this type such as mobile telephones, cordless microphones and other similar mobile radio equipment be restricted from the vicinity of this X-ray generator.
1A.10.0 TECHNIQUE FACTORS DEFINITIONS KV: TIME: mA: mAs KV peak after any initial kV overshoot. Time in milliseconds, (ms) that the high voltage (anode to cathode) is greater than or equal to 75% of the desired kV. Average Tube Beam Current (in mA) during the exposure TIME. milliampere-seconds (mA x TIME).
Address any questions regarding X-ray generator operation to: Mail: Customer Support Department Communications and Power Industries Canada Inc. 45 River Drive Georgetown, Ontario, Canada L7G 2J4 (905) 877-0161 (905) 877-8320 Attention: Customer Support Department marketing@cmp.cpii.com Attention: Customer Support Department
Telephone: Fax:
E-mail:
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. K
Page 1A-11
1A
Introduction
CPI Canada Inc.
Page 1A-12
Rev. K
Ch # 740904-00
CPI Canada Inc.
Safety
1B
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1B SAFETY

CONTENTS:
Section Title 1B.1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................1B-2 1B.2.0 SAFETY AND WARNING SYMBOLS........................................................................................................1B-2 1B.3.0 SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS.......................................................................................................1B-2 1B.4.0 SAFETY WARNING LABELS - INTRODUCTION .....................................................................................1B-4 1B.4.1 Safety Warning Labels - Organization ...................................................................................................1B-5 1B.5.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES COMMON TO MILLENIA AND INDICO 100 ..............................................1B-5 1B.5.1 Caution HV Behind Cover Label............................................................................................................1B-5 1B.5.2 Weight Label ..........................................................................................................................................1B-6 1B.5.3 DC Bus Label .........................................................................................................................................1B-6 1B.5.4 Console CPU Board / Console Board....................................................................................................1B-7 1B.5.5 Generator Interface Board .....................................................................................................................1B-7 1B.5.6 Room Interface Board............................................................................................................................1B-7 1B.5.7 AEC Board .............................................................................................................................................1B-7 1B.5.8 Power Input Board .................................................................................................................................1B-7 1B.5.9 Dual Speed Starter Board......................................................................................................................1B-8 1B.6.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO MILLENIA..............................................................................1B-8 1B.6.1 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals Label................................................................................................1B-8 1B.6.2 Live Mains / Fuses / Ground Label ........................................................................................................1B-9 1B.6.3 Live Mains / Fuses Label .......................................................................................................................1B-9 1B.6.4 Caution - Hazardous Voltages Label ...................................................................................................1B-10 1B.6.5 Warning / Caution / Caution Label.......................................................................................................1B-11 1B.6.6 Tank Vent Label...................................................................................................................................1B-11 1B.6.7 mA Test Jacks Label............................................................................................................................1B-12 1B.6.8 mA test Jacks.......................................................................................................................................1B-12 1B.6.9 F3 (Auxiliary Power Fuseblock) ...........................................................................................................1B-12 1B.7.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO INDICO 100.........................................................................1B-12 1B.7.1 Caution HV Exposed Label..................................................................................................................1B-12 1B.7.2 Caution HV Label.................................................................................................................................1B-13 1B.7.3 Danger HV Label .................................................................................................................................1B-13 1B.7.4 High Voltage Warning Label ................................................................................................................1B-13 1B.7.5 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals .......................................................................................................1B-14 1B.7.6 Danger High Tension ...........................................................................................................................1B-14 1B.7.7 F1 (Primary of Auxiliary Transformer)..................................................................................................1B-14
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-1
1B
Safety
CPI Canada Inc.
1B.1.0 INTRODUCTION This section contains important safety warnings and safety information required for installing and servicing the generator.
1B.2.0 SAFETY AND WARNING SYMBOLS The following advisory symbols are used on the safety warning labels, and/or on circuit boards, and/or on the operator console and the optional remote fluoro control. High voltage symbol used to indicate the presence of high voltage.
WARNING
THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUS TO PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ARE OBSERVED.
Warning symbol used to indicate a potential hazard to operators, to service personnel, or to the equipment. It indicates a requirement to refer to the accompanying documentation for details. Radiation exposure symbol used on operator console. Lights to indicate that an exposure is in progress. This is accompanied by an audible tone from the console. Fluoro radiation exposure symbol used on operator console and on optional remote fluoro control unit. Lights to indicate that a fluoro exposure is in progress. This is accompanied by an audible tone from the console. Radiation warning label on console, used in certain jurisdictions. Never allow unqualified personnel to operate the Xray generator.
1B.3.0 SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS WARNING: PROPER USE AND SAFE OPERATING PRACTICES WITH RESPECT TO X-RAY GENERATORS ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF USERS OF SUCH GENERATORS. CPI CANADA INC. PROVIDES INFORMATION ON ITS PRODUCTS AND ASSOCIATED HAZARDS, BUT ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITIES FOR AFTER-SALE OPERATING AND SAFETY PRACTICES. THE MANUFACTURER ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY GENERATOR NOT MAINTAINED OR SERVICED ACCORDING TO THIS SERVICE AND INSTALLATION MANUAL, OR FOR ANY GENERATOR THAT HAS BEEN MODIFIED IN ANY WAY. THE MANUFACTURER ALSO ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR X-RAY RADIATION OVEREXPOSURE OF PATIENTS OR PERSONNEL RESULTING FROM POOR OPERATING TECHNIQUES OR PROCEDURES.
Page 1B-2
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-01
CPI Canada Inc. SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS (cont) WARNING:
Safety
1B
THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUS TO PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ARE OBSERVED.
X-ray radiation exposure may be damaging to health, with some effects being cumulative and extending over periods of many months or even years. Operators and service personnel should avoid any exposure to the primary beam and take protective measures to safeguard against scatter radiation. Scatter radiation is caused by any object in the path of the primary beam and may be of equal or less intensity than the primary beam that exposes the film. No practical design can incorporate complete protection for operators or service personnel who do not take adequate safety precautions. Only authorized and properly trained service and operating personnel should be allowed to work with this X-ray generator equipment. The appropriate personnel must be made aware of the inherent dangers associated with the servicing of high voltage equipment and the danger of excessive exposure to X-ray radiation during system operation.
DO NOT CONNECT UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT TO THE REAR OF THE CONSOLE. For the 23 X 56 (cm) console, J5 is used for the interconnect cable to the generator main cabinet, J4 is not used, J2 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J1 is for connection of an optional printer. For the 31 X 42 (cm) console, J5 is used for the interconnect cable to the generator main cabinet, J2 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J13 is for connection of an external hand switch and / or foot switch. For the Rad-only console, J3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J4 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J8 is for the interconnect cable to the main cabinet. For the touch screen console, J2 on the touch screen interface board is for the interconnect cable to the generator main cabinet, J3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J5 connects to the membrane switch assembly with the on / off and prep / expose switches, and J4 is a serial port for use by an external computer. INCORRECT CONNECTIONS OR USE OF UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE..
CAUTION:
DO NOT EXCEED THE TUBE MAXIMUM OPERATING LIMITS. INTENDED LIFE AND RELIABILITY WILL NOT BE OBTAINED UNLESS GENERATORS ARE OPERATED WITHIN PUBLISHED SPECIFICATIONS.
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-3
1B
Safety
CPI Canada Inc.
SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS (cont) WARNING: HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES EXIST INSIDE THE GENERATOR WHENEVER THE MAIN POWER DISCONNECT IS SWITCHED ON. THOSE AREAS INCLUDE THE MAIN FUSEHOLDER AND ASSOCIATED CIRCUITS IN THE HV POWER SUPPLY, PORTIONS OF THE GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD IN THE UPPER PORTION OF THE GENERATOR (MILLENIA AND INDICO 100), AND THE TERMINALS ON THE LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER IN THE LOWER GENERATOR CABINET IF FITTED (MILLENIA ONLY). THE CONSOLE ON/OFF SWITCH DOES NOT DISCONNECT THE MAIN POWER FROM THE ABOVE AREAS INSIDE THE GENERATOR. THE BUS CAPACITORS, LOCATED IN THE POWER SUPPLY PRESENT A SAFETY HAZARD FOR AT LEAST 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED FROM THE UNIT. CHECK THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE SERVICING THE GENERATOR.
1B.4.0 SAFETY WARNING LABELS - INTRODUCTION The safety warning label subsections define the safety labels used inside and outside the generator cabinets. Depending on configuration, your X-ray generator may contain some or all of the labels shown. NOTE: THESE LABELS AND WARNINGS ARE LOCATED TO ALERT SERVICE PERSONNEL THAT SERIOUS INJURY WILL RESULT IF THE HAZARD IDENTIFIED IS IGNORED.
NOTE:
DUE TO THE DIVERSITY OF GENERATOR MODELS, THE EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN.
WARNING:
SWITCH OFF THE MAIN POWER DISCONNECT AND ALLOW SUFFICIENT TIME FOR ALL CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE REMOVING ANY COVERS OR OPENING ANY SERVICE DOOR.
WARNING:
IF ANY BARRIERS OR COVERS MUST BE REMOVED FOR SERVICE, TAKE ALL REQUIRED PRECAUTIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE HAZARD(S) AND IMMEDIATELY REPLACE THE BARRIERS/COVERS WHEN THE NEED FOR REMOVAL IS COMPLETED.
REPLACE ALL FUSES IN THIS GENERATOR WITH THE SAME TYPE AND RATING.
This information is provided to help you establish safe operating conditions for both you and your CPI Xray generator. Do not operate this X-ray generator except in accordance with these precautions, and any additional information provided by the X-ray generator manufacturer and/or competent safety authorities.
Page 1B-4
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-01
CPI Canada Inc. 1B.4.1 Safety Warning Labels - Organization The safety warning label information is organized into three subsections: Safety labels/notices common to Millenia and Indico 100 Safety notices unique to Millenia Safety notices unique to Indico 100
Safety
1B
1B.5.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES COMMON TO MILLENIA AND INDICO 100
1B.5.1 Caution HV Behind Cover Label
MILLENIA:
This label is attached to a cover over the main power contactor. This area will have mains voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on. This label is attached to a cover over the resonant circuit and low speed starter components if a low speed starter is fitted. The resonant components (resonant capacitors etc) may be energized for 5 minutes after the console is switched off, or the main disconnect is switched off. If a low speed starter is fitted, the associated components will have up to 240 VAC applied when the console is switched on. This label is attached to each of the access panels on the rear of the generator. The high voltage hazards behind these panels is similar to that behind the upper and lower entrance doors, see 1B.7.4. This label is attached to a cover over the line adjusting transformer (if fitted). The terminals on the transformer will have mains voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on. If access to the transformer connections is needed, SWITCH OFF THE MAIN DISCONNECT FIRST. This label is attached to a cover over the inverter board(s). The inverter assembly is connected to the main DC bus and will have high voltage applied at all times that the generator is switched on. This assembly will remain energized for 5 minutes after the generator is switched off, or the main disconnect is switched off. This label is attached to a cover over the main input fuses on the power input board. This area will have mains voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on.
MILLENIA:
MILLENIA:
MILLENIA:
INDICO 100:
INDICO 100:
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-5
1B
Safety
CPI Canada Inc.
1B.5.2 Weight Label
MILLENIA:
This label is attached to the upper and lower generator cabinets and to the HT oil tank and states the approximate weight of each of the generator sections and of the HT oil tank. This label cautions against attempting to lift those assemblies without proper assistance. This label is attached to the lower generator cabinet and to the HT oil tank and states the approximate weight of the lower generator cabinet and of the HT oil tank. This label cautions against attempting to lift those assemblies without proper assistance.
INDICO 100:
1B.5.3 DC Bus Label
MILLENIA:
This label is attached to a cover over the DC bus capacitors. These capacitors will hold a lethal charge for 5 minutes after the console is switched off, or the main disconnect is switched off. Do not remove the cover for a minimum of 5 minutes after the power has been switched off. This label is attached to the removable panels on the lower (power supply) cabinet. The internal capacitors will hold a lethal charge for 5 minutes after the console is switched off, or the main disconnect is switched off. Do not remove the cover for a minimum of 5 minutes after the power has been switched off.
INDICO 100:
WARNING:
WAIT A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE INPUT MAINS POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED BEFORE REMOVING ANY COVERS OR ACCESS PANELS. ONCE THE COVER(S) / PANEL(S) ARE REMOVED CHECK THAT THE VOLTAGE ACROSS THE DC BUS CAPACITORS IS LESS THAN 48 VDC BEFORE SERVICING.
Page 1B-6
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-01
CPI Canada Inc. 1B.5.4 Console CPU Board / Console Board
Safety
1B
For 23 X 56 (cm) consoles: HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 400 VAC is present on this board in the area of U32 and J10. This voltage is used to light the backlight for the LCD display assembly in the console. For 31 X 42 (cm) Indico 100 R&F consoles: HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 400 VAC is present on this board in the area of T1, C57, and J10. This is a high voltage source for the fluorescent backlight on the LCD display. For Indico 100 Rad-only consoles: HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 400 VAC is present on this board in the area of T1, C36, and J5. This is a high voltage source for the fluorescent backlight on the LCD display. FUSE RATING: F1: 1.6A 250V
1B.5.5 Generator Interface Board This symbol is printed on the generator interface board in the high volage (mains) area. HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Components within the dashed line on the board have high voltage applied at all times that the main disconnect is switched ON. These components are live EVEN WITH THE CONSOLE SWITCHED OFF. This symbol is printed on the generator interface board near fuses F1 to F6. FUSE RATINGS: F1: 1.6A 250V slow blow F2, F5: 2.5A 250V slow blow F3, F4: 5A 250V slow blow F6: 2A 250 V slow blow
1B.5.6 Room Interface Board This symbol is printed on the room interface board near the 110/220 VAC terminal blocks. HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: 110/220 VAC may be present on this board at all times that the AC mains to the generator is switched on.
1B.5.7 AEC Board This symbol is printed on some versions of AEC board with a high voltage power supply for a PMT or ion chamber. HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Depending on the AEC board type, up to approximately 1000 VDC may be present on the AEC board at all times that the generator is switched on.
1B.5.8 Power Input Board Power input boards for single phase 240 VAC generators are fitted with several high power resistors that operate at temperatures sufficient to cause skin burn. Ensure that these resistors have cooled sufficiently after the power has been switched off before servicing.
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-7
1B
Safety
CPI Canada Inc.
1B.5.9 Dual Speed Starter Board This symbol is printed on the dual speed starter board if fitted. HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 600 VDC is present on this board. This voltage is supplied from the DC bus capacitors in the HF power supply. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING, this voltage and current combination is lethal. Ensure that the DC bus capacitors are fully discharged before servicing as these capacitors will hold a lethal charge for 5 minutes AFTER THE EQUIPMENT IS SWITCHED OFF. WARNING: COMPONENTS BEHIND VARIOUS COVERS, AS NOTED IN THIS SECTION, REMAIN LIVE EVEN WITH THE OPERATOR CONSOLE SWITCHED OFF. THE ONLY WAY TO REMOVE POWER FROM THESE AREAS IS TO SWITCH OFF THE MAIN DISCONNECT.
1B.6.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO MILLENIA 1B.6.1 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals Label
This label indicates that if the power supply inverter leads that attach to the high tension transformer primary terminals are not connected the generator must not be energized. This label also cautions against over tightening the nuts on the transformer feedthrough terminals mentioned in the above paragraph.
Page 1B-8
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-01
CPI Canada Inc. 1B.6.2 Live Mains / Fuses / Ground Label
Safety
1B
This label is attached to a cover over the main fuse block and fuses. This area will have mains voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on. The main system ground is also located behind this cover.
1B.6.3 Live Mains / Fuses Label
This label is attached to a cover over the fuse block and fuses for the room interface transformer. This area will have mains voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on.
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-9
1B
Safety
CPI Canada Inc.
1B.6.4 Caution - Hazardous Voltages Label
CAUTION
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT INSIDE THE CABINET FOR A PERIOD OF FIVE (5) MINUTES AFTER DE-ENERGIZING THIS EQUIPMENT.
This label is attached to the main access doors on the generator. Wait a minimum of five minutes after the main power has been removed from the generator before opening the cabinet doors. This will allow for internal capacitors to discharge to a safe level. The upper door provides access to the HV power supply driver section, room interface board and associated control circuits. The lower door allows access to the HT transformer, dual speed starter chassis if fitted, line adjusting transformer if fitted, and access to the tube stator connections and thermal switch connections. Additionally, the grounding location for the X-ray tube housing is located in this area. Hazards associated with each area within are outlined in the relevant sections of this chapter.
Page 1B-10
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-01
CPI Canada Inc. 1B.6.5 Warning / Caution / Caution Label
Safety
1B
This label is attached to a cover over the dual speed starter assembly (if fitted). DC bus voltage is present behind this panel, see 1B.5.9. Ensure that the generator has been turned OFF for five minutes before removing the cover or disconnecting the DC supply. Replace fuses with the same type and rating, refer to spares list (chapter 8) for details.
1B.6.6 Tank Vent Label
This label is attached to the HT tank clamping bracket on generator models equipped with an HT tank vent screw. This screw must be loosened to allow venting of the HT tank before use of the generator when the tank is so equipped. The screw must be fully tightened to prevent insulating oil spills or leaks from the HT tank during transportation or shipping.
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-11
1B
Safety
CPI Canada Inc.
1B.6.7 mA Test Jacks Label
This label is attached to the top of the HT tank on generator models equipped with mA test jacks. A similar warning is printed on tank lid boards using this connector; see 1B.6.8 below for details.
1B.6.8 mA test Jacks This symbol is printed on tank lid boards with mA/mAs test jacks. Replace the shorting jumper immediately after use. Do not attempt exposures without either the shorting jumper in place, or an approved mA/mAs measuring device properly connected. The warning CAUTION: 48V MAX printed on some tank lid boards does not apply in Millenia generator applications.
1B.6.9 F3 (Auxiliary Power Fuseblock) This symbol is on a label under the fuseholder for F3 (to the right of the HF power supply). FUSE RATING: 3A 500V slow blow. This fuse is only used if the generator is fitted with the neutral block option.
1B.7.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO INDICO 100 1B.7.1 Caution HV Exposed Label
This label is attached to the removable panels on the lower (power supply) cabinet. High voltage is present within this cabinet at all times that the mains power is switched on.
Page 1B-12
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-01
CPI Canada Inc. 1B.7.2 Caution HV Label
Safety
1B
This label is attached to the power input board, and to the resonant board assembly. The input power board has line voltage components attached that will be live at all times that the main disconnect is switched on. This includes the input fuses, main line contactor, mains rectifier and associated components. The resonant board assembly has components that may be energized at all times that the generator is on. These components may retain their charge for 5 minutes after the console is switched off, or the main disconnect is switched off.
1B.7.3 Danger HV Label
This label is attached to the primary terminals on the HT oil tank. These terminals may be energized at all times that the generator is switched on, and for 5 minutes after the console or the main disconnect is switched off.
1B.7.4 High Voltage Warning Label
This label is attached to the inverter board(s) and to the low speed starter assembly if fitted. The inverter assembly is connected to the main DC bus and will have high voltage applied at all times that the generator is switched on. This assembly will remain energized for 5 minutes after the generator is switched off, or the main disconnect is off. Components on the low speed starter assembly will have 240 VAC applied when the console is switched on.
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-13
1B
Safety
CPI Canada Inc.
1B.7.5 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals
This notice is printed on the HT oil tank lid and indicates that if the power supply inverter leads that attach to the high tension transformer primary terminals are not connected the generator must not be energized. This notice also cautions against over tightening the nuts on the transformer feedthrough terminals mentioned in the above paragraph.
1B.7.6 Danger High Tension
This notice is printed on the HT oil tank lid. High voltage may be present at the primary terminals on the tank lid board, at the output high voltage connectors, and at the mA/mAs measuring jacks if the shorting link is opened for mA/mAs measurements.
1B.7.7 F1 (Primary of Auxiliary Transformer) This symbol is on a label above the fuse holder for F1 (to the left of the main input fuses on the power input board). FUSE RATING: Single phase generators: 3A 250V slow blow. Three phase generators: 2A 500V slow blow.
Page 1B-14
Rev. H
Ch # 740904-01
CPI Canada Inc.
Preparing for Installation
1C
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1C PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION

CONTENTS:
1C.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 1C-2 1C.2.0 GENERATOR POWER REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................. 1C-2 1C.2.1 32 kW Single Phase ............................................................................................................................. 1C-2 1C.2.2 40 kW Single Phase ............................................................................................................................. 1C-2 1C.2.3 32 kW Three Phase .............................................................................................................................. 1C-2 1C.2.4 40 kW Three Phase .............................................................................................................................. 1C-3 1C.2.5 50 kW Three Phase .............................................................................................................................. 1C-3 1C.2.6 65 kW Three Phase .............................................................................................................................. 1C-3 1C.2.7 80 kW Three Phase .............................................................................................................................. 1C-4 1C.2.8 100 kW Three Phase ............................................................................................................................ 1C-4 1C.2.9 Service Disconnect (All Models)........................................................................................................... 1C-4 1C.3.0 POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................. 1C-5 1C.4.0 GROUND REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................................... 1C-7 1C.5.0 OUTLINE DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................. 1C-8 1C.5.1 Generator Outline ................................................................................................................................. 1C-8 1C.5.2 Generator Weight ................................................................................................................................. 1C-8 1C.5.3 Generator Shipping Containers: Dimensions ....................................................................................... 1C-8 1C.6.0 LOCATING THE GENERATOR CABINET AND CONTROLLER............................................................. 1C-9 1C.6.1 Locating The Equipment In The X-Ray Room.................................................................................... 1C-10 1C.6.2 Seismic Centers for the Indico 100..................................................................................................... 1C-11 1C.7.0 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................... 1C-12 1C.8.0 CABLES SUPPLIED WITH THE INDICO 100 GENERATOR................................................................. 1C-12 1C.9.0 PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK LISTS ..................................................................................................... 1C-13 1C.9.1 Site Logistics....................................................................................................................................... 1C-13 1C.9.2 Installation Equipment ........................................................................................................................ 1C-13
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. L
Page 1C-1
1C
CPI Canada Inc.
1C.1.0 INTRODUCTION The following items must be considered before installing your generator: Power level of your generator. Power line requirements. Ground requirements. Physical placement of the generator. Environmental requirements for the generator. Cable runs from the generator to all room components: tables, Buckys, X-ray tubes etc.
1C.2.0 GENERATOR POWER REQUIREMENTS 1C.2.1 32 kW Single Phase Line Voltage Line Frequency Momentary Current Standby Current 230 VAC 10%, 1. 50/60 Hz. 200 Amps. 5 Amps.
1C.2.2 40 kW Single Phase Line Voltage Line Frequency Momentary Current Standby Current 230 VAC 10%, 1. 50/60 Hz. 250 Amps. 5 Amps.
1C.2.3 32 kW Three Phase Line Voltage 400 VAC 10%, 3. 480 VAC 10%, 3 with optional line adjusting transformer. Line Frequency Momentary Current 50/60 Hz. 65 Amps/phase at 400 VAC. 55 Amps/phase at 480 VAC. Standby Current 5 Amps.
Page 1C-2
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-02
CPI Canada Inc. 1C.2.4 40 kW Three Phase Line Voltage 400 VAC 10%, 3.
1C
480 VAC 10%, 3 with optional line adjusting transformer. Line Frequency Momentary Current 50/60 Hz. 80 Amps/phase at 400 VAC. 65 Amps/phase at 480 VAC. Standby Current 5 Amps.
1C.2.5 50 kW Three Phase Line Voltage 400 VAC 10%, 3 (for 400 VAC input generators). 480 VAC 10%, 3 with optional line adjusting transformer, (for 400 VAC input generators). 480 VAC 10%, 3 (for 480 VAC input generators).
* SEE NOTE AT THE END OF 1C.2.8

Line Frequency Momentary Current 50/60 Hz. 100 Amps/phase at 400 VAC. 80 Amps/phase at 480 VAC. Standby Current 5 Amps.

Ch # 740895-02
Rev. L
Page 1C-3
1C
CPI Canada Inc.


*NOTE:
50 kW AND HIGHER THREE-PHASE INDICO 100 GENERATORS ARE AVAILABLE IN 400 VAC AND 480 VAC MODELS. 400 VAC MODELS MUST BE OPERATED FROM 400 VAC MAINS, OR MAY BE OPERATED FROM 480 VAC MAINS WITH AN OPTIONAL LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER. 480 VAC MODELS MUST BE OPERATED FROM 480 VAC MAINS (THESE ARE THE NOMINAL MAINS VOLTAGES, THE ALLOWED TOLERANCES ARE AS DETAILED IN THE PREVIOUS TABLES).
1C.2.9 Service Disconnect (All Models) Refer to the following table for the recommended service disconnect ratings for the Generators (Power Supplies).
Page 1C-4
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-02
CPI Canada Inc. 1C.3.0 POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS
1C
The following table defines the power line requirements for the generators. NOTE: THE FOLLOWING TABLE CONTAINS RECOMMENDED VALUES FOR THE WIRE SIZES BETWEEN THE MAINS DISCONNECT AND THE GENERATOR. THE ACTUAL VALUES USED AT AN INSTALLATION ARE DEPENDENT ON THE QUALITY OF THE INPUT LINE (VOLTAGE LEVEL) THE CURRENT REQUIREMENTS AND THE LENGTH OF THE CABLE RUN AND MUST BE CONFIRMED BY THE INSTALLER.
FINAL SELECTION OF GENERATOR INPUT WIRE AND DISCONNECTS AS WELL AS THE CABLING FROM THE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER TO THE MAINS DISCONNECT, MUST MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LOCAL ELECTRICAL CODES AND IS
USUALLY DETERMINED BY HOSPITAL/CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING. ALL THE RATINGS LISTED CONSIDER THE GENERATOR REQUIREMENTS ONLY. THE INSTALLER MUST MAKE THE NECESSARY COMPENSATION FOR ADDITIONAL LOAD REQUIREMENTS
A POOR QUALITY INPUT LINE MAY RESULT IN THE INSTALLER HAVING TO DERATE THE GENERATOR'S MAXIMUM POWER
Mains Voltage
Minimum Recommended Mains Disconnect to Generator 15 ft/5 m max)
Generator Momentary Line Current
Minimum Recommended Generator Service Rating
Minimum Recommended Distribution Transformer Rating
Ground Wire Size
Apparent Mains Resistance
32 kW 1 Generator
230 VAC #4 (25 mm )
2
200 A
120 A
50 kVA
#4 (25mm )
2
0.055
40 kW 1 Generator
230 VAC #4 (25 mm )
2
250 A
120 A
65 kVA
#4 (25mm )
2
0.045
32 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC #6 (15 mm2) 480 VAC #6 (15 mm )
2
65 A
100 A
45 kVA
#4 (25mm2)
0.27
55 A
100 A
45 kVA
#4 (25mm )
2
0.40
40 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC #6 (15 mm ) 480 VAC #6 (15 mm )
2 2
80 A
100 A
55 kVA
#4 (25mm )
2
0.22
65 A
100 A
55 kVA
#4 (25mm )
2
0.32
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. L
Page 1C-5
1C

Minimum Recommended Mains Disconnect to Generator 15 ft/5 m max) Generator Momentary Line Current Minimum Recommended Generator Service Rating Minimum Recommended Distribution Transformer Rating
CPI Canada Inc.
Mains Voltage
Ground Wire Size
Apparent Mains Resistance
50 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC #6 (15 mm ) 480 VAC #6 (15 mm )
2 2
100 A
100 A
65 kVA
#4 (25mm )
2
0.17
80 A
100 A
65 kVA
#4 (25mm )
2
0.24
65 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC #6 (15 mm ) 480 VAC #6 (15 mm )
2 2
125 A
100 A
85 kVA
#4 (25mm )
2
0.13
105 A
100 A
85 kVA
#4 (25mm )
2
0.19
80 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC #6 (15 mm ) 480 VAC #6 (15 mm )
2 2
155 A
100 A
105 kVA
#4 (25mm )
2
0.11
130 A
100 A
105 kVA
#4 (25mm )
2
0.15
100 kW 3 Generator
400 VAC #6 (15 mm ) 480 VAC #6 (15 mm )
2 2
195 A
100 A
130 kVA
#4 (25mm )
2
0.09
160 A
100 A
130 kVA
#4 (25mm )
2
0.12
Page 1C-6
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-02
CPI Canada Inc. 1C.3.0 POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS (cont)
1C
All wiring and grounding should be in compliance with the national electrical code or equivalent. All wiring must be copper. For all installations, a separate copper ground cable #4 AWG (25 mm2) is required from the building distribution ground to the ground terminal located inside the main disconnect switch fuse block. The disconnect switch shall be located within reach of the operator.
1C.4.0 GROUND REQUIREMENTS POWER LINE: A suitable flexible copper cable #6 AWG (15 mm2) or larger must be supplied (usually part of the line cable) to connect from the disconnect switch to the main ground of the generator, located to the left of the main fuse block on the power input board. If a neutral line is provided with the system under no circumstances is it to be used for ground purposes. The ground conductor must carry fault currents only. X-RAY TUBE HOUSING: A copper ground cable, #10 AWG (6 mm2) or greater, is to be connected from each X-ray tubes housing to the H.T. tank ground stud (located at the top of the H.T. tank). STATOR CABLE: For units with a low speed starter, shielded stator cables are recommended. For units with a dual speed starter, shielded stator cables MUST be used. The shield for the stator cable(s) must be properly grounded at the chassis ground studs as per chapter 2.
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. L
Page 1C-7
1C
CPI Canada Inc.
1C.5.0 OUTLINE DRAWINGS 1C.5.1 Generator Outline Refer to chapter 1A for the Indico 100 generator outline.
1C.5.2 Generator Weight The weight of the generator cabinet and of the available consoles is listed below: Generator cabinet Control console (23 X 56 cm) Control console (31 X 42 cm) Control console (Rad only) Control console (Touch screen) 235 lbs (107 kg). 7 lbs (3.2 kg). 8 lbs (3.7 kg). 6 lbs (2.7 kg). 24 lbs (10.9 kg).
1C.5.3 Generator Shipping Containers: Dimensions The overall dimensions of the Indico 100 shipping pack are shown below.
Figure 1C-1: Generator shipping container
Page 1C-8
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-02
CPI Canada Inc. 1C.6.0 LOCATING THE GENERATOR CABINET AND CONTROLLER
1C
The generator cabinet is self standing and does not need to be supported. However, the installation should meet the following requirements: The floor must be flat and level. The floor must be capable of supporting a load of approximately 250 lbs (115 Kg). The generator installation area must be clean and free of dirt or debris. If required, the generator may be anchored to the floor via the hold-down brackets. See Figure 1C-2. Sufficient room must be provided to allow access to the rear and side panels for installation. Clearance must also be provided at both sides of the cabinet, at the front, and at the rear of the upper cabinet to allow access for service. See Figure 1C-3 for recommended clearances. A cable conduit should be provided from the control console to the generator cabinet to allow routing of the control cable if required. Allow for a 2 inch conduit. See Figure 1C-4.
Figure 1C-2: Anchoring plates for securing the generator
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. L
Page 1C-9
1C
CPI Canada Inc.
1C.6.1 Locating The Equipment In The X-Ray Room Figure 1C-3 shows recommended clearances around the generator. Figure 1C-4 shows recommended clearances for through-the-wall cable routing.
Figure 1C-3: Generator clearances
Figure 1C-4: Typical through the wall installation.
Page 1C-10
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-02
CPI Canada Inc. 1C.6.2 Seismic Centers for the Indico 100
1C
Figure 1C-5 shows the seismic center location for the Indico 100 X-ray generator.
Figure 1C-5: Indico 100 seismic centers
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. L
Page 1C-11
1C
CPI Canada Inc.
1C.7.0 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Listed below are the ventilation requirements for the Indico 100 series generator: Unrestricted air flow must be provided at the front and sides of the cabinet, as well as underneath the unit. Do not allow storage on top of the cabinet. Typical heat output of the generator during stand-by is 75 BTU/hr, or 4000 BTU/hr during fluoro operation. Control console heat output is negligible (150 BTU/hr).
1C.8.0 CABLES SUPPLIED WITH THE INDICO 100 GENERATOR Figure 1C-6 shows the cabling supplied with the generator: The cable supplied for the console is a 15 conductor cable with a standard length of 50 ft. (15 m). The cable supplied for the optional remote fluoro control is a 9 conductor cable with a standard length of 50 ft. (15 m).
Figure 1C-6: Cabling supplied with generator
Page 1C-12
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-02
CPI Canada Inc. 1C.9.0 PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK LISTS
1C
The following checklists are provided to help the installer during a pre-installation site visit, prior to installing the generator: Site logistics Installation equipment
1C.9.1 Site Logistics Before starting the generator installation, review the following checklist for site logistics. CHECK DESCRIPTION Is there an unloading area to transport the generator from the delivery truck to the inside of the building? If the installation is not on the same floor as the delivery entrance, is there an elevator available? Are all halls and doorways large enough to allow the generator to pass through? Is there a transport dolly or similar device to move the Generator? It must have a minimum rating of 250 lb. (115 Kg.) Do any regulatory bodies need to be notified prior to installation? If movers are required, have arrangements for time and equipment been completed? Are lifting straps or some other suitable device available to lift the generator off the shipping pallet?
1C.9.2 Installation Equipment The following is a checklist of recommended tools and test equipment for installation and calibration of the generator. NOTE: Please note that GenWare and a laptop computer are required for programming and calibration of the touch screen console. Refer to chapter 3C for details. CHECK DESCRIPTION GenWare and a laptop computer for setup and calibration if required. This is needed for programming and calibration of the touch screen console. General hand tools for installation: Wrenches, nut drivers, assortment of screwdrivers, pliers, etc. If the generator is to be anchored to the floor, suitable hardware and drills, drill bits etc must be available. A supply of connectors for wiring: lugs, caps, line splices etc. A calibrated DVM which indicates true RMS voltages. Dual trace memory oscilloscope with a minimum 20 MHz bandwidth; appropriate leads, probes, etc. Device for measuring true kVp and mA (mAs). This may be a Dynalyzer equivalent or a non-invasive system such as the Keithly TRIAD system. A calibrated radiation meter with detectors that will allow for R/min and uR type measurements (or uGy and Gy/min). A strobe or reed type tachometer to verify that the anode is rotating up to speed. A sufficient selection of patient absorbers to allow AEC and ABS calibration. A suggested selection is 3/4 inch Al (quantity 2); 1 mm of Cu (quantity 8), Water in containers of 5.0. 10.0, 15.0 cm thickness. Test phantoms to verify the imaging system with the generator.
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. L
Page 1C-13
1C
CPI Canada Inc.
Page 1C-14
Rev. L
Ch # 740895-02
CPI Canada Inc
Compatibility Listing
1D
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1D COMPATIBILITY LISTING

CONTENTS:
Section Title 1D.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 1D-2 1D.2.0 COMPATIBLE DEVICES AND OPTIONS.................................................................................................. 1D-2 1D.2.1 X-Ray Tubes ......................................................................................................................................... 1D-2 1D.2.2 Stators................................................................................................................................................... 1D-2 1D.2.3 AEC Devices......................................................................................................................................... 1D-2 1D.2.4 ABS Pickups ......................................................................................................................................... 1D-2 1D.2.5 Tomographic Tables ............................................................................................................................. 1D-2 1D.2.6 Digital Interfaces (R&F Generators) ..................................................................................................... 1D-2 1D.2.7 DAP (Dose Area Product)..................................................................................................................... 1D-3 1D.2.8 Options.................................................................................................................................................. 1D-3 1D.3.0 X-RAY TUBE DATA.................................................................................................................................. 1D-3 1D.4.0 COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ................................................................. 1D-4
Ch # 740904-02
Rev. C
Page 1D-1
1D
CPI Canada Inc
1D.1.0 INTRODUCTION This section details external equipment that is compatible with your specific generator, and lists options that are included in that generator.
1D.2.0 COMPATIBLE DEVICES AND OPTIONS The Millenia and Indico 100 family of generators may be factory or user configured to be compatible with various external devices. Certain features must be factory configured, others are user configurable. Please refer to chapter 2 and 3 of this manual and / or consult the factory for further specifics.
1D.2.1 X-Ray Tubes Various makes and models of inserts and housings are supported. CAUTION: PLEASE ENSURE THAT THE X-RAY TUBE INSERT IS AS STATED ON THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION. IF THE HOUSING HAS BEEN RELOADED WITH ANOTHER INSERT TYPE, CALIBRATION MAY BE SERIOUSLY AFFECTED AND MAY CAUSE TUBE DAMAGE.
1D.2.2 Stators Various types / impedances of stators are supported.
1D.2.3 AEC Devices The Millenia / Indico 100 family of X-ray generators may be configured to be compatible with various AEC devices (ionization, solid state or PMT) via the optional AEC board. Refer to the compatibility statement / product description at the end of this section for AEC device compatibility of this specific generator.
1D.2.4 ABS Pickups Various ABS pickups (light diode, composite video, PMT, etc) are supported on R&F generators depending on configuration. Refer to the compatibility statement / product description at the end of this section, and chapter 3E.
1D.2.5 Tomographic Tables Various. Please note that the generator is used as a backup timer ONLY in tomography. AEC is NOT available for tomography.
1D.2.6 Digital Interfaces (R&F Generators) The generator may be configured to be compatible with various digital imaging systems. Refer to the compatibility statement / product description at the end of this section.
Page 1D-2
Rev. C
Ch # 740904-02
CPI Canada Inc 1D.2.7 DAP (Dose Area Product)
1D
A DAP (Dose-Area Product) meter is available as an option on Indico 100 X-ray generators. Refer to chapter 3F for details.
1D.2.8 Options Major options include AEC board, DAP (Indico 100 only), remote fluoro control unit, dual speed starter, line adjusting transformer, and two tube HT transformer.
NOTE:
REFER TO THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AT THE END OF THIS SECTION FOR COMPATIBILITY OF THIS SPECIFIC GENERATOR.
1D.3.0 X-RAY TUBE DATA PLEASE INSERT THE TUBE RATING CHARTS FOR THE X-RAY TUBES USED WITH THIS GENERATOR.
TUBE #1 HOUSING (MAKE / MODEL): INSERT (MAKE / MODEL): SERIAL #: STATOR TYPE:
TUBE #2 HOUSING (MAKE / MODEL): INSERT (MAKE / MODEL): SERIAL #: STATOR TYPE:
Ch # 740904-02
Rev. C
Page 1D-3
1D
CPI Canada Inc
1D.4.0 COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The compatibility statement / product description for this generator follows this page.
Page 1D-4
Rev. C
Ch # 740904-02
CPI Canada Inc
1D
REPLACE (DISCARD) PAGE 5, 6 AND REPLACE WITH "COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION FORM 1 PAGE FOR CS FORM 2 PAGES FOR PD FORM
Ch # 740904-02
Rev. C
Page 1D-5
1D
CPI Canada Inc
Page 1D-6
Rev. C
Ch # 740904-02
CPI Canada Inc
Generator Layout and Major Components
1E
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1E GENERATOR LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS

CONTENTS:
1E.1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................1E-1 1E.2.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT...............................................................................................................1E-2 1E.2.1 Generator Cabinet Assembly.................................................................................................................1E-2 1E.2.2 Console Assembly .................................................................................................................................1E-4 1E.2.3 Remote Fluoro Control...........................................................................................................................1E-6 1E.2.4 Dual Speed Starter EPROM location.....................................................................................................1E-6
1E.1.0 INTRODUCTION This section contains generator layout drawings and figures that identify the major generator components and circuit board assemblies. This section also shows the location and correct orientation of the power EPROM (located on the generator CPU board, the console EPROM (located on the console CPU board), and the dual speed starter EPROM (located on the dual speed starter board if the dual speed starter option is used). Refer to the applicable figures to ensure correct EPROM placement and orientation should EPROM replacement be necessary.
Ch # 740895-03
Rev. H
Page 1E-1
1E
CPI Canada Inc
1E.2.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT 1E.2.1 Generator Cabinet Assembly The following major assemblies are located within the generator cabinet: Auxiliary power supply. Generator control circuits. Room interface for the X-ray system. Low speed starter or optional dual speed starter. High frequency inverter. H.T. transformer. Optional AEC board (automatic exposure control). Optional DAP interface board.
Figure 1E-1 shows the major components within the front and right side of the generator cabinet. Figure 1E-2 shows the major components accessible from the left side and the rear of the generator cabinet.
Figure 1E-1: Major generator subassemblies & power EPROM location
Page 1E-2
Rev. H
Ch # 740895-03
CPI Canada Inc 1E.2.1 Generator Cabinet Assembly (Cont)
1E
Figure 1E-2: Major generator subassemblies (right side and rear)
Ch # 740895-03
Rev. H
Page 1E-3
1E
CPI Canada Inc
1E.2.2 Console Assembly Figure 1E-3 is an overview of the 23 X 56 cm console, the 31 X 42 cm console, the Rad-only console, and the touch screen console for Indico 100 generators. Figure 1E-4 is an internal view of these console styles (except touch screen), showing the major components and cabling in the console assembly. The touch screen console contains no user serviceable parts, and must be returned to the factory for service.
INDICO 100
23 X 56 cm Console
31 X 42 cm Console
Rad only Console
Touch Screen Console
FILE: IN_CON1.CDR
Figure 1E-3: Console top / external view
Page 1E-4
Rev. H
Ch # 740895-03
CPI Canada Inc 1E.2.2 Console Assembly (Cont)
1E
Figure 1E-4: Console internal view including EPROM location
Ch # 740895-03
Rev. H
Page 1E-5
1E
CPI Canada Inc
1E.2.3 Remote Fluoro Control Figure 1E-5 is an overview of the optional remote fluoro control for the Indico 100 generators. This allows operation of fluoro functions from a location other than the main console.
Figure 1E-5: Remote fluoro control unit overview
1E.2.4 Dual Speed Starter EPROM location
Figure 1E-6: EPROM location inside the dual speed starter
Page 1E-6
Rev. H
Ch # 740895-03
CPI Canada Inc.
Installation
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CONTENTS: 2.1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.2.0 RECEIVING................................................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.2.1 Major Shipping Assemblies ....................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.3.0 REMOVAL FROM PACK............................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.3.1 Lifting The Generator ................................................................................................................................ 2-5 2.4.0 REMOVING THE EXTERNAL COVERS....................................................................................................... 2-6 2.5.0 LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER ............................................................................................................ 2-8 2.6.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................................................................................. 2-8 2.7.0 INSPECTING THE HT TANK ........................................................................................................................2-8 2.8.0 EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT .......................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.8.1 Equipment Cabinet.................................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.8.2 Control Console......................................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.8.3 Anchoring The Generator To The Floor .................................................................................................... 2-9 2.8.4 Leveling ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-9 2.9.0 WIRING TO THE GENERATOR.................................................................................................................... 2-9 2.9.1 Control Console......................................................................................................................................... 2-9 2.9.2 Remote Fluoro Control (Optional) ........................................................................................................... 2-12 2.9.3 Hand Switch Installation .......................................................................................................................... 2-12 2.9.4 X-Ray Tube Stator & Thermal Switch Connections ................................................................................ 2-14 2.9.5 Generator Mains Connection .................................................................................................................. 2-15 2.9.6 Room Equipment..................................................................................................................................... 2-16 2.9.7 Emergency Power Off / Power Distribution Relay .................................................................................. 2-16 2.10.0 X-RAY TUBE HOUSING GROUND .......................................................................................................... 2-16 2.11.0 HIGH TENSION CABLES.......................................................................................................................... 2-16 2.12.0 PROGRAMMING THE LOW SPEED STARTER....................................................................................... 2-18 2.12.1 Low Speed Starter Tube Select Table .................................................................................................. 2-18 2.12.2 Low Speed Starter Boost Voltage Selection ......................................................................................... 2-18 2.12.3 Low Speed Starter Run Voltage Selection............................................................................................ 2-20 2.12.4 Low Speed Starter Boost Time Selection ............................................................................................. 2-21 2.13.0 PROGRAMMING THE DUAL SPEED STARTER ..................................................................................... 2-21 2.13.1 Setting tube type ................................................................................................................................... 2-21 2.13.2 Confirming/Changing DSS Starter Type ............................................................................................... 2-23 2.13.3 Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table ................................................................................................. 2-25 2.13.4 Configuring dual speed starter 733317-08 / 735925-08 ....................................................................... 2-25 2.14.0 GENERATOR LOCKOUT SWITCH .......................................................................................................... 2-26 2.15.0 SAFETY INTERLOCKS............................................................................................................................. 2-27 2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE ........................................................................... 2-27 2.17.0 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS........................................................................................................................... 2-31 2.18.0 INITIAL RUN-UP ....................................................................................................................................... 2-32 2.18.1 Initial Voltage Measurements ................................................................................................................ 2-32 2.18.2 Initial Power Up ..................................................................................................................................... 2-33 2.18.3 Single Phase Primary Tap Selection..................................................................................................... 2-34 2.18.4 Three Phase Primary Tap Selection ..................................................................................................... 2-36
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-1
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.19.0 PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION USING THE CONSOLE ..............................................................2-37 2.19.1 Entering Into Programming/Calibration Mode .......................................................................................2-37 2.19.2 Menu Selections ....................................................................................................................................2-38 2.20.0 TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION .....................................................................................................................2-40 2.21.0 FINAL CHECKS.........................................................................................................................................2-41
Page 2-2
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.1.0 INTRODUCTION
Installation
This chapter contains instructions for unpacking, positioning, and cabling the Indico 100 series of generators to allow initial operation and calibration. The instructions in this chapter allows the installation engineer to: Install the generator and control console. Install the optional remote fluoro control. Connect power. Calibrate one or two X-ray tube(s), depending on the generator model, without completing the room interface connections. This allows for simpler installation and troubleshooting on the generator itself.
2.2.0
RECEIVING THE INDICO 100 GENERATOR CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: UPPER AND LOWER CABINETS (FACTORY ASSEMBLED), CONTROL CONSOLE, AND AN OPTIONAL REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL. THE COMPLETE GENERATOR WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 250 POUNDS (115 KG) IN ITS SHIPPING CONTAINER. THE OPTIONAL LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER IS SUPPLIED IN A SEPARATE ENCLOSURE, THE WEIGHT OF THAT ASSEMBLY IS APPROXIMATELY 100 POUNDS (45 KG). THE OIL TANK IS LOCATED IN THE LOWER (POWER SUPPLY) CABINET. ONE PERSON SHOULD NOT ATTEMPT TO LIFT OR MOVE THE GENERATOR ASSEMBLY OR OPTIONAL LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER WITHOUT ADEQUATE ASSISTANCE OR PROPER EQUIPMENT.
WARNING:
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-3
Installation Major Shipping Assemblies
CPI Canada Inc.
2.2.1
Refer to figure 1A-2 (chapter 1A). This shows the upper (control cabinet) and lower (power supply) cabinet fully assembled, along with the control console and optional remote fluoro control unit.
2.3.0
REMOVAL FROM PACK 1. Inspect the pack for evidence of shipping damage. If there is evidence of shipping damage, note this in the event that a damage claim is justified. Locate any documentation attached to the outside of the cardboard sleeve. Be sure to read and understand this documentation before unpacking the generator. Then set this documentation aside temporarily until it can be transferred to a storage location close to the generator for future reference. Remove the cardboard outer pack(s). OPEN THE CARDBOARD PACK(S) CAREFULLY. SHARP TOOLS MAY DAMAGE THE CONTENTS. Set aside the cardboard pack(s). Unscrew the bolts that secure the generator to the shipping pallet. Carefully lift the generator from the pallet. Refer to 2.3.1 for the procedure for lifting the generator. Inspect for internal and external shipping damage. Refer to 2.4.0 for instructions for removing the external covers. Unscrew the leveling feet at the bottom of the generator by a minimum of 1 in. (35 mm). This will provide the required air flow underneath the generator cabinet and allow room to make leveling adjustments when the generator is placed in its final location. Remove and unpack the control console, the optional line adjusting transformer if used, the optional remote fluoro control if used, and the optional hand switch kit if included, and check these items for any damage. Remove and unpack the manuals and any other paperwork that may be packed with the generator. Keep the shipping containers. In case of shipping damage, place the unit(s) back in its shipping pack and notify the carrier and the customer support group at CPI Canada Inc.
2.
3. CAUTION:
4. 5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Page 2-4
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.3.1 Lifting The Generator
Installation
One of the following methods is recommended for lifting or maneuvering the generator. Since the generator weighs more that 30 kg (65 lbs), proper lifting equipment should be used or additional help should be obtained to lift the unit. Refer to figure 1E-1 and figure 2-2 for identification of the panels referenced below. Lifting straps can be used along with a hoist to raise the generator. The straps should be placed underneath the generator cabinet and along the four sides to properly support the cabinet as it is raised. Remove the main access panel and the lower wiring access panel from the generator cabinet (refer to 2.4.0 - removing the external covers). The metal cross brace found at the front of the cabinet (below the circuit board mounting panel) may be used, in conjunction with the lip at the upper edge of the opening for the lower wiring access panel, as lifting points. Two people (one on each side) will be required to lift or maneuver the generator cabinet.
Figure 2-1: Generator lifting points
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-5
Installation REMOVING THE EXTERNAL COVERS
CPI Canada Inc.
2.4.0
NOTE: A POTENTIAL HAZARD EXISTS TO OPERATORS, SERVICE PERSONNEL, OR TO THE EQUIPMENT IF THE GENERATOR IS OPERATED WITH ANY OF THE GROUND LEADS TO THE EXTERNAL COVERS DISCONNECTED OR IMPROPERLY CONNECTED. BE SURE TO PROPERLY RECONNECT ALL GROUND LEADS AFTER COMPLETING ANY PROCEDURE THAT REQUIRES THEIR REMOVAL. REFER TO FIGURE 2-2 FOR IDENTIFICATION OF COVERS / PANELS DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION. Upper Cabinet Hood Remove the four screws that secure the upper cabinet hood to the generator (two on each side). Carefully lift the hood off the generator. Temporarily disconnect the ground lead connecting the upper cabinet hood to the generator, if necessary. Reverse the above steps to reconnect the ground wire(s), and to reinstall the upper cabinet hood. Main Access Panel Remove the upper cabinet hood as described above (this must be done before the main access panel can be removed). Then remove the screws that secure the main access panel to the generator cabinet (these screws are located on both sides of the main access panel). The panel may then be pulled away from the frame. Temporarily disconnect the ground lead connecting the panel to the cabinet, if necessary. Reverse the above steps to reconnect the ground wire(s), and to reinstall the access panel. Lower Wiring Access Panel THIS PANEL IS NOT FITTED IF THE OPTIONAL WIRING CHANNELS ARE USED. Remove the screw from the upper right hand corner of the panel. Pull out the snaps on the three nylon fasteners such as to release the panel. Remove the panel from the generator. Upper & Lower Wiring Channels The wiring channels are optional. If the wiring channels are fitted, the cable access covers in the upper part of the cabinet and the lower wiring access panel will not be used. To remove these panels, remove the screws from the upper left hand and upper right hand corner of the panel to be removed. Then slide the wiring channel up such that the shoulder rivets clear the keyhole slot at the bottom of the channel. The wiring channel may then be removed from the generator.
Page 2-6
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.4.0 REMOVING THE EXTERNAL COVERS (Cont)
Installation
Figure 2-2: Removable external covers on generator cabinet
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-7
Installation LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER
CPI Canada Inc.
2.5.0
An optional line-adjusting transformer is available if required to allow 480 VAC generators to operate from 400 VAC mains, or to allow 400 VAC generators to be operated from 480 VAC mains. The line adjusting transformer is supplied in a separate enclosure. Please consult the factory for further details regarding this option.
2.6.0
MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT Refer to chapter 1E for major component identification and layout.
2.7.0
INSPECTING THE HT TANK Before continuing with the installation of the generator, the HT oil tank should be inspected as per the following steps: Verify that there is no obvious shipping damage to the tank (i.e. dents to the tank surface). Carefully check the inside of the generator cabinet and the HT tank for evidence of any oil loss. Refer to chapter 6 if it is suspected that there has been some loss of oil. Verify that the clamps supporting the HT oil tank are tight. Verify that all the connections to the tank lid are secure. Verify that the rubber vent plug on the top of the tank is snug.
2.8.0 2.8.1
EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT Equipment Cabinet Place the equipment cabinet in a location that will allow the following: Easy front and side access for service and sufficient clearance at the rear for room interface cables. Refer to chapter 1C. Air circulation - a minimum height of 1 in. (35 mm) is recommended to allow airflow underneath the generator. Do not cover or block the cooling slots on the cabinet. Stable footing - the leveling feet at the bottom of the cabinet will be used to prevent movement during normal operation. Close proximity to service disconnect boxes - cables should not be on the floor where they could be stepped on.
2.8.2
Control Console Locate the control console in its intended position and ensure that it is stable. Refer to chapter 1C: If the console is located on a shelf, supply index pins or equivalent hardware to the base of the console to prevent slipping. Ensure that the console is mounted at a height and angle to allow easy viewing of the displays. If the optional CPI pedestal stand is to be used for the console mounting, follow the mounting instructions supplied with the stand. Leave sufficient slack in the cabling to the console to allow for future service and maintenance.
Page 2-8
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.8.2 Control Console (Cont)
Installation
NOTE: DO NOT LOCATE THE CONTROL CONSOLE WHERE X-RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT DURING INSTALLATION OR OPERATION.
NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE CONSOLE CABLE NOT BE DISASSEMBLED FOR SYSTEM INSTALLATION. HOWEVER, IF THIS IS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY TO ROUTE THE CABLE, PLEASE ENSURE CAREFUL AND CORRECT REASSEMBLY OF THE CONNECTOR SHELL TO AVOID ANY POSSIBILITY OF PINCHING OF THE INTERNAL WIRES BY THE SHELL.
YOU MAY CHOOSE TO TEMPORARILY LOCATE THE CONSOLE NEAR TO THE GENERATOR FOR INITIAL PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION. IF THIS IS SO, PLEASE COMPLETE THE FINAL CONSOLE INSTALLATION PER THIS SECTION WHEN THE GENERATOR INSTALLATION IS COMPLETED.
2.8.3
Anchoring The Generator To The Floor If it is desired to anchor the generator to the floor, refer to chapter 1C. This should not be done until all cable hookups are completed that require rear access to the generator.
2.8.4
Leveling Adjust the leveling feet such that the generator is level and stable. This adjustment must be made for both anchored and freestanding generator installations. As noted in 2.3.0, the leveling feet must be unscrewed by a minimum of 1 in. (35 mm) to allow for proper airflow underneath the generator.
2.9.0 2.9.1
WIRING TO THE GENERATOR Control Console 1. Route the generator end of the console cable into the generator cabinet via the access cover in the upper part of the cabinet nearest to J4 on the generator interface board. Connect the console cable to J4 on the generator interface board. For the Rad-only console, connect the console cable to J16 on the generator interface board. Connect the free end of the console cable as follows: For the 23 X 56 (cm) console and the 31 X 42 (cm) console, connect the free end of the console cable to J5 at the rear of the console. For the Rad-only console, connect the free end of the console cable to the J8 at the rear of the console. For the touch screen console, connect the free end of the console cable to J2 on the touch screen interface board at the rear of the console. Ensure that the screw locks are fully tightened to secure the connectors.
2.
3.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-9
Installation Control Console (Cont) 4.
CPI Canada Inc.
2.9.1
FOR THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE ONLY: a) Connect one end of the supplied ground wire to the touch screen console ground screw, shown in figure 2-3. Connect the other end of the ground wire to one of the ground studs on the generator chassis, under the room interface board. b) Connect the supplied line cord from the rear of the touch screen to the generator as follows: Green (ground) to one of the ground studs on the generator chassis, under the room interface board. White (neutral) to any terminal on TB7 on the room interface board. Black (line) to any terminal on TB9 on the room interface board. c) JW1 on the generator interface board should be set such that the 110 / 220 VAC supply on the room interface board is on at all times that the generator main disconnect is switched on. The procedure for setting this jumper is described in chapter 3B. THE POWER CABLE FOR THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE GENERATOR AS DESCRIBED ABOVE, AND NOT CONNECTED TO AN INDEPENDENT SOURCE OF AC. THE CONSOLE REQUIRES THE LINE ISOLATION PROVIDED BY THE ROOM INTERFACE TRANSFORMER IN THE GENERATOR IN ORDER TO MEET IEC REGULATIONS.
5.
Figure 2-3 shows the designations and functions of the connectors on the rear panel of the control console.
DO NOT CONNECT UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT TO THE REAR OF THE CONSOLE. For the 23 X 56 (cm) console, J5 is used for the interconnect cable to the generator main cabinet, J4 is not used, J2 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J1 is for connection of an optional printer. For the 31 X 42 (cm) console, J5 is used for the interconnect cable to the generator main cabinet, J2 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J13 is for connection of an external hand switch and / or foot switch. For the Rad-only console, J3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J4 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J8 is for the interconnect cable to the main cabinet. For the touch screen console, J2 on the touch screen interface board is for the interconnect cable to the generator main cabinet, J3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J5 connects to the membrane switch assembly with the on / off and prep / expose switches, and J4 is a serial port for use by an external computer. INCORRECT CONNECTIONS OR USE OF UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
Page 2-10
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.9.1 Control Console (Cont)
Installation
Figure 2-3: Rear of control console
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-11
Installation Remote Fluoro Control (Optional) 1.
CPI Canada Inc.
2.9.2
Connect the free end of the 9 conductor remote fluoro cable (from the optional remote fluoro control box) to J11 of the generator CPU board. Ensure that the screw locks are fully tightened to secure the connector. Refer to figure 2-4 for the location of J11 on the generator CPU board. The cable should be routed into the generator via the access cover in the upper part of the cabinet closest to J11 on the generator CPU board.
Figure 2-4: Remote fluoro connector on generator CPU board
2.9.3
Hand Switch Installation FOR 23 X 56 (CM) CONSOLES: The optional hand switch is supplied as a kit that must be user installed. If this option is used, refer to separate installation instructions packaged along with the hand switch. For reference, a drawing is supplied in this section showing the hand switch connections to the console CPU board. See figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5: Hand switch connections on console CPU board
Page 2-12
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.9.3 Hand Switch Installation (Cont)
Installation
FOR 31 X 42 (CM) CONSOLES, RAD-ONLY CONSOLES, AND TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLES: The optional hand switch, if ordered from CPI Canada Inc, is supplied pre-wired to a male 9 pin subminiature D connector. This connects to J13 on the rear of the 31 X 42 cm console, to J3 on the rear of the Rad-only console, or to J3 on the touch screen interface board on the rear of the touch screen console. Fluoro foot switch connections may also be made to this connector (31 X 42 cm console with fluoro option only). For the touch screen console, the fluoro foot switch connections must be made to the room interface board as per chapter 3B. The table below shows the pin designations for the hand switch connector on the console. A male 9 pin subminiature D connector will need to be provided by the installer if the CPI supplied hand switch is not used. PIN NUMBER J13 PIN CONNECTIONS 31 X 42 CM CONSOLE J3 PIN CONNECTIONS RAD-ONLY CONSOLE AND TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE Hand Switch: X-Ray No Connection Hand Switch: Prep No Connection Hand Switch: Common (ground) NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Hand Switch: X-Ray No Connection Hand Switch: Prep No Connection Hand Switch: Common (ground) No Connection Foot Switch: live terminal No Connection Foot Switch: ground terminal
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-13
Installation X-Ray Tube Stator & Thermal Switch Connections Refer to figure 2-6 for the X-ray tube stator and thermal switch connections. 1.
CPI Canada Inc.
2.9.4
Route the X-ray tube stator cable(s) through the lower wiring access panel panel on the rear of the generator cabinet, then route the cables towards the stator terminal blocks as shown in the figure below. FOR UNITS WITH A LOW SPEED STARTER, SHIELDED STATOR CABLES ARE RECOMMENDED. FOR UNITS WITH A DUAL SPEED STARTER, SHIELDED STATOR CABLES MUST BE USED. THE SHIELD FOR THE STATOR CABLE(S) MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED AT THE CHASSIS GROUND STUD(S) SHOWN IN FIGURE 2-6.
2.
Connect the wires to the appropriate terminal as shown. The tube thermal switch will normally be connected to the THERMAL SWITCH connections on the stator terminal block, but may optionally be connected to the room interface board (refer to chapter 3B). Ensure that all terminal connections are tight, then dress and secure the cables. ONE TUBE ONLY GENERATORS WILL HAVE 1 STATOR TERMINAL BLOCK FITTED. THE LOWER TERMINAL BLOCK IN FIGURE 2-6 IS ONLY FITTED ON TWO TUBE GENERATORS.
3. NOTE:
Figure 2-6: Stator connections to generator
Page 2-14
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.9.5 Generator Mains Connection
Installation
WARNING:
TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, ENSURE THAT THE AC MAINS DISCONNECT IS LOCKED IN THE OFF POSITION, AND THAT ALL MAINS CABLES ARE DE-ENERGIZED BEFORE CONNECTING TO THE GENERATOR.
Refer to chapter 1C for generator power and generator power line requirements. 1. 2. 3. Pass the AC mains cable through the access hole located at the lower rear of the generator. Use an appropriate cable clamp to secure the mains cable at the cabinet entrance. Temporarily remove the safety cover from the main fuses. Strip sufficient cable jacket to allow the ground wire to reach the main ground connector located at the left side of the main fuse block. Refer to figure 2-7. Connect the ground wire to the chassis ground connector, and connect the mains wires to the terminals on the bottom of the main fuse holder (3 wires for 3 phase systems, 2 wires for single phase systems). Be sure to replace the main fuse safety cover after all connections are made and properly tightened. DO NOT SWITCH ON MAINS POWER AT THIS TIME.
4.
5.
Figure 2-7: Generator mains connections
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-15
Installation Room Equipment
CPI Canada Inc.
2.9.6
Refer to chapter 3B, 3D, 3E, and 3F for connection of the room equipment (Buckys, miscellaneous inputs and outputs, AEC, ABS, DAP, etc.). It is suggested that these items not be connected until after the initial run-up of the generator is complete, and the tube auto calibration has been performed as described near the end of this chapter.
2.9.7
Emergency Power Off / Power Distribution Relay To connect an external emergency power-off switch, disconnect the jumper from J17-1 to J17-2 on the generator interface board. Then connect the emergency-off switch to J17-1 and J17-2. Refer to MD-0762 in chapter 9. For installations where installer-supplied auxiliary power distribution circuits are added to the generator, 24 VDC is available on the generator interface board to drive the coil of the power distribution relay. Connect the coil to J17-3 (+) and J17-4 (ground). Refer to MD-0788 in chapter 9. The maximum current available from this source is 100 mA.
2.10.0 X-RAY TUBE HOUSING GROUND A separate ground wire (10 AWG, 6mm2) must be connected from each X-ray tube housing to one of the ground studs on the HT tank. Refer to figure 2-8 or 2-9. These ground locations may have other ground wires already connected, ensure that these existing ground wires are not disconnected when making the X-ray tube ground connection. Failure to make this ground connection may result in intermittent operation and/or exposure errors.
2.11.0 HIGH TENSION CABLES The X-ray tube(s) should be mounted on their normal fixtures i.e. tube stand, G.I. table or other devices. 1. 2. 3. Verify that the HT cable terminations are clean, in good condition i.e. no cracks, and coated with vapor proof compound. Remove the plastic caps that cover the high voltage terminals on the HT tank. These should be saved in case of a future requirement to transport the generator or HT tank. Connect the high tension cables as per the installation requirements. Use the right angle connectors for the HT transformer end. Ensure that the cables for tube 1 (and tube 2 if used) are plugged into the proper connectors on the HT tank. Refer to figure 2-8 and 2-9. On two tube R&F generators, the fan may need to be removed in order to install the tube 2 HT connectors. To do this, disconnect the AC power leads from the fan. Next, remove and temporarily set aside the two socket - head screws and washers from the fan mounting bracket. Slide the fan assembly forward, and then remove the fan assembly to connect the HT cables. To re-install the fan assembly, slide the fan assembly into position under the inverter assembly, using the tabs on the mounting bracket to support the inside end of the bracket. Replace the screws and washers to secure the fan assembly. Lastly, reconnect the AC power leads to the fan. Be sure that the HT cable connectors are tight and there is no play between the connector insulator and the screw down ring.
4.
Page 2-16
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.11.0 HIGH TENSION CABLES (cont)
Installation
Figure 2-8: HV connectors (1 tube tanks)
Figure 2-9: HV connectors (2 tube tanks)
NOTE: PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING IF USING METAL CENTER SECTION X-RAY TUBES The mA feedback signals, as measured at the mA test points on the control board, represent anode mA. X-ray emission in the tube is a result of the anode current. The mA measured at terminals E17 - E18 of the HT tank is cathode current. In a metal center section tube, the anode current will be less than the cathode current, the difference being body current. In a metal center section tube, the cathode current may exceed the anode current by up to 15%. Although the anode and cathode currents may be unequal, the anode to cathode kV regulation is not affected. Due to the presence of body current, filament drive and emission may need to be greater than expected for a given mA station. The power lost to body current may need to be considered relative to the maximum generator output. When installing a metal center section tube, it is essential that the center section of the X-ray tube be securely grounded; otherwise premature tube failure may result.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-17
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.12.0 PROGRAMMING THE LOW SPEED STARTER This section applies only to units fitted with the low speed starter. PLEASE BE SURE TO READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS SECTION FULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING. Before continuing, note the part number of the low speed starter in the generator. Part number 732752-00 has a 33 F phase-shift capacitor; part number 732752-01 has a 12.5 F capacitor, and part number 732752-02 has a 45 F capacitor. Confirm that the phase shift capacitor is compatible with the desired tube(s) as listed in table 1 in Supplement 746026, which follows chapter 2. The starter boost voltage is set to approximately 240 VAC, (except where specifically noted in table 1), and the starter run voltage is selectable to be 52, 73, or 94 VAC. Boost times are selectable to be either 1.5 seconds, or 2.5 seconds. Therefore, the generator may be configured to be compatible with stator types as per table 1 only. If the desired tube type is not listed, please contact CPI product support for assistance. WARNING: 240 VAC IS PRESENT ON THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD AT ALL TIMES THAT THE GENERATOR IS SWITCHED ON. TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING THIS BOARD
2.12.1 Low Speed Starter Tube Select Table See Supplement 746026, which immediately follows this chapter.
2.12.2 Low Speed Starter Boost Voltage Selection THIS APPLIES TO ONE-TUBE GENERATORS ONLY. Follow the steps below to verify and configure the correct low speed starter boost voltage. 1. Confirm the required BOOST VOLTAGE for the selected tube type per table 1 in supplement 746026, which follows chapter 2. The requirement for the vast majority of tubes in table 1 is 240 V. For tubes that require 120 V boost, this is noted along with the run voltage, boost time, etc for that tube. Refer to figure 2-10 (power supply auxiliary transformer). Locate this transformer under the power input board; refer to chapter 1E for details. If there is only one connection on the 120V tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer, the boost voltage is set to 240 VAC. If there are two connections on the 120V tap, the boost voltage is set to 120 VAC. Confirm the correct boost voltage at F1 on the low speed starter board if a suitable voltmeter is available. Go to 2.12.3 if the boost voltage is properly set for the selected tube type and therefore does NOT need to be changed.
Page 2-18
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.12.2 Low Speed Starter Boost Voltage Selection (Cont) THIS APPLIES TO ONE-TUBE GENERATORS ONLY. 2.
Installation
If the boost voltage tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer needs to be changed from 240V to 120V, proceed as follows: Loosen the clamping screws for the 240V tap and for the 120V tap. Move the boost voltage lead from the 240V tap to the 120V tap. The boost voltage lead is the lead that connects directly to J1 on the low speed starter board. Do not disturb the other leads on the 120V and / or 240V taps. Ensure that the wires are positioned between the two metal clamps on the transformer terminal block. Retighten both of the clamping screws. Confirm the correct boost voltage at F1 on the low speed starter board if a suitable voltmeter is available. If the boost voltage tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer needs to be changed from 120V to 240V, proceed as follows: Loosen the clamping screws for the 120V tap and for the 240V tap. Move the boost voltage lead from the 120V tap to the 240V tap. The boost voltage lead is the lead that connects directly to J1 on the low speed starter board. Do not disturb the other leads on the 120V and / or 240V taps Ensure that the wires are positioned between the two metal clamps on the transformer terminal block. Retighten both of the clamping screws. Confirm the correct boost voltage at F1 on the low speed starter board if a suitable voltmeter is available.
3.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-19
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.12.3 Low Speed Starter Run Voltage Selection Follow the steps below to verify and configure the correct low speed starter run-voltage. 1. Note the required RUN VOLTAGE for the selected tube type per table 1 in Supplement 746026 which follows chapter 2. Then confirm the low speed starter run-voltage in the generator. This is determined by the run-voltage setting on the power supply auxiliary transformer. Refer to figure 2-10. Locate this transformer under the power input board; refer to chapter 1E for details. Locate the run-voltage output on the transformer. This will be set to the 52V, 73V, or 94V tap, and must match the required run-voltage for the selected tube in table 1. Go to 2.12.4 if the run-voltage setting is correct for the selected tube type, and therefore does NOT need to be changed. If the run-voltage setting on the power supply auxiliary transformer needs to be changed, proceed as follows: Loosen the clamping screws for the current run-voltage tap, and for the required run-voltage tap. Move the run-voltage output lead from the current tap position to the required tap position (52V, 73V, or 94V). Ensure that the wire is positioned between the two metal clamps on the transformer terminal block. Retighten both of the clamping screws.
2.
Figure 2-10: Low speed run-voltage tap selection
Page 2-20
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.12.4 Low Speed Starter Boost Time Selection Follow the steps below to verify and configure the low speed starter boost time. 1.
Installation
Confirm the current low speed starter boost time selection: Locate jumper JW1 on the auxiliary board. Refer to chapter 1E for the board location. Confirm that the current boost time setting matches the tube in use: Jumper position 1.5S = 1.5 second boost, no jumper at JW1 = 2.5 second boost. Do not use the .15S position. If required, adjust the boost time by changing the JW1 jumper position as described above.
2.
NOTE: CONFIRM PROPER LOW SPEED STARTER CONFIGURATION USING A SUITABLE TACHOMETER BEFORE MAKING ANY EXPOSURES.
2.13.0 PROGRAMMING THE DUAL SPEED STARTER This section applies only to units fitted with the dual speed starter option. The dual speed starter must be programmed for the X-ray tube type(s) used at this site. This is done via DIP switches SW1 and SW2 on the dual speed starter. The following tube functions are set with these switches: High speed start and run voltages Low speed start and run voltages Brake time and brake voltage (high speed) Boost times Boost time increments. Boost time may be increased in 100 ms steps in the range of 100 to 700 ms SW1 and SW2 on the dual speed starter must be set correctly to match the X-ray tube(s) in use. Failure to set these correctly may result in improper anode RPM and therefore may damage the X-ray tube. PLEASE BE SURE TO READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS SECTION FULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING.
2.13.1 Setting tube type 1. Select the desired tube type from table 2 in Supplement 746026 which follows Chapter 2. Record the tube type number (housing and insert) and the binary code as per the third column in the table. Please note that the tube compatibility applies only to the housing and inserts listed, i.e. for the specific manufacturer(s) shown. If the desired tube type is not listed, please contact CPI product support for assistance. The generator is factory configured to support one type of stator only (for example R type stator), therefore only stators of that type may be used with this generator. Refer to the customer product description form in chapter 1D of this manual for compatible X-ray tubes. REFER TO SECTION 2.13.2 IF IT IS DESIRED TO USE TUBES WITH STATOR TYPES NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THIS GENERATOR, OR IF YOU ARE NOT CERTAIN THAT THIS GENERATOR IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE STATOR IN YOUR TUBE.
2. 3.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-21
Installation 2.13.1 Setting tube type (cont) 4.
CPI Canada Inc.
Refer to figure 2-11. Set the DIP switch SW1 (for tube 1) with the binary code for the selected tube. The binary code shown in the table programs the tube type (housing and insert), for example housing type Varian Diamond with standard R stator and inserts per table 2 in Supplement 746026 which follows Chapter 2, requires SW1-1 to be set OFF, SW1-2 OFF, SW13 ON, SW1-4 OFF and SW1-5 OFF. This programs the voltages, brake times, and boost times in table 2. Additionally, SW1-6 to SW1-8 may be set to give incremental increases in boost time over the preselected values (for example to run an older tube with worn bearings). For example, binary 000 gives zero increase, binary 001 gives 100 ms increase, binary 100 gives 400 ms increase, and binary 111 gives a 700 ms increase in boost time. SW1-6 represents bit 1, SW1-7 bit 2, and SW1-8 represents bit 3. EXAMPLE: Binary 100 = decimal 4 = 400 ms incremental boost time increase: 1 Bit 3 SW1-8 0 Bit 2 SW1-7 0 Bit 1 SW1-6
5.
The example DIP switch setting shown in figure 2-11 is for the example in step 4 with an incremental increase in boost time of 200 ms. If this is a two-tube installation, repeat steps 1 to 4 using DIP switch SW2 for the second tube. Please confirm all settings using a suitable tachometer to ensure proper anode RPM before making any exposures. FOR TUBES WHERE LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY IS INDICATED, THE DUAL SPEED STARTER MUST BE PROGRAMMED FOR LOW SPEED ONLY, AND WHERE HIGH SPEED OPERATION ONLY IS INDICATED, THE DUAL SPEED STARTER MUST BE PROGRAMMED FOR HIGH SPEED OPERATION ONLY. REFER TO THE TUBE SELECTION SECTION IN CHAPTER 3C FOR THE PROCEDURE TO DO THIS. NOTE THAT THE EXAMPLE DIP SWITCH SHOWN IN FIGURE 2-11 IS REPRESENTATIVE OF ONE STYLE OF SWITCH ONLY. DEPENDING ON MANUFACTURER, YOUR DIP SWITCH STYLE MAY VARY. PLEASE NOTE THE ON/OFF POSITIONS CAREFULLY FOR YOUR UNIT.
6. 7.
NOTE:
Page 2-22
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.13.1 Setting tube type (cont)
Installation
Figure 2-11: DIP switches on dual speed starter.
2.13.2 Confirming/Changing DSS Starter Type The low speed and high speed phase shift capacitors for the stator start winding must be matched to the desired stator type, for example the required high speed phase shift capacitor is 6 uF for R type stators and 7.5 uF for GE Maxiray type stators. Therefore, for example, a dual speed starter configured for an R type stator CANNOT drive a GE Maxiray type stator. Use the steps in this section to verify that the dual speed starter is compatible with the stator in the desired tube. 1. Record the part number of the dual speed starter assembly in the subject generator. This is printed on a label near the top of the dual speed starter chassis.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-23
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.13.2 Confirming/Changing DSS Starter Type (Cont) 2. Locate that part number in table 2 in Supplement 746026 which follows Chapter 2, then note the value of the H.S. SHIFT CAPAC and the L.S. SHIFT CAPAC per the table. Those are the values of the phase shift capacitors in the dual speed starter. Only tubes requiring those capacitor values may be connected to the dual speed starter. If it is desired to use a different tube from that shown in the compatible X-ray tubes section of the customer product description form, confirm that the desired tube (housing and insert) is listed in table 2 AND that the required dual speed starter part number for that tube per table 2 is the same as is fitted in your generator. If the preceding steps confirm that the desired tube is fully compatible with the generator, you may proceed with setting the tube type as per section 2.13.1. If in the preceding steps it is determined that the desired stator IS NOT compatible with the generator, the phase shift capacitors in the dual speed starter will need to be changed to match the requirements of the desired tube. Replacement capacitor kits are available to do this as noted in the next step. Note the required H.S. SHIFT CAPAC and L.S. SHIFT CAPAC values, and the corresponding dual speed starter part number for the desired tube per table 2. Using those capacitor values, refer to table 2-1. From this table select the required conversion kit to convert to capacitors as required for the selected tube. The conversion kits are available through the factory/customer support. IF MAKING THE ABOVE CONVERSION, PLEASE BE SURE TO CHANGE THE PART NUMBER IDENTIFIED IN STEP 1 TO THE NEW CONFIGURATION USING AN INDELIBLE MARKER. THIS WILL ENSURE THAT CONFIGURATION CONTROL OF THE PRODUCT IS MAINTAINED HIGH SPD SHIFT CAPAC 6 uF 7.5 uF 20 uF 5 uF 5 uF 3.4 uF 6 uF 5 uF / 6 uF 12.5 uF NOTE: TABLE 2-1 LOW SPD SHIFT CAPAC 31uF 47 uF 60 uF 30 uF 45 uF N/A 46 uF 30 / 31 uF 37.5 uF CONVERSION KIT P/N 734424-00 734424-01 734424-02 734424-03 734424-04 734424-05 734424-07 734424-08 734424-09
3.
4. 5.
6.
CAPACITOR VALUES SHOWN IN TABLES 1 AND 2 (IN SUPPLEMENT 746026) ARE EQUIVALENT VALUES OF THE PHASE SHIFT CAPACITORS IN THE DUAL SPEED STARTER. FOR EXAMPLE, THE STANDARD R VERSION OF THE DUAL SPEED STARTER USES TWO 12.5 uF CAPACITORS CONNECTED IN SERIES TO GIVE NOMINAL 6 uF FOR HIGH SPEED USE. THIS 6 uF CAPACITANCE IS CONNECTED IN PARALLEL WITH A 25 uF CAPACITOR TO GIVE 31 uF FOR LOW SPEED USE AS SHOWN IN THE TABLES.
Page 2-24
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.13.3 Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table See Supplement 746026, which immediately follows this chapter.
Installation
2.13.4 Configuring dual speed starter 733317-08 / 735925-08 Dual speed starter part number 733317-08 / 735925-08 is a special configuration in which the phase shift capacitors may be set to 5 and 30 uF, or to 6 and 31 uF. This is intended for use in installations where it may be necessary to interface to either IAE tubes, or to R stator tubes. Refer to figure 2-12. In configuration A, (5 / 30 uF) each of the leads on the upper left capacitor is connected to one side of the capacitor. Thus the capacitor is in-circuit in this configuration. Configuration B (6 / 31 uF) has both leads connected to terminals on the same side of the capacitor, thus the capacitor is out of the circuit. To change from configuration A to B, disconnect the right hand lead from the upper left capacitor in figure 2-12, and connect it to one of the spare terminals on the terminal cluster that has the other capacitor lead connected to it. This removes that capacitor from the circuit. To change from configuration B to A in figure 2-12, disconnect one of the leads from the terminal cluster on the left side of the capacitor shown in the figure, and connect it to one of the terminals on the other side of the capacitor. This connects the capacitor into the circuit. After the phase shift capacitors are correctly configured, set the DIP switches as follows: Locate the desired IAE or R type tube in table 2 in Supplement 746026 which follows Chapter 2. With dual speed starter 733317-08 / 735925-08 set to configuration B, it is only compatible with R stator tubes using dual speed starter 733317-01 / 735925-01. When set to configuration A, it is only compatible with IAE tubes using dual speed starter 733317-05 / 735925-05. Note the DIP switch setting for the desired tube as per table 2. Set the DIP switches as per 2.13.1.
Figure 2-12: Selection of phase shift capacitance
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-25
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.14.0 GENERATOR LOCKOUT SWITCH A safety lockout switch (S3) is provided on the generator interface board. When this switch is in the LOCKOUT position, the generator cannot be switched on either from the console or from the adjacent service switch S2 on the generator interface board. This prevents inadvertent switching on of the generator while it is being serviced. S3, the generator lockout switch, must be in the NORMAL position to enable switching the generator on. Refer to figure 2-13 for these switch locations.
Figure 2-13: Location of lockout switch and local ON/OFF switches
Page 2-26
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.15.0 SAFETY INTERLOCKS
Installation
It is strongly recommended that the following two interlocks be wired to the generator before preparing to make any exposures: DOOR INTERLOCK The room door interlock switch must be wired to TB4-4 and TB4-5 on the room Interface board. This switch will provide a closed contact when the door is closed. X-RAY TUBE THERMAL SWITCH The X-ray tube(s) thermal switch(s) should be connected to the generator for tube thermal protection. These may be connected either at the stator terminal blocks (section 2.9.4), or at the room interface board. The connections on the room interface board are TB4-8 and TB4-9 for tube 1, and TB4-6 and TB4-7 for tube 2.
2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE It is recommended that the backup battery voltage be checked before continuing. The normal life expectancy of these batteries is estimated at 5 years. CONSOLE CPU BOARD (23 X 56 cm consoles): 1. Turn the operator console upside down carefully to protect the front panel. Remove the 6 screws securing the base to the molded case. Open the Console carefully such that the interconnecting cables are not strained. Locate the battery on the console CPU board, refer to figure 2-15. Measure the battery voltage with a DVM. The top of the battery is the positive side; ground (TP2 on the board) is the negative side. The nominal battery voltage should be approximately 3.0V, replace the battery if it is under 2.80V. Before closing the console, refer to section 2.17.0, console CPU board DIP switch settings. Re-assemble the console. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN THE SCREWS SECURING THE BASE TO THE MOLDED CONSOLE TOP.
2. 3.
4.
5. 6.
CONSOLE BOARD (31 X 42 cm consoles): The RAM backup battery and EPROM are accessible by removing an access cover on the bottom of the console. To remove the access cover, remove the screw holding the cover, and then remove the access cover. This cover is reinstalled by sliding the end opposite the screw hole into the slot formed in the console bottom, then by replacing and tightening the fastening screw. Refer to figure 2-14. 1. Locate the battery on the console board, refer to figure 2-15. Measure the battery voltage with a DVM. The easiest way to do is to measure the voltage across C23, the capacitor directly below the battery. This capacitor is in parallel with the battery. The nominal battery voltage should be approximately 3.0V, replace the battery if it is under 2.80V. Before closing the console, refer to section 2.17.0, console CPU board DIP switch settings.
2.
3.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-27
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE (Cont)
Figure 2-14: Access panel on bottom of console Follow the procedure below if you need to open the entire console. This allows access to components or assemblies not accessible by removing the battery and EPROM access cover. The console bottom normally needs to be removed to replace major assemblies only, i.e. the console board or display assembly. 1. Disconnect all connections, including the console ground connection, from the rear of the operator console. Turn the console upside down carefully to protect the front panel. Remove and temporarily set aside the jackscrews from the D connectors on the rear of the console. Remove and temporarily set aside the hardware from the console ground stud. Remove the 8 screws securing the base to the molded case. Gently remove the console bottom (the metal bottom panel with the feet attached). Re-assemble the console in the reverse order of the above. Use of a removable thread locker (loctite or equivalent) is recommended when reinstalling the jackscrews to prevent them from loosening if the mating connectors are removed. Reconnect the console ground and all cables removed in step 1.
2.
3. 4. 5.
Page 2-28
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE (Cont) CONSOLE BOARD (Rad-only consoles): 1.
Installation
Disconnect all connections, including the console ground connection, from the rear of the operator console. Turn the console upside down carefully to protect the front panel. Remove and temporarily set aside the jackscrews from the D connectors on the rear of the console. Remove and temporarily set aside the hardware from the console ground stud. Remove the 6 screws securing the base to the molded case. Gently remove the console bottom (the metal bottom panel with the feet attached). Locate the battery on the console board, refer to figure 2-15. Measure the battery voltage with a DVM. The easiest way to do is to measure the voltage across C7, the capacitor directly to the left of the battery. This capacitor is in parallel with the battery. The nominal battery voltage should be approximately 3.0V, replace the battery if it is under 2.80V. Re-assemble the console in the reverse order of the above. Use of a removable thread locker (loctite or equivalent) is recommended when reinstalling the jackscrews to prevent them from loosening if the mating connectors are removed. Reconnect the console ground and all cables removed in step 1.
2.
3. 4. 5.
6.
7.
GENERATOR CPU BOARD: 1. Locate the battery on the generator CPU board, refer to figure 2-15. Measure the battery voltage with a DVM. The top of the battery is the positive side, ground (TP21 on the board) is the negative side. The nominal battery voltage should be approximately 3.0V, replace the battery if it is under 2.80V.
2.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-29
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE (cont)
Figure 2-15: Location of batteries on generator and console CPU boards
Page 2-30
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.17.0 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
Installation
Before continuing, verify the DIP switch settings on the console CPU board and generator CPU board. These switches have been factory set but may have been readjusted, particularly if this generator is a reinstall. CONSOLE CPU BOARD (23 X 56 cm console) AND CONSOLE BOARD (31 X 42 cm console): For the 31 X 42 cm console, DIP switch SW1 is only active if running the console software from EPROM. Refer to the section Console software / EPROM in chapter 6 for details. If the console software is running from flash memory, SW1 is inactive and the selections described below are accessed in console utilities screen 2 as described in chapter 3C. The selections described below are accessed in console utilities screen 2 on all versions of the Rad-only console. Verify the settings on SW1 (If applicable, as described above). Refer to console utilities screen 2 in chapter 3C for a description of these functions. LANGUAGE English German French Italian Swedish Spanish SW1-5 SW1-6 SW1-7 SW1-8 SW1 -4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF SW1-3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON SW1-2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF SW1-1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
NOT USED NOT USED OFF > LOGO NOT DISPLAYED OFF > CONSOLE DEFAULTS OFF *
ON > LOGO DISPLAYED ON > LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS *
GENERATOR CPU BOARD: Verify the settings on SW1. Refer to the table below for the proper settings for this switch. GENERATOR POWER 32 kW 40 kW 50 kW 65 kW 80 kW 100 kW SW1-4 SW1-5 SW1-6 SW1-7 SW1-8 MAXIMUM mA 400 mA 500 mA 630 mA 800 mA 1000 mA 1000 mA SW1 -3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF SW1-2 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF SW1-1 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF
OFF > 2 FILAMENT BOARDS OFF > 150 kV MAXIMUM OFF > DUAL SPEED STARTER OFF > 2 TUBE GENERATOR OFF > SET FACTORY DEFAULTS *
ON > I FILAMENT BOARD ON > 125 kV MAXIMUM ON > LOW SPEED STARTER ON > 1 TUBE GENERATOR ON > DEFAULTS DISABLED *
* Refer to Resetting Factory Defaults in chapter 6 for details regarding this function.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-31
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.18.0 INITIAL RUN-UP This section describes the procedure for initial power-on of the generator after it has first been installed. PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS REGARDING THE MAIN DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER: IF USING A DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER WITH AN ISOLATED SECONDARY, THE SECONDARY WINDING MUST BE A WYE (STAR) CONFIGURATION WITH THE CENTER POINT GROUND REFERENCED. DO NOT USE A DELTA CONFIGURED SECONDARY AS THERE IS NO GROUND REFERENCE IN THIS CONFIGURATION. IF USING AN AUTOTRANSFORMER TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER, THE A.C. INPUT TO THE TRANSFORMER MUST BE GROUND REFERENCED.
2.18.1 Initial Voltage Measurements 1. Verify that the mains voltage and current capacity is correct for the generator installation. Refer to the product ID label on the generator cabinet and chapter 1C of this manual. Temporarily remove the safety cover over the main input fuses in the generator. If the mains supply is compatible with the generator, switch on the main breaker and/or disconnect switch and check for the following voltages:
2. 3.
NOTE: DO NOT SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR AT THIS TIME (ONLY THE AC MAINS TO THE GENERATOR IS TO BE SWITCHED ON AT THIS TIME).
WARNING:
1. USE EXTREME CARE IN MEASURING THESE VOLTAGES. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH MAINS VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH. 2. MAINS VOLTAGE WILL BE PRESENT INSIDE THE GENERATOR CABINET, EVEN WITH THE CONSOLE SWITCHED OFF. 3. THE BUS CAPACITORS, LOCATED ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD OR ON THE BUS CAPACITOR ASSEMBLY (SINGLE PHASE UNITS ONLY), PRESENT A SAFETY HAZARD FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED FROM THE UNIT. CHECK THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE TOUCHING ANY PARTS.
PLEASE NOTE THAT THE VOLTAGE MEASURED IN STEP 4 WILL NOT NECESSARILY BE THE SAME AS THE VOLTAGE AT THE MAIN DISCONNECT BOX IN THE ROOM. THE REASON FOR THIS IS THAT A LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER MAY BE USED WITH THE GENERATOR WHICH STEPS THE INCOMING LINE VOLTAGE TO THE GENERATOR UP OR DOWN. GENERATORS WITH NO LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER SHOULD HAVE THE SAME VOLTAGE IN STEP 4 AS IS SUPPLIED AT THE MAIN DISCONNECT BOX IN THE ROOM. UNITS WITH A LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER SHOULD HAVE THE FOLLOWING VOLTAGES AT THE MAIN LINE FUSES IN THE POWER SUPPLY CABINET. VOLTAGE AT MAIN DISCONNECT BOX (LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER INPUT) 480 VAC 10 % 400 VAC 10 % VOLTAGE AT MAIN FUSES IN POWER SUPPLY (LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER OUTPUT) 400 VAC 10 % 480 VAC 10 %
Page 2-32
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.18.1 Initial Voltage Measurements (Cont) 4.
Installation
Measure and record the voltage across the main line fuses in the generator. Single phase units will only use one set of voltage measurements. L1 phase to L2 phase: ______ VAC. L1 phase to L3 phase: ______ VAC. L2 phase to L3 phase: ______ VAC. L1 phase to ground: ______ VAC. L2 phase to ground: ______ VAC. L3 phase to ground: ______ VAC.
5.
Are these voltages within specification for the unit as per chapter 1C for generators without a line adjusting transformer, or within specification per the table above for units with a line adjusting transformer? For 3 phase units, the phase to ground voltage should be 230 V 10 % for 400 V units, and 277 V 10 % for 480 V units. For single phase 230 V units, the line to ground voltage should be 115 V 10 %. ___ Check
BEFORE CONTINUING, REFER TO SECTION 2.18.3 OR 2.18.4 FOR THE PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTING LINE VOLTAGE TAPS ON THE ROOM INTERFACE TRANSFORMER AND THE POWER SUPPLY AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER. 6. Switch OFF the mains power to the generator. Verify that there is no voltage present across any of the mains input phases. Replace the safety cover on the main input fuse block, then switch ON the mains and generator. Verify that the red LED (DS1) located near the center of the generator interface board is lit. _____ Check 8. Verify that the red LED (DC BUSS OK) located on the power input board is lit. _____ Check
7.
2.18.2 Initial Power Up 1. Switch on the generator at the console and observe the startup sequence on the console APR display. 2. MEMORY TEST.... will be displayed. HIGH FREQUENCY GENERATOR XX KW WILL BE DISPLAYED (XX will be the kW rating for that model). The next screen will show console software revision and power software revision.
In the upper part of the generator cabinet, verify the following: Verify that DS1 on the room interface board is lit. On the generator CPU board verify that the following LEDs are lit (these indicate presence of the DC rails as indicated): DS38 DS41 DS43 DS45 DS46 +5 V +15 V -15 V +12 V -12 V
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-33
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.18.2 Initial Power Up (Cont) 3. In the lower part of the generator cabinet, verify the following: On the auxiliary board verify that the following LEDs are lit: CNTCTR CLSD S.S. OK +12V -12V +/- 35V
2.18.3 Single Phase Primary Tap Selection THIS SECTION APPLIES TO SINGLE PHASE GENERATORS ONLY. ENSURE THAT THE AC MAINS IS SWITCHED OFF AND LOCKED OUT, AND THAT ALL CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE PROCEEDING. 1. 2. Note the position of the 208 / 240V tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer (this is factory set to 240 VAC). Refer to figure 2-10, this shows the locations of the transformer taps. Based on the line voltage measured in section 2.18.1, step 4, set the tap referenced in the previous step as follows. Refer to figure 2-16, this shows the line voltage taps schematically. Use the 208V tap if the line voltage is 215 VAC or less. Use the 240V tap if the line voltage is 216 VAC or higher. Note the primary voltage tap setting on the room interface transformer (this is factory set to 240 VAC). Refer to figure 2-17 and 2-18. The primary windings are connected in parallel for 200 / 240 VAC operation as per figure 2-18. Use the 200V taps if the line voltage is 215 VAC or less. Use the 240V taps if the line voltage is 216 VAC or higher.
3.
Figure 2-16: Schematic, primary of power supply aux transformer
Page 2-34
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.18.3 Single Phase Primary Tap Selection (Cont)
Installation
Figure 2-17: Room interface transformer primary taps
Figure 2-18: Schematic, primary of room I/F transformer (200/240V)
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-35
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.18.4 Three Phase Primary Tap Selection THIS SECTION APPLIES TO 400 VAC THREE PHASE GENERATORS ONLY. NO TAP CHANGE IS NEEDED ON 480 VAC UNITS. ENSURE THAT THE AC MAINS IS SWITCHED OFF AND LOCKED OUT, AND THAT ALL CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE PROCEEDING. 1. Note the position of the 380 / 400V tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer (this is factory set to 400 VAC). Refer to figure 2-10, this shows the locations of the transformer taps. Based on the line voltage measured in section 2.18.1, step 4, set the tap referenced in the previous step as follows. Refer to figure 2-16, this shows the line voltage taps schematically. Use the 380V tap if the line voltage is 389 VAC or less. Use the 400V tap if the line voltage is 390 VAC or higher. Note the primary voltage tap setting on the room interface transformer (this is factory set to 400 VAC). Refer to figure 2-17 and 2-19. The primary windings are connected in series for 380 / 400 VAC operation as per figure 2-19. Use the 380V setting (180V tap on top winding) if the line voltage is 389 VAC or less.. Use the 400V setting (200V tap on top winding) if the line voltage is 390 VAC or higher.
2.
3.
Figure 2-19: Schematic, primary of room I/F transformer (380/400V)
Page 2-36
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.19.0 PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION USING THE CONSOLE
Installation
For the touch screen console, programming and calibration must be performed using GenWare. Operator accessible system utilities are described in the touch screen operators manual. The balance of sections 2.19 and 2.20 do not apply to touch screen, except for the section DATA LINK which does apply to the touch screen console.
2.19.1 Entering Into Programming/Calibration Mode This section presents a brief overview of the generator setup menu only. For more detail, refer to chapter 3C. To enter into the programming and calibration mode for the generator follow the steps below. Refer to Figure 2-20 for references to APR buttons. This figure shows the APR button layout for the 23 X 56 (cm) console, the 31 X 42 (cm) console, and the Rad-only console respectively.
Figure 2-20: Programming/calibration mode reference
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-37
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.19.1 Entering Into Programming/Calibration Mode (Cont) 1. 2. Start with the generator switched OFF. While pressing and holding the RESET button [5], press the generator POWER ON button on the console The generator will go through the start-up sequence, then display the message ENTER PASSWORD. Enter the factory default password by pressing the following button sequence: [1] - [2] - [3] - [4]. The APR menu will now display the following:
3.
4. 5.
UTILITY
* GENERATOR SETUP * APR EDITOR: DISABLED GEN CONFIGURATION DATA LINK
EXIT SETUP
2.19.2 Menu Selections UTILITY Allows access to the following functions: SET TIME & DATE: Allows setting of: YEAR, MONTH, DAY, HOUR, and MINUTE ERROR LOG: Allows review of the generators error log for recorded errors. STATISTICS: Allows review of the tube exposure counter(s), the fluoro exposure counter if applicable, and the generator accumulated exposure counter. Also allows resetting of the tube exposure counter(s), and the fluoro exposure counter if used. CONSOLE: Allows setting the following parameters for the installation: key speed (scroll rate for the displays), speaker volume, LCD screen mode, and APR mode.
APR EDITOR This enables or disables technique factor changes. When APR EDITOR is set to ENABLED, the technique factors may be changed. The new values may then be saved to overwrite the existing values. Refer to chapter 3C for further information.
Page 2-38
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.19.2 Menu Selections (Cont) GEN CONFIGURATION
Installation
Allows the service engineer to access the following functions. Further details are in chapter 3C. TUBE SELECTION GENERATOR LIMITS RECEPTOR SETUP I/O CONFIGURATION AEC SETUP AEC CALIBRATION FLUORO SETUP (all except Rad-only console). TUBE CALIBRATION DAP SETUP Selects from the available group of X-ray tubes. Sets the operating limits of the generator. Allows programming of each image receptor. Allows setting the inputs and outputs of all image receptors. Defines properties for each channel of the AEC device. Allows calibration of the AEC device. Allows setting of the fluoro properties.
Enables the X-ray tube auto calibration feature. Allows setup and calibration of the optional DAP.
DATA LINK Used with the CPI GenWare utility software. This allows for data communication with a computer in order to download additional tube types, transfer APR data, edit APR text, run the A2EC2 utility, perform setup and calibration functions, and for other minor functions. Further documentation is included with GenWare. A computer (i.e. laptop) and a 9 pin null modem cable with socket connectors (female) on both ends are required to run this software and interface to the generator. NOTE: The GenWare program should be closed before exiting the DATA LINK function on the console. Failure to do so may require that the console be switched off and then on again in order to reinitialize communication with the generator.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-39
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.20.0 TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION It is recommended that the generator be tested at this point with only the rotor and high tension cables connected. The generator should be able to complete an X-ray tube calibration and seasoning cycle without other equipment connected to the generator (other than the basic interlocks as noted below). This will allow for easier fault isolation as each section of the system is connected and tested. Before being able to make X-ray exposures, the room door interlock must be closed and the thermal switch must be closed. Prior to beginning tube auto calibration, the tube(s) used in this installation must be properly selected, and the generator limits should be programmed. Refer to chapter 3C. It is recommended that the tube(s) be conditioned (seasoned) before beginning tube auto calibration; refer to chapter 6. WARNING: THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES PRODUCE X-RAYS. TAKE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.
CAUTION:
ALWAYS VERIFY THE MANUFACTURER OF THE TUBE INSERT. IF THE X-RAY TUBE HAS BEEN REBUILT, THE TUBE INSERT AND TUBE HOUSING MAY BE FROM DIFFERENT MANUFACTURERS.
Step 1.
2. 3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
8. 9.
Action From the GENERATOR SETUP menu (section 2.19.1) select GEN CONFIGURATION. Select TUBE CALIBRATION. Select the desired tube (tube 1 or tube 2) by pressing the TUBE button. Press FOCAL SPOT to toggle between SMALL and LARGE. Start with SMALL. Press and hold the X-RAY button (or use the optional hand switch) to begin the calibration procedure. Press RETURN to repeat calibration on the other focal spot or on the other tube. When auto-calibration is completed, press EXIT to exit the tube auto calibration menu. Press EXIT to return to the GENERATOR SETUP menu. Press EXIT SETUP to exit out of the setup and calibration mode and return to the normal operation mode.
Result The TUBE CALIBRATION menu will display.
The TUBE AUTO-CAL menu appears. The selected tube will appear. Selection of the second tube is only available on two tube generators. The selected focal spot displays.
The menu will indicate the mA and filament current while the generator takes a series of exposures.
The GEN CONFIGURATION menu will display.
The GENERATOR SETUP menu will display.

REFER TO THE NOTE ON THE NEXT PAGE REGARDING A SPECIAL DIAGNOSTIC MODE THAT IS ENTERED WHEN EXITING OUT OF THE AUTO-CALIBRATION MODE.
NOTE:
SHOULD AN ERROR OCCUR DURING AUTO CALIBRATION, AN ERROR MESSAGE WILL BE DISPLAYED. THE GENERATOR WILL THEN LIMIT THE TUBES OPERATION TO THE RANGE IN WHICH IT WAS CALIBRATED, THUS ALLOWING FOR PARTIAL OPERATION OF THE GENERATOR.
Page 2-40
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc. 2.20.0 TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION (Cont) NOTE:
Installation
A SPECIAL DIAGNOSTIC MODE IS INVOKED WHEN YOU EXIT THE AUTO-CALIBRATION ROUTINE. THIS MODE REMAINS IN EFFECT UNTIL THE GENERATOR IS SWITCHED OFF. THIS ALLOWS LIMITED FUNCTIONALITY OF THE GENERATOR IN CASE THE AUTO CALIBRATION COULD NOT BE COMPLETED DUE TO A FAULT. WHILE IN THIS MODE, THE GENERATOR WILL DEFAULT THE FILAMENT CURRENT TO 2.0 AMPS FOR ALL UNCALIBRATED MA STATIONS. ADDITIONALLY, THE MA TOLERANCE CHECK WILL BE DISABLED. THIS ALLOWS ONE TO EXIT TO THE NORMAL OPERATING MODE WHERE THE PREP STATE MAY BE ENTERED. THE FILAMENT AND ROTOR CIRCUITS CAN BE OBSERVED, AND AN EXPOSURE MAY BE TAKEN AT THIS TIME. THE EXPOSURE WILL OBVIOUSLY BE INCORRECT AS THE FILAMENT CURRENT IS SET TO 2 AMPS, BUT THIS ALLOWS KV MEASUREMENTS TO BE PERFORMED ALONG WITH OTHER SYSTEM CHECKS TO AID IN TROUBLESHOOTING.
2.21.0 FINAL CHECKS The room interface connections may now be completed. These items are described in 2.9.6. When finished all wiring, check that all connections are tight and secure. Check that all cables are dressed neatly inside the main cabinet, and secured as necessary. Reconnect any grounds that have been removed from covers. Then reinstall all covers before placing the generator into service.
NOTE:
THE INSTALLER SHOULD ENSURE THAT ALL CABLE CONNECTIONS TO THE GENERATOR ARE SECURE, AND ALL CABLES EXTERNAL TO THE GENERATOR ARE ADEQUATELY PROTECTED AGAINST ACCIDENTAL DISCONNECTION.
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-41
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
Page 2-42
Rev. AM
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Setup Information
3A
CHAPTER 3 SECTION 3A SETUP INFORMATION

CONTENTS: 3A.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...............................................................................................................................................3A-2 3A.2.0 INSTALLATION RECORD.................................................................................................................................3A-2 3A.2.1 X-Ray Tubes ..................................................................................................................................................3A-2 3A.2.2 Mains Supply And Fusing ..............................................................................................................................3A-3 3A.2.3 Automatic Exposure Control ..........................................................................................................................3A-3 3A.2.4 Collimator .......................................................................................................................................................3A-3 3A.2.5 Image System ................................................................................................................................................3A-3 3A.2.6 ABS Pickup Assembly....................................................................................................................................3A-4 3A.2.7 Table Type .....................................................................................................................................................3A-4 3A.2.8 Wall Receptor.................................................................................................................................................3A-4 3A.2.9 Receptor Assignment.....................................................................................................................................3A-4 3A.2.10 Miscellaneous Notes....................................................................................................................................3A-4 3A.3.0 X-RAY TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET......................................................................3A-5 3A.4.0 IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET .....................................................................................3A-6 3A.5.0 I/O CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET ...............................................................................................................3A-7
Ch # 740904-04
Rev. B
Page 3A-1
3A
Setup Information
CPI Canada Inc.
3A.1.0 INTRODUCTION Please record the setup information for your installation in this section before programming the generator. Enter the information appropriate for your generator model. The data tables will accommodate installations up to a standard R&F installation with the following: tilting G.I. table with bucky, spot film device, standard image tube with a medical T.V. system, wall bucky and an overhead tube stand, spot film camera and a digital acquisition system.
3A.2.0 INSTALLATION RECORD 3A.2.1 X-Ray Tubes Please enter the appropriate information. a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n) o) p) q) r) s) t) u) v) w) x) y) z) aa) bb) cc) Over table X-ray tube (or TUBE # 1) Manufacturer and type: Focal spot combination: kW of each focal spot: Maximum kVp: Type of stator: Dual or single speed: Stator delay: Start and run voltage, low speed: Start and run voltage, high speed: Brake voltage: Maximum filament current: Minimum filament current, stand-by: Thermal switch included: Under table X-ray tube (or TUBE # 2) Manufacturer and type: Focal spot combination: kW of each focal spot: Maximum kVp: Type of stator: Dual or single speed: Stator delay: Start and run voltage, low speed: Start and run voltage, high speed: Brake voltage: Maximum filament current: Minimum filament current, stand-by: Thermal switch included: X-ray tube fan included: large = large = small = small =
sec = start volts = start volts = volts = amps = amps =
run volts = run volts =
large = large =
small = small =
sec = start volts = start volts = volts = amps = amps =
run volts = run volts =
Page 3A-2
Rev. B
Ch # 740904-04
CPI Canada Inc. 3A.2.2 Mains Supply And Fusing
Setup Information
3A
Please record the following information on the mains voltage and current capacity. Check that the information is appropriate for the generator according to the nameplate on the generator cabinet. Line voltage: ________ VAC Line frequency: 50 Hz. 60 Hz. amps Line capacity: kVa
Disconnect fuses (main):
3A.2.3 Automatic Exposure Control Chamber Type (optional): Solid State: __________________ Make: _______________________ Ion Chamber ______________ Model: _________________ PMT _____________
Receptors with AEC (optional): Table bucky Wall bucky yes yes Spot film device Auxiliary bucky yes yes Digital System yes
3A.2.4 Collimator Type: Compatible with X-ray tube: Exposure interlock (dry contacts): Tomo/stereo by-pass: __________________ yes no yes no yes no
3A.2.5 Image System Conventional: ________________________________________ (make and model) Digital: ______________________________________________(make and model) Image intensifier: 24 hour supply: Image system park/position switch. Fluoro foot switch to initiate fluoro and spot exposure: Spot film advance delay: greater than 850 mSec. __ yes Remote Fluoro controller. AEC compensation for multi-spot SFD use. dual mode __ yes __ yes __ yes __ no __ yes __ yes tri-mode __ no __ no __ no __ no __ no
Ch # 740904-04
Rev. B
Page 3A-3
3A
Setup Information
CPI Canada Inc.
3A.2.6 ABS Pickup Assembly Optical diode: _______ PMT: _______ Make: _______________________ Proportional DC: _______ Model: _________________ Composite Video _______
3A.2.7 Table Type Table type: ______________________________________ Grid: ___________ Ratio: __________ Model/Make: _______________________ Focus Distance: __________
L/P Inch: __________
3A.2.8 Wall Receptor Type: ______________________________ Grid: ___________ Ratio: __________ L/P Inch: __________ Focus Distance: __________
3A.2.9 Receptor Assignment Receptor 1: _______________________ Receptor 2: _______________________ Receptor 3: _______________________ Receptor 4: _______________________ Receptor 5: _______________________ Receptor 6: _______________________
3A.2.10 Miscellaneous Notes _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3A-4
Rev. B
Ch # 740904-04
CPI Canada Inc. 3A.3.0 X-RAY TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET
Setup Information
3A
Note:
The information in this table is to be derived from the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
Generator Model: ______________ TUBE SELECTION TUBE SELECTED TUBE SPEED MAX SF KW LS MAX LF KW LS MAX SF KW HS MAX LF KW HS MAX KV MAX SF MA ANODE HU WARNING ANODE HU LIMIT SF STANDBY LF STANDBY SF MAX LF MAX FIL BOOST FIL PREHEAT GENERATOR LIMITS MAX KW MAX MA MIN MA MAX MAS
Serial No: _____________ TUBE 1 DEFAULT SELECTED TUBE 2 DEFAULT SELECTED
DEFAULT
SELECTED
Ch # 740904-04
Rev. B
Page 3A-5
3A
Setup Information
CPI Canada Inc.
3A.4.0 IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET
IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET DATE:___________ SERIAL #:_____________ FUNCTION RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 RECEPTOR NAME TUBE TOMO FLUORO SERIAL INTERFACE OPTS FUNCTIONAL OPTS RECEPTOR SYM FLUORO HANG RAD HANG LAST IMAGE HOLD MEMORY REM TOMO BUT SF/LF SWITCH AEC BACKUP AEC BACKUP MAS AEC BACKUP MS AEC CHANNEL
Page 3A-6
Rev. B
Ch # 740904-04
CPI Canada Inc. 3A.5.0 I/O CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET
Setup Information
3A
NOTE: BOXES WITH DOTTED LINES CANNOT HAVE THEIR STATE CHANGED! FUNCTIONS STANDBY PREP GEN RDY RAD EXP FLUORO EXP
***INPUTS*** REMOTE EXP REMOTE PREP REMOTE FL. EXP CONSOLE EXP CONSOLE PREP TOMO EXP REM. TOMO SEL I/I SAFETY COLL. ITLK BUCKY CONTACTS SPARE THERMAL SW 1 THERMAL SW 2 DOOR ITLK MULTI SPOT EXP ----***OUTPUTS*** BKY 1 SELECT BKY 2 SELECT BKY 3 SELECT TOMO/BKY 4 SEL TOMO/BKY STRT ALE COLL. BYPASS ROOM LIGHT SPARE ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ch # 740904-04
Rev. B
Page 3A-7
3A
Setup Information
CPI Canada Inc.
Page 3A-8
Rev. B
Ch # 740904-04
CPI Canada Inc.
System Interfacing
3B
CHAPTER 3 SECTION 3B SYSTEM INTERFACING

CONTENTS:
3B.1.0 INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................................................................3B-2 3B.2.0 LOCATIONS OF INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ..................................................................................................3B-3 3B.2.1 Generator Pictorial Showing Connections ...............................................................................................3B-3 3B.2.2 Low Speed / Dual Speed Starter ..............................................................................................................3B-4 3B.2.3 High Tension Transformer........................................................................................................................3B-4 3B.2.4 Generator Interface Board........................................................................................................................3B-4 3B.2.5 Generator CPU Board ..............................................................................................................................3B-4 3B.2.6 AEC Board................................................................................................................................................3B-4 3B.2.7 Console CPU Board / Touch Screen........................................................................................................3B-4 3B.2.8 I/0 Expansion Board (optional) .................................................................................................................3B-4 3B.2.9 DAP Interface Board (optional) ................................................................................................................3B-4 3B.2.10 Room Interface Board ............................................................................................................................3B-5 3B.3.0 FEATURES OF THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD .....................................................................................3B-5 3B.3.1 Inputs ........................................................................................................................................................3B-6 3B.3.2 Outputs .....................................................................................................................................................3B-7 3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages ........................................................................................................................3B-7 3B.3.4 Typical Examples .....................................................................................................................................3B-9 3B.3.5 Wiring The Room Interface Terminal Plugs ...........................................................................................3B-10 3B.4.0 GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD PROGRAMMING FOR 110/220 VAC ..............................................3B-11 3B.5.0 TYPICAL R&F ROOM CONNECTIONS.....................................................................................................3B-12 3B.6.0 TYPICAL ROOM CABLING AND INTERFACING ......................................................................................3B-13
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-1
3B
System Interfacing
CPI Canada Inc.
3B.1.0 INTRODUCTION The Indico 100 generator may be interfaced to various tables, imaging systems, tube stands, tomographic devices, AEC pickups, Buckys, ABS pickups, X-ray tubes and collimators. The generator interface may be programmed to supply a voltage, an isolated contact, receive a voltage, or an external isolated contact. All interfacing cables enter the generator at the rear of the generator cabinet.
NOTE:
The installer must provide the necessary interfacing cables.
WARNING
NOTE:
THE GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD HAS 110 AND 220 VAC PRESENT AT ALL TIMES THAT THE MAIN DISCONNECT IS SWITCHED ON. USE CAUTION WHEN SERVICING THIS BOARD.
Page 3B-2
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-05
CPI Canada Inc. 3B.2.0 LOCATIONS OF INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 3B.2.1 Generator Pictorial Showing Connections
System Interfacing
3B
Figure 3B-1: Generator to room interface CAUTION: ENSURE THAT ALL X-RAY TUBE HOUSINGS ARE CONNECTED TO THE GROUND STUD ON THE HT TANK. USE A SEPARATE GROUND WIRE FOR EACH TUBE, #10 AWG (6 mm2) OR GREATER.
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-3
3B
System Interfacing
CPI Canada Inc.
3B.2.2 Low Speed / Dual Speed Starter Refer to chapter 2 (installation) for instructions on wiring to the low speed or dual speed starter terminal blocks. Note that the X-ray tube thermal switches may be connected at the starter terminal blocks, or at the room interface board. Both sets of terminals are connected in parallel, and either may be used. 3B.2.3 High Tension Transformer Accepts the high tension cables from either one or two x-ray tubes. 3B.2.4 Generator Interface Board The generator interface board accepts the following (ABS only on R&F generators): ABS - composite video (J8). ABS - proportional DC (J7). (Jumpers must be configured for different ABS types, refer to chapter 3E). Control console as per chapter 2. 3B.2.5 Generator CPU Board The generator CPU board accepts the following (all are optional): Remote fluoro controller (J11). RS 232 Port (J1). RS 232 Port (J2). 3B.2.6 AEC Board Depending on the Indico 100 generators configuration, different AEC boards may be fitted. Refer to chapter 3D: 3B.2.7 Console CPU Board / Touch Screen The optional hand switch connects to the console CPU board or to a connector on the rear of the console; refer to chapter 2 for details. If it is desired to connect a remote fluoro footswitch (normally customer supplied), connect to TB6 pins 5 & 6 on the room interface board, or to terminals F and COM on TB1 on the console CPU board (23 X 56 cm consoles), or to J13 on the 31 X 42 cm console. Refer to chapter 2 for details. 3B.2.8 I/0 Expansion Board (optional) The optional I/0 expansion board is used when the Indico 100 generator is interfaced with digital systems, film changers and various dedicated products. 3B.2.9 DAP Interface Board (optional) The optional DAP interface board is used to interface with DAP chambers, used to measure dose-areaproduct. The generator will interface with two DAP devices, one for each X-ray tube, when fitted with this option.
Page 3B-4
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-05
CPI Canada Inc. 3B.2.10 Room Interface Board
System Interfacing
3B
All the necessary inputs and outputs for the external room equipment are located on this board. TB1 - Bucky 3 and tomo Bucky select, table stepper input, TB2 - Bucky 1 and 2 select, collimator and Bucky inputs. TB3 - Tomographic inputs and outputs, collimator bypass. TB4 - Room light, thermal switches, door interlock, tube indicators. TB5 - Multiple spot input, I.I. mag. select. TB6 - Remote prep, exposure and fluoro inputs, I.I. safety input, ALE output, spare output.
3B.3.0 FEATURES OF THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD Refer to the following schematics and figures. Figure 3B-2, room interface board layout. Room interface functional drawing, MD-0763.
TB1-TB6
LIVE CONTACT
JW1-JW5 LIVE CONTACT
24VDC 110AC 220AC

DRY CONTACT
JW6-JW8
24 VDC
DRY CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
LIVE CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
Figure 3B-2: Room interface board
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-5
3B
System Interfacing
CPI Canada Inc.
3B.3.1 Inputs NOTE: All inputs are opto coupled, select inputs may be configured to use an external +/- 24 VDC source or may be configured to accept a closed dry contact. Note the following inputs and jumper configurations per the table below: The Indico 100 generator is shipped from the factory with all inputs configured for dry contact inputs.
JUMPER CONFIGURATION (INPUTS): ROOM INTERFACE BOARD TB1 PINS 4 & 5 (TABLE STEPPER) TB2 PINS 6 & 7 (COLLIMATOR) TB2 PINS 4 & 5 (BUCKY CONTACTS) TB3 PINS 6 & 7 (TOMO EXPOSURE) TB3 PINS 4 & 5 (REMOTE TOMO SELECT) TB4 PINS 8 & 9 (THERMAL SWITCH 1) TB4 PINS 6 & 7 (THERMAL SWITCH 2) TB4 PINS 4 & 5 (ROOM DOOR INTLK) TB5 PINS 11 & 12 (MULT. SPOT EXPOSURE) TB6 PINS 9 & 10 (REMOTE EXPOSURE) TB6 PINS 7 & 8 (REMOTE PREP) TB6 PINS 3 & 4 (I.I. SAFETY) TB6 PINS 5 & 6 (REMOTE FLUORO EXP) GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD JUMPER CONFIGURATION JW7 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT JW7 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT JW9 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT JW9 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT JW10.PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT JW10 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT JW3 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT JW3 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT JW2 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT JW2 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT DRY CONTACT INPUT ONLY DRY CONTACT INPUT ONLY DRY CONTACT INPUT ONLY JW6 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT JW6 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT JW15 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT JW15 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT JW14 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT JW14 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT JW8 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT JW8 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT DRY CONTACT INPUT ONLY
Page 3B-6
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-05
CPI Canada Inc. 3B.3.2 Outputs
System Interfacing
3B
Outputs are via relay contacts, some of which may be configured to supply a dry contact closure or to supply 24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220 VAC upon closure. Note the following outputs and jumper configurations per the table below: To supply power to a grounded load, use TB1 pin 12 (for example) and jumper on dry contacts. This applies also to TB1 pin 1, TB2 pin 12, TB2 pin 1 and TB3 pin 12. The Indico 100 generator is shipped from the factory with JW1 to JW5 configured for dry contacts, and JW6 to JW8 configured for 24 VDC output on relay closure.
NOTE:
JUMPER CONFIGURATION (OUTPUTS): ROOM INTERFACE BOARD TB1 PINS 11 & 12 (BUCKY 3 SELECT) TB1 PINS 1 & 2 (TOMO BUCKY SELECT) TB2 PINS 11 & 12 (BUCKY 1 SELECT) TB2 PINS 1 & 2 (BUCKY 2 SELECT) TB3 PINS 11 & 12 (TOMO/BUCKY START) TB3 PINS 1 & 2 (COLLIMATOR BYPASS) TB4 PINS 11 & 12 (ROOM LIGHT) TB4 PINS 1 & 2 TUBE 2 INDICATOR TB4 PINS 1 & 3 TUBE 1 INDICATOR TB5 PINS 8 & 9 (I.I. MAG 1) TB5 PINS 5 & 6 (I.I. MAG 2) TB5 PINS 2 & 3 (I.I. MAG 3) TB6 PINS 1 & 2 (ALE OUTPUT) TB6 PINS 11 & 12 (SPARE OUTPUT) ROOM INTERFACE BOARD JUMPER CONFIGURATION JW2 DRY CONTACTS OUTPUT JW2 LIVE CONTACTS OUTPUT JW1 DRY CONTACTS OUTPUT JW1 LIVE CONTACTS OUTPUT JW4 DRY CONTACTS OUTPUT JW4 LIVE CONTACTS OUTPUT JW3 DRY CONTACTS OUTPUT JW3 LIVE CONTACTS OUTPUT JW5 DRY CONTACTS OUTPUT JW5 LIVE CONTACTS OUTPUT DRY CONTACT OUTPUT ONLY DRY CONTACT OUTPUT ONLY JW6 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = 24VDC OUTPUT JW6 PINS 2-3 = DRY CONTACT OUTPUT DRY CONTACT OUTPUT ONLY DRY CONTACT OUTPUT ONLY DRY CONTACT OUTPUT ONLY JW7 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = 24VDC OUTPUT JW7 PINS 2-3 = DRY CONTACT OUTPUT JW8 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = 24VDC OUTPUT JW8 PINS 2-3 = DRY CONTACT OUTPUT
3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages Five outputs (K1, K2, K3, K4 and K6 for Bucky selects and Bucky start) may be jumper configured for a choice of the following voltages: NOTE: 24 VDC 4 AMPS total. 110 VAC 2.5 AMPS total. 220 VAC 1.5 AMPS total. 2.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 110 VAC OR 1.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 220 VAC, BUT BOTH ARE NOT AVAILABLE SIMULTANEOUSLY. TOTAL POWER CONSUMPTION MUST NOT EXCEED 350 VA.
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-7
3B
System Interfacing
CPI Canada Inc.
3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages (Cont) The above voltage sources are not compatible with: Collimator lamps (24 VDC 150 watts). These exceed the 4 Amp rating of the 24 VDC supply. Contact your generator supplier regarding the optional 24VAC / 30VDC room power kit, which may be used for collimators and other room electromechanical devices. Fluorescent lamps. These have high starting currents and generate transients when the tube strikes. Some inductive loads may cause difficulties (for example some motors, under table tube fans, and solenoids).
IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT CLAMPING / RECOVERY DIODES BE USED ON INDUCTIVE DEVICES SUCH AS RELAYS ETC WHICH ARE CONNECTED TO THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD. Voltage selections are made by adding jumper wires from TB11 to TB8, TB9, or TB10, and placing the jumpers on JW1, JW2, JW3, JW4, or JW5 in the live contact position. Review figure 3B-3 for typical examples.
Figure 3B-3: Typical jumper arrangement on the room interface board
SOME INSTALLATIONS REQUIRE THAT THE OUTPUTS OF RELAYS K1, K2, K3, K4, K6 OR K8 DRIVE THE INPUTS OF OPTO COUPLERS. IN INSTALLATIONS WHERE THESE RELAYS SOURCE 110 OR 220 VAC, THE LEAKAGE CURRENT THROUGH THE R-C SNUBBER ACROSS THE RELAY CONTACTS MAY BE SUFFICIENT TO ENERGIZE THE OPTO COUPLERS WHEN THE RELAYS ARE OPEN. IF THIS IS EXPERIENCED, THE R-C SNUBBER SHOULD BE DISCONNECTED FROM THE CIRCUIT. CUTTING AND REMOVING THE JUMPER WIRES PER THE TABLE ON THE NEXT PAGE WILL DISABLE THE R-C SNUBBER CIRCUIT. THE JUMPER WIRES SHOULD BE CUT AS NEAR AS POSSIBLE TO THE PADS ON THE BOARD, THEN AS MUCH AS IS POSSIBLE OF THE WIRE JUMPER SHOULD BE REMOVED. THIS IS NECESSARY TO WITHSTAND THE OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ACROSS THE RELAY CONTACTS.
Page 3B-8
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-05
CPI Canada Inc. 3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages (Cont)
System Interfacing
3B
IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE INSTALLER TO PROVIDE THE PROPER INTERFACING CIRCUITS TO THE OPTO COUPLER(S) IN THESE TYPES OF INSTALLATIONS. For reference, the jumper wire links associated with each of the subject relays is listed below: RELAY K1 K2 K3 K4 K6 K8 JW12 JW9 JW11 JW10 JW14 JW13 JUMPER WIRE
3B.3.4 Typical Examples Selected Output Relay K2 (24 VDC) K1 (110 VAC) K4 (24 VDC) K3 (220 VAC) K6 (dry contacts) K12 (24 VDC) K13 (dry contacts) K7 (24 VDC) Plug and Jumper JW2: Live Contact JW1: Live Contact JW4: Live Contact JW3: Live Contact JW5: Dry Contact JW7: Live Contact 24VDC JW8: Dry Contact JW6: Live Contact 24VDC Wire Jumper (K2) TB11 - 5 to TB8 (K1) TB11 - 4 to TB9 (K4) TB11 - 3 to TB8 (K3) TB11 - 2 to TB10 (K6) TB11 - no connection N/A N/A N/A
The previous examples will configure the outputs as shown below: K2 when selected will provide 24 VDC to a load at TB1 pins 11 and 12. K1 when selected will supply 110 VAC to a load at TB1 pins 1 and 2. K4 when selected will supply 24 VDC to a load at TB2 pins 11 and 12. K3 when selected will supply 220 VAC to a load at TB2 pins 1 and 2. K6 when selected will supply closed contacts at TB3 pins 11 and 12. K12 when selected will supply 24 VDC at TB6 pins 1 and 2. K13 when selected will supply closed contacts at TB6 pins 11 and 12. K7 will supply 24 VDC at TB4 pin 3 for tube 1, or 24 VDC at TB4 pin 2 for tube 2. Ground reference will be at TB4 pin 1.
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-9
3B
System Interfacing
CPI Canada Inc.
3B.3.5 Wiring The Room Interface Terminal Plugs
Figure 3B-4: Terminal plug
Remove the required mating connectors from TB1 to TB6 on the room interface board. Back out the wire retaining screws as required. Dress the interface cable with a minimum of 5 inch (130 mm) flying leads. Strip each wire .25 inches (6 mm). Insert the wire into the plug and tighten the terminal screw. Several wires may be inserted into a single terminal connection. Be sure the plug numbering matches the input/output signals. Insert the plug into the room interface plug as shown in Figure 3B-4. Leave sufficient cable to allow interface access. To eliminate confusion, label each plug. Cover plates are located on the rear access panels to provide strain relief for the interface cables. Holes are provided on the shelf at the back of the cabinet, below the room interface board, for attaching additional strain relief hardware such as C or P clamps as desired by the installer.
Page 3B-10
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-05
CPI Canada Inc. 3B.4.0 GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD PROGRAMMING FOR 110/220 VAC
System Interfacing
3B
The 110/220 VAC supplies available at TB9 and TB10 of the room interface board may be programmed such that: 110/220 VAC is present at TB9 and TB10 at all times that the generator main disconnect is switched ON. 110/220 VAC is present at TB9 and TB10 only when the generator itself is switched ON.
The desired selection is made using JW1 on the generator interface board. Setting the jumper to JW1 pins 1-2 selects the condition where 110/220 VAC is present at TB9 and TB10 only when the generator is switched ON. Setting the jumper to JW1 pins 2-3 selects 110/220 VAC to be present at TB9 and TB10 at all times that the generator main disconnect is switched ON. Refer to figure 3B-5, this shows the jumper position JW1 pins 1-2 which only provides for 110/220 VAC when the generator is switched ON.
Figure 3B-5: 110/220 VAC programming
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-11
3B
System Interfacing
CPI Canada Inc.
3B.5.0 TYPICAL R&F ROOM CONNECTIONS
Figure 3B-6: Typical R&F room
Page 3B-12
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-05
CPI Canada Inc. 3B.6.0 TYPICAL ROOM CABLING AND INTERFACING The following is for reference only and represents a typical R&F procedure room.
System Interfacing
3B
Cable assembly #1 1. Bucky 3 select (image receptor). 2. Table stepper input, indicates to the generator that a stepping table has moved to the next step. 3. Tomo Bucky select, usually used to select a tomographic device. Cable assembly #2 1. Bucky 1 select (image receptor), usually used to select the R&F table Bucky. 2. Collimator interlock, will prevent an exposure if the collimator inputs are not satisfied. 3. Bucky contacts, all Bucky contacts are paralleled at this connector. Diode isolation may be required. 4. Bucky 2 select (image receptor), usually used to select vertical wall Bucky. Cable assembly #3 1. Collimator bypass. Usually used with the collimator associated with the tomographic device, to allow non-PBL operation in the tomographic mode. 2. Remote tomo select, used for selecting tomography operation from a remote R&F table. 3. Tomo start, will issue a start to sweep signal to a tomographic device. 4. Tomographic exposure; the generator waits for a switch closure during the tomographic sweep. Cable assembly #4 1. Room light. Provides a closed contact to energize the X-ray room warning light. Maximum 250 watts. 2. Door interlock. Requires a closed dry contact to interlock the generator exposure with the X-ray rooms entrance door. 3. Tube select indicator (source select indicator). Indicates which X-ray tube has been selected. 4. Optional thermal switch inputs. Cable assembly #5 1. Mag. select. Interfaces with the image intensifier to select the magnification modes. 2. Multiple-spot exposure. When multi-spot operation is selected at the spot film device, (example: 4 on 1) and this input receives a closed dry contact, the AEC calibration will be offset to compensate for the small fields. Cable assembly #6 1. Interfaces to the table (conventional or remote R&F), the X-ray prep, expose and fluoro footswitch. 2. The I.I. safety position interlock switch, used if the I.I. may be removed from the spot film device. 3. ALE - required if an SFC or a serial changer is used. 4. Spare output.
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-13
3B
System Interfacing
CPI Canada Inc.
3B.6.0 TYPICAL ROOM CABLING AND INTERFACING (CONT) Cable assembly #7 1. Must be a #10 AWG (6 mm2) wire or greater, connected from the housing of both X-ray tubes to ground at the high tension transformer. Cable assemblies #8 1. Pair of H.T. cables from the over table (tube-1) X-ray tube to the HT Transformer. 2. Pair of H.T. cables from the under table (tube-2) X-ray tube to the HT transformer. Cable assembly #9. 1. Interfaces the ABS signal from the TV camera as either DC proportional or composite video. 2. Interfaces the PMTs high voltage and signal to the generator, if used. Refer to chapter 3E for details. Cable assembly #10 1. These cables are usually supplied by the AEC vendor. Be sure these cables are placed away from any electrical noise areas. When interfacing AEC cables be careful not to cause ground loops. Grounding should only be at the AEC board. Refer to chapter 3D for details. Cable assembly #11 1. This cable is supplied by CPI for the remote fluoro controller interface. Cable assembly #12 1. This cable is supplied by CPI for the control console interface. Cable assembly #13 1. Supplied with the optional laptop computer interconnect box. Cable assembly #14 1. AC mains cable. Cable assembly #15 1. Cable(s) for digital imaging system. Cable assembly #16 1. Cable(s) for DAP (Dose Area Product).
Page 3B-14
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-05
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
CHAPTER 3 SECTION 3D AEC CALIBRATION

CONTENTS: 3D.1.0 INTRODUCTION ..............................................................................................................................................3D-2 3D.1.1 AEC Limitations: Minimum Response Time ................................................................................................3D-3 3D.1.2 AEC Limitations: Maximum Exposure Times ..............................................................................................3D-4 3D.1.3 Film/Screen Response vs. kVp....................................................................................................................3D-5 3D.1.4 AEC Calibration Range ................................................................................................................................3D-6 3D.1.5 Multiple Spot Compensation ........................................................................................................................3D-7 3D.2.0 PRECALIBRATION SETUP.............................................................................................................................3D-8 3D.2.1 AEC Setup Worksheet .................................................................................................................................3D-8 3D.2.2 AEC Precalibration Checks........................................................................................................................3D-10 3D.2.3 AEC Chamber Installation ..........................................................................................................................3D-10 3D.2.4 AEC Pickup Connections (Overview) ........................................................................................................3D-12 3D.2.5 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers)...........................................................................................................3D-13 3D.2.6 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) .......................................................................................................................3D-15 3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board) ...........................................................................................................3D-17 3D.2.8 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation) ..............................................3D-19 3D.3.0 PRECALIBRATION NOTES: .........................................................................................................................3D-21 3D.4.0 AEC USING A PMT ........................................................................................................................................3D-22 3D.5.0 AEC FIELD BALANCE ...................................................................................................................................3D-23 3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY)...........................................................................................................3D-23 3D.6.1 Break point calibration worksheet ..............................................................................................................3D-28 3D.7.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (IF APPLICABLE) ............................................................................3D-30 3D.8.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION ......................................................................................................................3D-31 3D.9.0 RLF COMPENSATION ..................................................................................................................................3D-35 3D.10.0 MULTIPLE SPOT COMPENSATION ..........................................................................................................3D-38 3D.11.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) ..........................................................................................................3D-40 3D.12.0 AEC CALIBRATION (AUX, SFD, ETC)........................................................................................................3D-43
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-1
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.1.0 INTRODUCTION This section covers interfacing and calibration of the various AEC board assemblies that are used in Millenia and Indico 100 X-ray generators for ion chambers, solid state chambers, or PMT pickups; and in CMP 200 X-ray generators for ion and solid state chambers. THE GENERATOR IS FACTORY CONFIGURED FOR SPECIFIC AEC DEVICE(S). REFER TO THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION IN CHAPTER 1D (MILLENIA AND INDICO 100), OR CHAPTER 1 (CMP 200) FOR THE FACTORY CONFIGURED AEC COMPATIBILITY OF THIS GENERATOR. The introduction in this section contains background information relevant to AEC operation. It is strongly suggested that this be read and understood prior to beginning AEC calibration. AEC calibration requires that a calibration curve be established which relates optical density to various kV breakpoints. The 75 kV knee breakpoint is calibrated at the slowest film screen combination. The remaining kV breakpoints are calibrated next, then the breakpoint calibration is repeated at the next highest film speed, with the highest film speed being calibrated last. After breakpoint calibration, density setup is done at the slowest film speed, and then RLF compensation and multiple spot compensation are done if desired.
Page 3D-2
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.1.1 AEC Limitations: Minimum Response Time
AEC Calibration
3D
The X-ray generator (including the AEC pickup chamber) has a minimum response time from start of the exposure command to a kV value sufficient to start X-rays. There is a further delay to the start of current flow from the AEC device. Likewise, there is a minimum response time from when the AEC stop command is issued to when the kV has actually decreased to the point that X-rays are no longer produced. Figure 3D-1 depicts this graphically.
Figure 3D-1: Relative timing of AEC ramp vs exposure command and kVp
1 to 2 is the time from the exposure start command to kVp start. Time = 1 to 3 ms. 2 to 3 is the reaction time of the solid state / ion chamber to start a current flow. Time = 1 to 3 ms. 3 to 4 is the required exposure time. 4 is the AEC stop command from the generator AEC circuits. 4 to 5 is the generator shut down time including cable discharge time etc. Time = 1.5 to 3.0 ms. 1 to 6 is the total time the exposure switch is activated. FOR AEC BOARDS WITH SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (FIGURE 3D-9 AND 3D-11) AEC TECHNIQUES SHOULD HAVE MINIMUM EXPOSURE TIMES GREATER THAN 5 MS. FOR ALL OTHER AEC BOARDS MINIMUM EXPOSURE TIMES SHOULD BE GREATER THAN 15 MS.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-3
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.1.2 AEC Limitations: Maximum Exposure Times AEC exposures should normally be kept well under one second. When X-ray techniques are used that result in longer exposures, the film density will not be correct due to failure of reciprocity of the film. RLF (reciprocity law failure) compensation is provided to compensate for longer AEC exposure times. An offset may be added to each AEC calibration set (each film screen combination) to increase the AEC ON time as exposure time increases. RLF compensation is applied to the following range of times: 50 ms to 500 ms. 500 ms to 1000 ms. 1000 ms and above.
Care must be exercised when using table buckys with low kV values because most tabletops and grids absorb considerable radiation in the range of 60 - 65 kVp. This will adversely affect AEC operation. Figure 3D-2 shows the effect of kVp, optical density, and radiation. Note particularly the nonlinear change in density at 85-90 kVp.
Figure 3D-2: kVp vs. optical density vs. dose
Page 3D-4
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.1.3 Film/Screen Response vs. kVp
AEC Calibration
3D
Film screen response to kVp is not linear; therefore compensation must be provided in order to maintain constant film density as kVp is changed for different anatomical studies. By selecting and calibrating various kV breakpoints, the overall system response will be compensated such as to yield a constant film density. Up to eight breakpoints per film screen combination are available. The eight breakpoints are spread over three kV ranges as shown below: Low kV: Knee kV: High kV: 50, 55, 65 kV 75 kV 85, 95, 110, 130 kV.
Refer to figure 3D-3.
Figure 3D-3: kV breakpoints vs relative density
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-5
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.1.4 AEC Calibration Range Since the Millenia and Indico 100 family of generators allow for up to three separate film screen combinations to be calibrated, the following points must be considered: The AEC board allows for a 0 to a maximum of 10 volt ramp at the comparator input. All AEC signals must fit within this range (for all film / screens, densities, and techniques). Most X-ray applications require the use of two or more different film screen combinations, all of which will require different exposure doses. Using the slowest film screen combination, the required film input dose will be determined. Once this value is determined (during AEC calibration), the density calibration is performed to allow 100% (double the dose) and 50% (half the dose) values. These are typical values, and will determine the maximum required range of the AEC reference voltage (the output from the D/A converter). Figure 3D-4 illustrates the different windows required for various film screen combinations.
Figure 3D-4: Film/screen speed vs. D/A output
Page 3D-6
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.1.5 Multiple Spot Compensation
AEC Calibration
3D
Separate density compensation is provided when a SFD (Spot Film Device) is used for multiple film splits. This allows compensation when the SFD diaphragm is in the X-ray field. An external output from the SFD must be provided when multiple spots are requested to enable this function.
3D.1.6 A Typical R&F Room Figure 3D-5 shows source-image distances and image receptors as used in a typical R&F installation.
Figure 3D-5: Typical R&F installation
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-7
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.2.0 PRECALIBRATION SETUP 3D.2.1 AEC Setup Worksheet Before continuing, it is suggested that a copy of the table below be filled in with all required information. Refer to the example AEC setup worksheet on the next page. FUNCTION Film/Screen 1. 2. 3. Nominal optical density: Grid ratio/SID: Min - max kVp range: Density steps Density dose change (per step) Chamber type: Regulatory AEC dose requirements? Is film processing maintained? Assigned receptor name: Are all cassettes similar? Additional notes: Additional notes: Table 3D-1: AEC setup worksheet +%: -%: RECEPTOR 1 RECEPTOR 2 RECEPTOR 3 RECEPTOR 4
ALL RECEPTORS MUST HAVE THE SAME NUMBER OF DENSITY STEPS AND THE SAME DENSITY DOSE CHANGE PER STEP (DENSITY SETTINGS ARE COMMON TO ALL FILM SCREENS AND RECEPTORS).
Page 3D-8
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.2.1 AEC Setup Worksheet (Cont)
AEC Calibration
3D
Note:
The example below is supplied for reference only. It does not represent an actual installation.
FUNCTION Film/Screen 1. 2. 3. Nominal optical density: Grid ratio/SID: Min - max kVp range: Density steps Density dose change (per step) Chamber type: Regulatory AEC dose requirements? Is film processing maintained? Assigned receptor name: Are all cassettes similar? Additional notes: Additional notes: +%: -%:
RECEPTOR 1 Lanex/reg Lanex/med
RECEPTOR 2 Lanex/reg Lanex/chest
RECEPTOR 3 Lanex/reg
RECEPTOR 4 PMT/I.I.
1.2 12:1 60 - 120 8 12.5 6.25 Ion Yes Yes Table Yes
1.1 8:1 65 - 140 8 12.5 6.25 Solid state Yes Yes Wall Yes
1.4 10:1 80 - 110 8 12.5 6.25 Ion Yes Yes SFD Yes 10:1 70 - 120 8 12.5 6.25 PMT Yes Yes Digital N/A
Table 3D-2: Sample AEC setup worksheet
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-9
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.2.2 AEC Precalibration Checks It is recommended that a copy of the form below be filled in with the required information before attempting AEC calibration. 1. Verify that the AEC chambers are mounted correctly in the Bucky or spot film device. Note that some chamber types must be physically isolated from equipment ground, refer to figure 3D-6 as an example. Verify that each AEC chamber / pickup is properly connected to its intended input channel on the AEC board. Refer to AEC board pictorials, figure 3D-8 to 3D11 for input channel designations 3. Make and type of AEC chamber/pickup: AEC Ch 1_____________________________ AEC Ch 2_____________________________ AEC Ch 3_____________________________ AEC Ch 4_____________________________ 4. Verify signal grounding for the AEC chamber. The only electrical ground should be at the AEC board in the generator. This applies to the ground braid (shield) for the AEC signal cable and to the ground return conductor(s) in the AEC signal cable. Verify that the AEC board is fully inserted into the mating edge connector (if applicable), that all connections to the AEC board are secure, and that the AEC board is securely fastened. Before calibrating, verify that the AEC system is functioning. This includes the AEC chambers / devices and the AEC circuits in the generator. Each of the fields on the AEC device must be able to terminate the exposure. Radiographic techniques to be performed with the equipment (high kV chest, G.I. studies etc)? Normal exposure factors used by the customer (typical mAs / kV range)? Table 3D-3: Precalibration checklist CHECK: CHECK:
2.
CHECK:
5.
CHECK:
6.
CHECK:
7. 8.
3D.2.3 AEC Chamber Installation Figure 3D-6 shows an installed AEC chamber. Note particularly the use of a suitable insulating material to isolate the body of the chamber from the receptor ground. This is required for non-insulated AEC chambers.
Page 3D-10
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.2.3 AEC Chamber Installation (Cont)
AEC Calibration
3D
Figure 3D-6: AEC chamber installation
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-11
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.2.4 AEC Pickup Connections (Overview) Review the applicable sections of chapter 3 section B and C for interfacing AEC devices and programming the image receptors to select the correct AEC device (or no AEC if desired). It should be ensured that each receptor used for AEC has a Bucky or equivalent. A typical R&F room configuration will consist of the following: Table Bucky Wall Bucky Spot film Bucky Aux - digital acquisition
Refer to Figure 3D-7 for typical AEC connections. This is a simplified view only, refer to figures 3D-8 to 3D11 for AEC board layouts used in Millenia and Indico 100 generators. Refer to chapter 1E for the AEC board location in your generator.
Figure 3D-7: AEC pickup connections
Page 3D-12
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.2.5 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers)
AEC Calibration
3D
The AEC board shown below is compatible with various makes / models of solid state chambers (i.e. Comet, Ziehm, Gilardoni). This AEC board is used in various models of generators requiring those AEC chamber types. This board will be fitted with 6 pin circular connectors (J1 to J4) or with 5 pin in-line connectors (J11 to J14), depending on the application.
Figure 3D-8: Dedicated solid state AEC board
AEC board input assignment: Ch 1 = J1 / J11 - Table Radiographic Bucky. Ch 2 = J2 / J12 - Vertical Wall Bucky. Ch 3 = J3 / J13 - Spot Film Device Ch 4 = J4 / J14 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.)
The following potentiometers are used for AEC gain adjustment: R1 is used for channel 1 gain adjustment. R2 is used for channel 2 gain adjustment. R3 is used for channel 3 gain adjustment. R4 is used for channel 4 gain adjustment.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-13
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.2.5 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers) Cont The following tables show the pin outs for both the 6 pin circular connectors and for the 5 pin in-line connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-8. FUNCTION Anode Anode Anode Cathode, left Cathode, right Cathode, middle Ground PIN 1 NOTE: PINS 1, 2, AND 3 ON THE 2 CIRCULAR CONNECTOR ARE 3 ALL CONNECTED IN PARALLEL. 4 5 6 Connector shell Table 3D-4: Pin outs for 6 pin circular connector
FUNCTION Anode Cathode, left Cathode, right Cathode, middle Ground
PIN 2 3 5 4 1 Table 3D-5: Pin outs for 5 pin in-line connector
If the AEC input signal has excessive electrical noise superimposed on the signal, it is suggested that jumpers JW1 to JW4 as appropriate be temporarily installed. If this improves the signal to noise ratio, the jumper(s) should be left in. Excessive signal to noise ratio generally shows up as inconsistent AEC exposure times at low mAs values. It is the responsibility of the installer to determine the need for these jumper(s).
Page 3D-14
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.2.6 AEC Board (Ion Chambers)
AEC Calibration
3D
The AEC board shown below is compatible with various makes / models of ion chambers (i.e. AID, GE, Vacutec, Philips Amplimat, etc). This AEC board is used in various models of generators requiring those AEC chamber types. This board will be fitted with 9 pin D connectors (J11 to J14), or with 12 pin in-line connectors (J1 to J4), depending on the application.
CPI CANADA INC
Made in Canada AEC DEDICATED ION CHAMBER
R79
J14
JW2 JW1
J5
J4 J13
JW4 JW3
J3 J12
JW6 JW5
J2 J11
R11 R12 R13 R14

JW8 JW7
J1
R1
R2
R3
R4
ML_IONBD.CDR
Figure 3D-9: Dedicated ion chamber AEC board
AEC board input assignment: Ch 1 = J1 / J11 - Table Radiographic Bucky. Ch 2 = J2 / J12 - Vertical Wall Bucky. Ch 3 = J3 / J13 - Spot Film Device Ch 4 = J4 / J14 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.)
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-15
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.2.6 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) Cont The following potentiometers are used for short AEC exposure time compensation: R11 is used for channel 1 short exposure time compensation. R12 is used for channel 2 short exposure time compensation. R13 is used for channel 3 short exposure time compensation. R14 is used for channel 4 short exposure time compensation.
R79 adjusts the output of the high voltage bias supply. This is only fitted on versions of this board intended for use with ion chambers that require a separate high voltage bias supply. R79 adjusts the value of the +300 / +500 VDC, and the +45 VDC outputs, and should be set as per the ion chamber manufacturer specifications. The following tables show the pin outs for both the 9 pin D connectors and for the 12 pin in-line connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-9. The 9 pin connectors are compatible with most models of AID ionization chambers. However, the installer should verify compatibility of the pin outs with the chamber(s) being used. FUNCTION +300 VDC output Left / right field select Middle field select Start command output Signal input Right / left field select -12 VDC output +12 VDC output Ground PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NOTE Only provided on configurations of this board that require the +300 VDC output. See note below.
See note below.
Table 3D-6: Pin outs for 9 pin D connector NOTE: Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J11 to J14. Jumpering pins 2-3 of the field selector jumpers (JW7 / JW8 for channel 1, JW5 / JW6 for channel 2, JW3 / JW4 for channel 3, JW1 / JW2 for channel 4) connects the right field select signal to pin 6 and the left field select signal to pin 2. Jumpering pins 1-2 of the field selector jumpers connects the right field select signal to pin 2 and the left field select signal to pin 6.
FUNCTION +500 VDC output + or - 300 VDC output +45 VDC output +12 VDC output -12 VDC output -24 VDC output Ground Start command output Left field select Middle field select Right field select Signal input
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTE The +500, + or -300, and +45 VDC outputs are only provided on configurations of this board designed to interface to ion chambers requiring these voltage outputs. +12, -12, -24 VDC outputs are typically used as the DC supply for a pre-amplifier, often part of the ion chamber. -24 VDC is not available on CMP 200.
Table 3D-7: Pin outs for 12 pin in-line connector
Page 3D-16
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board)
AEC Calibration
3D
The AEC board shown below is factory configured to be compatible with most makes / models of AEC chambers (ion and solid state) on the market. This assembly also contains a low current, high voltage supply for a photo multiplier tube (PMT). The PMT supply is located on the upper board, which also contains the connectors to interface to the AEC pickup device(s).
Figure 3D-10: Universal AEC board
AEC board input / output assignment: Ch 1 = J1 - Table Radiographic Bucky. Ch 2 = J2 - Vertical Wall Bucky. Ch 3 = J3 - Spot Film Device. Ch 4 = J4 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.). J7 = High voltage output for the PMT (if used)
Refer to the end of subsection 3D.2.7 for the procedure for adjusting R10, R19, and R24.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-17
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board) Cont The following table shows the pin outs for the 12 pin connectors J1 to J4 on the AEC board in figure 3D-10 and 3D-11. The pins on J7 are all connected in parallel, thus the PMT high voltage may be taken from any of the pins on that connector. The connections to the AEC pickup chamber vary considerably between ion chambers and solid state chambers. For clarity two tables are shown below, the first for ion chambers and the second for solid state chambers. FUNCTION +500 VDC output +300 VDC output +50 VDC output +12 VDC output -12 VDC output -24 VDC output Ground Start command output Left field select Middle field select Right field select Signal input PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 NOTE +500, +300, +50 VDC outputs are provided for ion chamber use if required. +12, -12, -24 VDC outputs are typically used as the DC supply for a pre-amplifier, often part of the ion chamber. The start command, and left, middle, right field select outputs are jumper configured to be active high or active low as per the AEC chamber requirements. The signal input is jumper configured to accept a positive going or negative going ramp or DC signal as per the AEC chamber output.
Table 3D-8: Ion chamber connections
FUNCTION +500 VDC output +300 VDC output +50 VDC output +12 VDC output -12 VDC output -24 VDC output Ground Start Left Middle Right Signal input
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTE Not used for solid state AEC chambers Not used for solid state AEC chambers Not used for solid state AEC chambers Not used for solid state AEC chambers Not used for solid state AEC chambers Not used for solid state AEC chambers Connect pin 8 to pin 7 (ground). Connect the common anodes for left, middle, right to pin 8. Connect cathode (left) to LEFT, cathode middle to MIDDLE, and cathode right to RIGHT. Cable shield (if used) connects to pin 8. Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Table 3D-9: Solid state chamber connections
Page 3D-18
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board) Cont
AEC Calibration
3D
R10, R19 and R24 adjust the output voltage from the high voltage power supply on the AEC interface board (the upper board on the universal AEC board assembly in figure 3D-10 and 3D-11). This high voltage supply generates the PMT high voltage, up to approximately -1000 VDC available at J7, and also the nominal +500, +300 and +50 VDC supplies noted in table 3D-8. The +500, +300 and +50 VDC supplies are available to bias ion chambers if needed and are adjustable as defined below. These potentiometers are switched into the circuit electronically by logic circuits connected to the AEC channel select commands. Only one potentiometer will be active at any given time, the condition under which each potentiometer is active is described below, along with the function of that potentiometer. R10 adjusts the high voltage supply output for the PMT when ABS operation is selected. This is described in chapter 3E. R24 adjusts the high voltage supply output when AEC channel 1, 2, or 3 is selected. AEC channels 1, 2, 3 are normally used with an AEC chamber. R24 will be used to adjust the +500, +300 and +50 VDC bias voltage outputs if required for ion chamber(s) connected to AEC channels 1, 2 or 3. Refer to the AEC chamber manufacturers recommendations to adjust this voltage. R19 adjusts the high voltage supply output when AEC channel 4 is selected. AEC channel 4 is normally used for digital acquisition or spot film work using a PMT pickup for AEC control. This will typically be the same PMT used for ABS control during fluoroscopy operation. Refer to 3D.4.0 for further details if using a PMT for AEC control on AEC channel 4.
3D.2.8 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation) The AEC board shown below has short AEC time compensation, and is factory configured to be compatible with most makes / models of AEC chambers (ion and solid state) on the market. This assembly also contains a low current, high voltage supply for a photo multiplier tube (PMT). The PMT supply is located on the upper board, which also contains the connectors to interface to the AEC pickup device(s).
Figure 3D-11: Universal AEC board with short AEC time compensation
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-19
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.2.8 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation) Cont
In order to clearly show the adjustment pots on the lower (AEC) board, the upper board which contains the AEC and PMT interface connectors and the high voltage supply is shown shifted from its actual position.
AEC board input / output assignment: Ch 1 = J1 - Table Radiographic Bucky. Ch 2 = J2 - Vertical Wall Bucky. Ch 3 = J3 - Spot Film Device. Ch 4 = J4 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.). J7 = High voltage output for the PMT (if used)
The following potentiometers are used for short AEC exposure time compensation: R91 is used for channel 1 short exposure time compensation. R92 is used for channel 2 short exposure time compensation. R93 is used for channel 3 short exposure time compensation. R94 is used for channel 4 short exposure time compensation.
Refer to tables 3D-8 and 3D-9 for the connector pin outs. Refer to the end of subsection 3D.2.7 for the procedure for adjusting R10, R19, and R24.
Page 3D-20
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.3.0 PRECALIBRATION NOTES:
AEC Calibration
3D
This section contains information that must be understood and confirmed prior to and / or during AEC calibration. CAUTION: THE PROCEDURES IN THESE SECTIONS REQUIRE X-RAY EXPOSURES. TAKE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.
SHOULD AN IMPROPER TECHNIQUE BE SELECTED, OR AN AEC FAULT OCCUR CAUSING NO AEC FEEDBACK SIGNAL TO THE GENERATOR, THE EXPOSURE WILL TERMINATE IF THE RAMP VOLTAGE FAILS TO REACH 4% OF THE EXPECTED RAMP VOLTAGE WHEN THE EXPOSURE TIME REACHES 20% OF THE SELECTED BACK UP TIME. When using PMTs or photo diodes for AEC from the output of an image intensifier, there is normally no need to iterate all the kV break points. It is usually sufficient to use the 75 kV breakpoint calibration value for that film screen at all kV breakpoints. If doing this, the calibration values should be confirmed at all kV breakpoints using the acquired digital images. During AEC calibration, all AEC exposures should be done using mA values such that the exposures are in the 30 to 100 ms range UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE. During AEC calibration, always ensure that the central ray is centered relative to the image receptor. Prior to placing the absorbers, ensure that the collimator is opened sufficiently to irradiate ALL fields on the AEC pickup device. The recommended absorber in table 3D-12 is water. This should be in a plastic container of uniform thickness. Lexan of a similar thickness is also a suitable absorber. Ensure that the absorber is positioned to fully cover the X-ray field. The absorber must extend a minimum of 3/8 in. (10 mm) beyond the X-ray field. All components and assemblies used during AEC calibration must be those that will be used during procedures, and must be positioned as they will be in actual use of the X-ray room. The generator must be known to be calibrated before proceeding. During AEC calibration, if exposure times do not change if the mA is varied, it may be that the input signal level to the AEC board may be too high. If this is experienced, check the ramp voltage at the output of the first gain stage (the first operational amplifier output) on the AEC board for the subject AEC channel. This voltage must never exceed 10 V. If this voltage does exceed 10 V, reduce the input signal level as required.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-21
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.4.0 AEC USING A PMT This section applies if a PMT is to be used for AEC control on AEC channel 4. AEC channels 1, 2, and 3 (as applicable) should be calibrated first (sections 3D.6.0 to 3D.12.0), before calibrating AEC channel 4. WARNING: SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR BEFORE CONNECTING A PMT, AND USE APPROPRIATE HIGH VOLTAGE PRECAUTIONS WHEN MEASURING THE PMT HIGH VOLTAGE.
Figure 3D-12: Connections for PMT AEC Step 1. Action Connect the PMT output to J7 on the generator interface board (the ABS input) as shown in figure 3D-12. If the PMT for AEC on channel 4 configuration was factory ordered, the generator will be pre-wired as shown above. The ABS input is at J7-12, and the signal will be divided for the AEC board via the resistor from J7-12 to J7-10. Appropriate high voltage shielded cable should be used for the PMT signal connections. Set the PMT voltage to approximately -650 VDC for AEC operation using R19 on the AEC interface board. AEC channel 4 must be selected in order for R19 to be active. USE ONLY TP5 ON THE AEC INTERFACE BOARD (FIGURE 3D-10, 3D-11) FOR THE HV METER GROUND WHEN MEASURING PMT HIGH VOLTAGE. CONNECT THE GROUND LEAD FIRST BEFORE MEASURING THE HIGH VOLTAGE. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MEASURE THIS WITHOUT A SUITABLE METER. Configure AEC channel 4 as per 3D.6.0 steps 6 to 14, but use the following settings in the AEC SETUP menu: Select ION chamber, and enable FILM SCREEN 1 only, and CENTER FIELD only. If AEC SETUP menu screen 2 is available, set C FIELD COMP to 0 (this is model dependent, refer to AEC SETUP in chapter 3C). Enter the calibration value 45 into EACH of the kV breakpoints. The procedure for setting the 75 kV knee breakpoint is detailed in 3D.6.0, step 16. The remaining breakpoints are set in a similar manner (refer to the balance of 3D.6.0 for details on accessing those breakpoint settings). Adjust the channel 4 gain adjustment potentiometer on the AEC board to achieve the desired I.I. input dose at the 75 kV knee breakpoint, using absorber thickness per table 3D-12. The PMT voltage that was set in step 2 may need to be adjusted up or down if the gain adjustment potentiometer does not provide the desired adjustment range in step 5. Repeat the exposures at other kV breakpoints that cover the desired kV operating range, checking the I.I. input dose at each kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12. Readjust the breakpoint calibration values in step 7, if necessary, to achieve the desired I.I. input dose at those kV values. DO NOT READJUST THE AEC GAIN POT OR PMT VOLTAGE.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6. 7.
8.
Page 3D-22
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.5.0 AEC FIELD BALANCE
AEC Calibration
3D
If your generator does NOT have AEC SETUP menu 2 (see the section AEC SETUP in chapter 3C), follow the AEC chamber manufacturers recommendations for AEC field balancing. If your generator has AEC SETUP menu 2, follow the AEC chamber manufacturers recommendations for AEC field balancing if available. If the AEC chamber has no provision for AEC field balancing, follow the steps below. PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS IMMEDIATELY BEFORE DOING AEC CALIBRATION AT THE 75 kV KNEE BREAKPOINT IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS: 1. Enter AEC SETUP menu 2, and ensure that each of the field compensation values is set to 0. 2. When set up to do dose measurements at the 75 kV knee breakpoint, evaluate the AEC field balance by measuring the dose at the film plane during an AEC exposure as each of the three AEC fields is individually selected. 3. If the AEC chamber field balance is not acceptable, go to AEC SETUP menu 2 and adjust the right or left compensation values up or down as required. Do not adjust the middle field (C) compensation value. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3. The right and left AEC field compensations are adjusted to match the middle field. This process may need to be repeated several times until the three AEC fields are suitably balanced.
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY)
Figure 3D-13: Equipment setup for table Bucky AEC calibration
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-23
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont Action SETUP FOR AEC CALIBRATION IF THE AEC BOARD BEING CALIBRATED HAS SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (FIGURE 3D-9 OR 3D-11), THE SHORT EXPOSURE TIME COMPENSATION MUST FIRST BE DISABLED. TO DO THIS, ADJUST ALL SHORT AEC EXPOSURE TIME COMPENSATION POTENTIOMETERS TO ZERO, I.E. SUCH THAT THE WIPERS ON EACH POT ARE GROUNDED. VERIFY THE CORRECT SETTINGS BY USING AN OHMMETER ON LOW OHMS RANGE AND ENSURING A NEAR ZERO OHMS READING FROM THE WIPER OF EACH SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION POT TO GROUND. REFER TO TABLE 3D-14 FOR THE SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION POTENTIOMETER DESIGNATIONS. FAILURE TO PRESET THESE POTS WILL RESULT IN DIFFICULTY IN PERFORMING AEC CALIBRATION. 1. Set up the X-ray tube stand as shown in figure 3D-13. 2. Align the tube stand and table Bucky such that the central ray is centered relative to the image receptor. 3. Open up the collimator to expose all three fields of the AEC pickup. Ensure that the central ray remains centered relative to the image receptor. 4. Place the R probe at the film plane, i.e. behind the grid. If this cannot be done, then place the probe on the table top. Ensure that the R-probe is located as close as possible to the central ray, but not blocking any pickup areas on the AEC device. The R meter must be set to measure in the micro-R range. 5. Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-12) in the X-ray field, ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber. 6. Place the generator into the programming mode. Refer to section 3C.1.1. 7. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu select GEN CONFIGURATION. 8. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select AEC SETUP. 9. Set up the AEC parameters in the AEC SETUP menu FOR EACH ACTIVE AEC CHANNEL. Refer to AEC SETUP in chapter 3C. 10. Set up the image receptors in the RECEPTOR SETUP menu such that each receptor has the desired AEC channel assigned to it. Refer to RECEPTOR SETUP in chapter 3C. 11. In the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, set MEMORY to NO for each image receptor. This will ensure that the next receptor being calibrated will not remember the techniques from the previous receptor. The MEMORY function may be reset as desired after AEC calibration is completed. 12. In the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, ensure that the AEC BACKUP MAS and AEC BACKUP MS are set sufficiently high that the generator backup timer will not terminate the exposure. 13. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select AEC CALIBRATION. 14. From the AEC CALIBRATION menu select FILM SCREEN 1 (the slowest film screen combination). CAUTION: DURING THE FOLLOWING CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, BE SURE THAT THE SELECTED TECHNIQUES WILL NOT OVERLOAD THE X-RAY TUBE. USE CAUTION WHEN REPEATING EXPOSURES AS THIS MAY QUICKLY OVERLOAD THE X-RAY TUBE. MOST X-RAY TUBE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMEND NO MORE THAN TWO HIGH SPEED STARTS PER MINUTE. Step
NOTE:
BE SURE TO USE THE SAME CASSETTE FOR EACH EXPOSURE AT THAT FILM SPEED.
Page 3D-24
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont NOTE:
AEC Calibration
3D
FOR THE CMP 200 AND THE INDICO 100 RAD-ONLY CONSOLE, LCD SCREEN DETAILS NOT RELEVANT TO AEC CALIBRATION WILL DIFFER SLIGHTLY FROM THE EXAMPLES IN THIS SECTION. HOWEVER, THE AEC CALIBRATION MENUS WILL APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS SECTION. RLF COMPENSATION AND MULTI-SPOT COMPENSATION IS NOT AVAILABLE ON CMP200. The following screens are used for AEC calibration * AEC CALIBRATION * FILM SCREEN 1 FILM SCREEN 2 FILM SCREEN 3 EXIT *TUBE? 0%HU 50KV: 84.0: 55KV: 78.0: 65KV: 66.0: 75KV: 54.0 3200MS << *TUBE? 0%HU 110KV: 34.0: 130KV: 28.0: RLF COMPENSATION MULT. SPOT COMP: 3200MS << Step 15. 16. 17. AEC CAL, F/S 1* 85KV: 42.8 95KV: 38.0 + >> AEC CAL, F/S 1*
DENSITY SETUP
0%
+ -
18. 19.
20.
Action 75 KV KNEE BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION: Select the table Bucky image receptor. Select the 75 kV knee breakpoint and enter the value 45 using the + or - buttons adjacent to the LCD display. Select the appropriate mA for the first film speed being calibrated per table 3D-12, remembering that the slowest film screen used in that installation must be calibrated first (example 320 mA for 100 speed film). Select large focus, center field. Make an exposure and note the dose and mAs. Referring to table 3D-11, select the estimated dose required for the film speed being calibrated i.e. 1025 25 R (see note on next page regarding conversion of R to Gy if desired) at the 75 kV knee breakpoint for 100 speed film. Note that the dose values in the table are based on the R-probe being located at the film plane. If the probe was placed in front of the grid the dose values shown in the tables must be increased accordingly. The dose in front of the grid will typically be approximately double the dose at the film plane. Adjust the required gain potentiometer on the AEC board (see note below) while taking exposures until the dose noted in the previous step is obtained. CHANNEL 1 ON THE AEC BOARD IS TYPICALLY USED FOR THE TABLE BUCKY AEC CHAMBER. YOUR INSTALLATION MAY USE A DIFFERENT CHANNEL ON THE AEC BOARD. REFER TO TABLE 3D-10 FOR THE AEC BOARD GAIN POTENTIOMETER (GAIN POT) DESIGNATIONS FOR THE VARIOUS AEC BOARDS.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-25
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont AEC BOARD Solid State (Fig 3D-8) Ion Chamber (Fig 3D-9) Universal (Fig 3D-10) Universal (Fig 3D-11) CHANNEL 1 R1 R1 R1 R1 CHANNEL 2 R2 R2 R26 R2 CHANNEL 3 R3 R3 R27 R3 CHANNEL 4 R4 R4 R28 R4
Table 3D-10: AEC board gain pot designations
FILM SPEED 100 200 400 800
FILM PLANE DOSE @ 75 kV 1025 25 uR 550 25 uR 260 12 uR 135 12 uR
Table 3D-11: Film speed vs. approximate dose @ 75 kV These are APPROXIMATE dose inputs to the film cassette plane at an SID of 40 in. (100 cm), using a grid with a 12:1 ratio. NOTE: To convert from R to Gy divide the value in R by 114.5. This will give the value in Gy (for example 114.5 R = 1 Gy).
Action Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same technique as in the previous step, expose the film and develop it. 22. Measure the optical density. The desired value should have been previously recorded in a copy of table 3D-1. 23. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the desired value, adjust the gain pot (as per step 20) to increase or decrease the density, then repeat the previous two steps. 24. Once the desired film density is achieved, record the mAs, dose, calibration number and O.D. in a copy of table 3D-13. FOR EACH BREAKPOINT IN THE REMAINDER OF THIS SECTION, START WITH THE APPROXIMATE DOSE AS PER TABLE 3D-12. AFTER THAT DOSE IS ACHIEVED, A FILM MUST BE EXPOSED AND THE O.D. VERIFIED. FURTHER DOSE ITERATIONS MAY BE REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE THE DESIRED OPTICAL DENSITY.
Step 21.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT AFTER THE 75KV KNEE BREAKPOINT IS CALIBRATED. DOSE / DENSITY ADJUSTMENTS WILL ONLY BE DONE
BY ADJUSTING THE CALIBRATION VALUES FOR THE OTHER KV BREAKPOINTS. 55 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION: Change the absorber thickness per table 3D-12. As before, ensure that the absorber fully blocks the X-ray field. Select the 55 kV breakpoint. Make an exposure and note the dose. Use mA values as per table 3D-12. Adjust the 55 kV calibration numbers using the + or - buttons such that the actual dose is equal to the target dose at 55 kV for the selected film speed per table 3D-12. DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT.
25. 26. 27. 28.
Page 3D-26
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont 100 speed film screen Break point 75 kV knee pt. 55 kV 50 kV 65 kV 110 kV 130 kV 85 kV 95 kV 200 speed film screen Break point 75 kVp knee pt. 55 kVp 50 kVp 65 kVp 110 kVp 130 kVp 85 kVp 95 kVp 400 speed film screen Break Point 75 kVp knee pt. 55 kVp 50 kVp 65 kVp 110 kVp 130 kVp 85 kVp 95 kVp 800 speed film screen Break Point 75 kVp knee pt. 55 kVp 50 kVp 65 kVp 110 kVp 130 kVp 85 kVp 95 kVp
AEC Calibration
3D
Absorber 15 cm H2O 10 cm H2O 10 cm H2O 10 cm H2O 20 cm H2O 25 cm H2O 20 cm H2O 20 cm H2O
Dose 1025 /R 1808 /R 1832 /R 1436 /R 1088 /R 848 /R 1060 /R 1008 /R
mAs 59.2 mAs 54 mAs 128 mAs 44 mAs 24 mAs 16 mAs 54 mAs 44 mAs
Generator mA 320 mA 320 mA 320 mA 320 mA 200 mA 200 mA 320 mA 320 mA
Generator BUT mAs 320 mAs (MAX) 320 mAs (MAX) 320 mAs (MAX) 320 mAs (MAX) 320 mAs (MAX) 320 mAs (MAX) 320 mAs (MAX) 320 mAs (MAX)
Dose 518 /R 904 /R 916 /R 718 /R 544 /R 484 /R 530 /R 504 /R
mAs 30 mAs 26 mAs 64 mAs 22 mAs 12 mAs 8 mAs 27 mAs 22 mAs
Dose 259 /R 452 /R 458 /R 359 /R 272 /R 424 /R 265 /R 252 /R
mAs 14.8 mAs 13 mAs 32 mAs 11 mAs 6 mAs 4 mAs 13.5 mAs 11 mAs
Dose 129 /R 226 /R 229/R 179 /R 136 /R 212 /R 132 /R 126 /R
mAs 7.4 mAs 6.5 mAs 16 mAs 5.5 mAs 3 mAs 2 mAs 6.7 mAs 5.5 mAs
Table 3D-12: Breakpoint calibration factors For SIDs other than 40 in. (100 cm) multiply the dose by the factor [new SID / 40 in. (100 cm)]
2
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-27
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont 3D.6.1 Break point calibration worksheet Record the final measurements in a copy of the table below. The final measurements are those obtained AFTER films have been developed to verify the correct O.D. at each breakpoint. FILM SCREEN 1 #1 BK. POINT = 75 kV #2 BK. POINT = 55 kV #3 BK. POINT = 50 kV #4 BK. POINT = 65 kV #5 BK. POINT = 110 kV #6 BK. POINT = 130 kV #7 BK. POINT = 85 kV #8 BK. POINT = 95 kV FILM SCREEN 2 #1 BK. POINT = 75 kV #2 BK. POINT = 55 kV #3 BK. POINT = 50 kV #4 BK. POINT = 65 kV #5 BK. POINT = 110 kV #6 BK. POINT = 130 kV #7 BK. POINT = 85 kV #8 BK. POINT = 95 kV FILM SCREEN 3 #1 BK. POINT = 75 kV #2 BK. POINT = 55 kV #3 BK. POINT = 50 kV #4 BK. POINT = 65 kV #5 BK. POINT = 110 kV #6 BK. POINT = 130 kV #7 BK. POINT = 85 kV #8 BK. POINT = 95 kV SPEED = mAs mAs mAs mAs mAs mAs mAs mAs = = = = = = = = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. =
SPEED = mAs mAs mAs mAs mAs mAs mAs mAs = = = = = = = = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. =
SPEED = mAs mAs mAs mAs mAs mAs mAs mAs = = = = = = = = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = DOSE = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = CAL. NO. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. = O.D. =
Table 3D-13: Breakpoint worksheet
Page 3D-28
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont Step 29. 30. 31.
AEC Calibration
3D
32.
Action Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same technique, expose the film and develop it. Measure the optical density. The optical density should be as per step 22. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the desired value, adjust the 55 kV calibration number using the + or - buttons, then repeat the previous two steps. DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT. Once the desired film density is achieved, record the required values in a copy of table 3D-13. 50 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION: If special techniques are NOT used which require the 50 kV range, simply enter the 55 kV calibration number into the 50 kV breakpoint using the + and - buttons. Note that at approximately 55 kV and under, the film screen sensitivity becomes too low for practical AEC operation when used with a Bucky. If the 50 kV range IS used, the 50 kV breakpoint must be calibrated. To do this, select the 50 kV breakpoint. The 50 kV step will use the same absorber as used for the 55 kV step. Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 50 kV breakpoint if desired, substituting 50 kV where applicable in place of 55 kV. 65 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION: Select the 65 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 65 kV breakpoint. Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 65 kV breakpoint, substituting 65 kV where applicable in place of 55 kV. IN THE FOLLOWING STEPS, SELECT >> AND << AS REQUIRED TO NAVIGATE BETWEEN THE TWO BREAKPOINT SCREENS (SCREEN 1 LISTS BREAKPOINTS 50 KV TO 95 KV, SCREEN 2 SHOWS BREAKPOINTS 110 AND 130 KV). 110 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION: Select the 110 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 110 kV breakpoint. Use the appropriate mA for this breakpoint as per table 3D-12. Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 110 kV breakpoint, substituting 110 kV where applicable in place of 55 kV. 130 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION: If special high kV techniques are NOT used which require the 130 kV range, enter the 110 kV calibration number into the 130 kV breakpoint using the + and - buttons. If the 130 kV range IS used, the 130 kV breakpoint must be calibrated. To do this, select the 130 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 130 kV breakpoint. Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 130 kV breakpoint if desired, substituting 130 kV where applicable in place of 55 kV. 85 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION: Select the 85 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 85 kV breakpoint. Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 85 kV breakpoint, substituting 85 kV where applicable in place of 55 kV.
33.
34.
35.
36. 37. 38.
39. 40.
41. 42.
43.
44. 45.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-29
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont Step 46. 47. 48. Step 49. 50. Action 95 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION: Select the 95 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 95 kV breakpoint. Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 95 kV breakpoint, substituting 95 kV where applicable in place of 55 kV. Select << to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu. Action FILM SCREEN 2 BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION: Select FILM SCREEN 2. Repeat steps 16 to 48 as described for film screen 1 except: WHEN CALIBRATING THE 75 KV KNEE BREAKPOINT FOR FILM SCREEN 2, DO NOT ADJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT. DOSE ADJUSTMENTS MUST ONLY BE MADE BY VARYING THE BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION NUMBERS. FILM SCREEN 2 MUST BE THE NEXT HIGHEST FILM SPEED AFTER FILM SCREEN 1. Step 51. 52. Action FILM SCREEN 3 BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION: Select FILM SCREEN 3. Repeat steps 16 to 48 as described for film screen 1 except: WHEN CALIBRATING THE 75 KV KNEE BREAKPOINT FOR FILM SCREEN 3, DO NOT ADJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT. DOSE ADJUSTMENTS MUST ONLY BE MADE BY VARYING THE BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION NUMBERS. FILM SCREEN 3 MUST BE THE HIGHEST FILM SPEED.
3D.7.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (IF APPLICABLE) Step Action THIS SECTION ONLY APPLIES FOR AEC BOARDS WITH SHORT AEC EXPOSURE TIME COMPENSATION (FIGURE 3D-9 OR 3D-11) IF AEC EXPOSURES LESS THAN APPROXIMATELY 15 MS ARE REQUIRED. Select the image receptor to be short AEC time compensated, i.e. table Bucky. Select the highest film speed used on the selected receptor, and then select the 75 kV breakpoint. Set the mA per table 3D-12 for the film speed being used. Reinstall the absorber as per table 3D-12 for the 75 kV breakpoint. Make an exposure and confirm the dose (or mAs) readings as previously recorded in table 3D-13. Reduce the absorber thickness such as to decrease the AEC exposure time to approximately 10 ms. Adjust the short AEC time compensation pot for the AEC channel being calibrated such that the dose (or mAs) is approximately the same as previously recorded (step 4). The short AEC time compensation potentiometer designations are given in table 3D-14.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Page 3D-30
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.7.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (IF APPLICABLE) Cont AEC BOARD Ion Chamber (Fig 3D-9) Universal (Fig 3D-11) CHANNEL 1 R11 R91 CHANNEL 2 R12 R92 CHANNEL 3 R13 R93
AEC Calibration
3D
CHANNEL 4 R14 R94
Table 3D-14: Short AEC time compensation pot designations
Step 7. 8. 9.
10.
11.
Action Reduce the absorber thickness again such as to decrease the AEC exposure time to approximately 6 ms (but not less). Adjust the short AEC time compensation pot for the AEC channel being calibrated such that the dose (or mAs) is approximately the same as it was in step 6. The short AEC time compensation adjustments affect the AEC calibration at longer exposure times. Therefore, it may now be necessary to readjust the gain pot for the AEC channel being calibrated to restore the dose (or mAs) values to the values previously recorded in table 3D-13. Ensure that the absorber thickness and mA values are as per table 3D-12 when readjusting the AEC gain pot. Films should be exposed and developed, and the O.D. checked at the 75 kV breakpoint at AEC exposure times of approximately 6 ms and approximately 100 ms. If the film density is not acceptable at both short and long AEC exposure times, it will be necessary to iterate the adjustments of both the short AEC time compensation pot and the AEC gain pot by repeating steps 3 to 8. Repeat steps 1 to 10 for each image receptor (AEC channel) to be short AEC time compensated.
3D.8.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION The following screens are used for density calibration * AEC CALIBRATION * FILM SCREEN 1 FILM SCREEN 2 FILM SCREEN 3 EXIT *TUBE? 0%HU -8: -7: -6: -5: 62% 3200MS EXIT *TUBE? 0%HU -4: 50% -3: 37% -2: 25% -1: 12% 3200MS << *DENS. SETUP*
DENSITY SETUP
+ >> *DENS. SETUP*
+ >>
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-31
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.8.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION (Cont) *TUBE? 0%HU +1: 12% +2: 25% +3: 37% +4: 50% 3200MS << *TUBE? 0%HU +5: 62% +6: +7: +8: 3200MS << *DENS. SETUP*
+ >> *DENS. SETUP*
+ RETURN
Please note the following points regarding density calibration: Up to eight density plus and eight density minus steps are available. If 8 density steps are not required, the unwanted density steps may be programmed out per the procedure below. For example, if only 5 density steps are desired, then density steps 6, 7, 8 may be deprogrammed. Once the desired number of density steps are known, the relative minimum and maximum dose values must be determined. Typically the minimum density step will result in half (50%) of the nominal dose and the maximum density step will typically give double the nominal dose (100% increase). The nominal dose is the value that was recorded at 0 density in table 3D-13. The relative dose change per density step must be determined next. To do this, note the relative minimum and maximum dose as determined above (i.e. 50% at min density and 100% increase at max density), then calculate the number of - density steps and the number of + density steps that will be required. The relative dose change between density steps will then be the minimum density (i.e. 50) divided by the number of density minus steps or the maximum density (i.e. 100) divided by the number of density plus steps. This will yield the required dose increment for each density minus step and for each density plus step respectively. For 8 density steps, this gives a dose decrease of 6.25% per density minus step (8 steps x 6.25% per step = 50% dose at -8 density) or a dose increase of 12.5% per density plus step (8 steps x 12.5% per step = 100% dose increase at +8 density). Refer to table 3D-15 for two typical examples of density steps vs. calibration numbers. For 8 minus density steps the dose decrease is 6.25% per step, and for 8 + density steps the dose increase is 12.5% per step as per the example calculation above. For 5 minus density steps the dose decrease is 10% per step, and for 5 + density steps the dose increase is 20% per step.
Page 3D-32
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.8.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION (Cont) DENSITY STEP -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8
AEC Calibration
3D
CALIBRATION NUMBER (- 8 DENSITY CALIBRATION NUMBER (- 5 DENSITY = HALF THE DOSE, +8 STEP DENSITY = HALF THE DOSE, +5 DENSITY = DOUBLE THE DOSE) DENSITY = DOUBLE THE DOSE) 50 44 38 31 -5 50 25 -4 40 19 -3 30 13 -2 20 6 -1 10 0 DENSITY: SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. 13 +1 20 25 +2 40 38 +3 60 50 +4 80 63 +5 99 75 88 99 Table 3D-15: Example density values
Step 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
7. 8. 9. 10.
11.
Action Reselect FILM SCREEN 1. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 75 kV breakpoint. Reselect the 75 kV knee breakpoint. Select << to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu. Select DENSITY SETUP. Referring to table 3D-13, note the dose at 75 kV for film screen 1. This will be referred to as the 0 density dose. Select the highest density minus step desired i.e. - 8 from the density setup menu. If it is not intended to use this step, select the highest density minus step to be used i.e. - 5, then set the unused steps to - to disable those steps. To disable density steps, press the - button to scroll down until the - symbol is displayed. Set the calibration number for the highest density minus step to the desired relative density value (example 50, this will give approximately 1/2 the 0 density dose). Make an exposure and confirm that the measured dose is approximately the desired value. If the measured dose is not as expected, adjust the calibration number for that density step and repeat step 8. Select the next density step (i.e. - 7) and enter the appropriate calibration number for that step. Refer to table 3D-15 and the notes preceding table 3D-15. Repeat steps 8 and 9. Repeat the previous step for each remaining density minus step. Use the >> and << buttons to navigate through the DENS SETUP menu in order to access all the density steps in this procedure.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-33
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.8.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION (Cont) Step 12. 13. 14. Action Set the calibration number for the highest density plus step to the desired relative density value (example 100, this will result in approximately double the 0 density dose). Repeat step 8 and 9. Select the next lowest density step (i.e. 7) and enter the appropriate calibration number for that step. Refer to table 3D-15 and notes preceding table 3D-15. Repeat steps 8 and 9. Repeat the previous step for each remaining density plus step. Use the >> and << buttons to navigate through the DENS SETUP menu in order to access all the density steps. When the density setup is complete and verified via dose measurements, use the << and EXIT buttons to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
15.
16.
Page 3D-34
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.9.0 RLF COMPENSATION
AEC Calibration
3D
The following points should be noted regarding RLF compensation. RLF compensation is normally only needed if special techniques are used which result in AEC exposures greater than 100 ms. If perfect, film would provide linear density changes with linearly increasing exposure times. In reality, at longer exposures, film effectively becomes slower. This effect is known as reciprocity law failure. To compensate, exposure times must be increased at longer exposures. This compensation is achieved by increasing the AEC reference voltage at longer exposure times. RLF compensation is applied to three ranges (50-500 ms, 500-1000 ms, and 1000- 1500 ms) as shown below. The examples below are not meant to represent actual RLF compensation percentages in your installation. Actual values will need to be determined per the procedure following. Between 0 and 50 ms no RLF compensation is applied. Per figure 3D-14, the AEC reference voltage is constant at 1 unit between 0 and 50 ms. At 50 ms, RLF compensation = 10% is applied. This means that the reference voltage will increase by 10% between 50 ms and 500 ms in a linear fashion. At 500 ms the reference voltage is then 1.0 X 1.10 = 1.10 units. At 500 ms, RLF compensation = 20% is applied. This means that the reference voltage will increase by 20% between 500 ms and 1000 ms in a linear fashion. At 1000 ms the reference voltage is then 1.10 X 1.20 = 1.32 units. At 1000 ms, RLF compensation = 30% is applied. This means that the reference voltage will increase by 30% between 1000 ms and 1500 ms in a linear fashion. At 1500 ms the reference voltage is then 1.32 X 1.30 = 1.72 units The rate of increase of the reference voltage beyond 1500 ms will be constant, up to limit of the B.U.T. (backup timer). The compensation curve resulting from the RLF values described above is depicted in the graph below.
Figure 3D-14: Example RLF compensation curve
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-35
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.9.0 RLF COMPENSATION (Cont) The following screens are used for RLF compensation * AEC CALIBRATION * FILM SCREEN 1 FILM SCREEN 2 FILM SCREEN 3 EXIT *TUBE? 0%HU 50KV: 84.0: 55KV: 78.0: 65KV: 66.0: 75KV: 54.0 3200MS << *TUBE? 0%HU 110KV: 34.0: 130KV: 28.0: RLF COMPENSATION MULT. SPOT COMP: 3200MS << *TUBE? 0%HU 50MSEC: 0% 500MSEC: 4% 1000MSEC: 0% 3200MS << AEC CAL, F/S 1* 85KV: 42.8 95KV: 38.0 + >> AEC CAL, F/S 1*
DENSITY SETUP
0%
+ -
RLF COMP, F/S 1*
+ -
Page 3D-36
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.9.0 RLF COMPENSATION (Cont) Step 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.
AEC Calibration
3D
24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32.
Action Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-12) in the X-ray field, ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber. Select the slowest film screen combination to compensate. This will normally be FILM SCREEN 1. Select >>. Select RLF COMPENSATION. From the LF COMP menu, select 50MSEC and set the value to 0 using the + or buttons. Select mA appropriate to the film speed i.e. 100 mA for 100 speed film. Make an exposure and adjust the mA if necessary to give an exposure time of approximately 50 ms. Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an exposure using the same techniques. Record the mAs, then develop the film. Note the O.D. This should be within 10% of the O.D. that was noted during AEC calibration. Make an exposure and reduce the mA to give an exposure time of approximately 500 ms. Make an exposure using the same techniques. Record the mAs. Enter an RLF offset at 50MSEC to give a mAs increase of approximately 10%. Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an exposure and develop the film. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the value in step 10, adjust the 50 ms RLF offset value as appropriate using the + and - buttons. Repeat steps 14 and 15 until the required O.D. is achieved. Make an exposure and reduce the mA to give an exposure time of approximately 1000 ms. Select the 500MSEC RLF adjustment and set the value to 0 using the + or - buttons. Make an exposure using the same techniques. Record the mAs. Enter an RLF offset at 500MSEC to give a mAs increase of approximately 20%. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an exposure and develop the film. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the value in step 10, adjust the 500 ms RLF offset value as appropriate using the + and - buttons. Repeat steps 21 and 22 until the desired density is achieved. THE FOLLOWING STEPS ONLY APPLY IF TECHNIQUES ARE USED RESULTING IN AEC EXPOSURE TIMES GREATER THAN APPROXIMATELY 1500 MS. Make an exposure and reduce the mA such as to give an exposure time of approximately 1500ms. Select the 1000MSEC RLF adjustment and set the value to 0 using the + or - buttons. Make an exposure using the same techniques. Record the mAs. Enter an RLF offset at 1000MSEC to give an mAs increase of approximately 30%. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an exposure and develop the film. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the value in step 10, adjust the 1000 ms RLF offset value as appropriate using the + and - buttons. Repeat steps 28 and 29 until the desired density is achieved. Select << as required to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu. Repeat steps 2 to 31 for FILM SCREEN 2 and FILM SCREEN 3 if required.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-37
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.10.0 MULTIPLE SPOT COMPENSATION The following screens are used for multiple spot compensation * AEC CALIBRATION * FILM SCREEN 1 DENSITY SETUP FILM SCREEN 2 FILM SCREEN 3 EXIT *TUBE? 0%HU 50KV: 84.0: 55KV: 78.0: 65KV: 66.0: 75KV: 54.0 3200MS << *TUBE? 0%HU 110KV: 34.0: 130KV: 28.0: RLF COMPENSATION MULT. SPOT COMP: 3200MS << AEC CAL, F/S 1* 85KV: 42.8 95KV: 38.0 + >> AEC CAL, F/S 1*
0%
+ -
Multiple spot compensation may be required when doing multiple exposures on a single film. In this mode of serial recording, the X-ray field is usually coned down to a small area. Due to the lack of scatter and possible AEC field cutoff, an AEC density offset may be added if required. This offset is known as multiple spot compensation. In order to activate the multiple spot compensation feature, the R & F table must supply a closed dry contact when the SFD is operated in multi-spot mode. The multi-spot input to the generator is at TB5 pins 11 and 12 on the room interface board.
Page 3D-38
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.10.0 MULTIPLE SPOT COMPENSATION (Cont) Step 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
AEC Calibration
3D
14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
Action Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 85 kV per table 3D-12) in the X-ray field, ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber. Select the slowest film screen combination to compensate. This will normally be FILM SCREEN 1. Select >>. Select MULT SPOT COMP. Enter the value 0% using the + and - buttons. Select 85 kV via the kV + or - buttons in the radiography section of the console. Select mA appropriate to the film speed per table 3D-13. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the SFD. Make an exposure and record the mAs, then develop the film. Verify that the film is evenly exposed, and that the O.D. is the desired value Enable the SFD multi-spot function, then make several exposures and record the mAs. Develop the film and record the O.D. for each exposure. If the measured optical densities are not within 5% of the desired value, enter a multispot compensation offset percentage that increases or decreases the mAs as appropriate using the + and - buttons. Repeat steps 8 to 13 until the desired O.D. is achieved on all exposures. Select << as required to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu. Repeat steps 2 to 15 for FILM SCREEN 2 and FILM SCREEN 3 if required. Select EXIT to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu. Select EXIT, then EXIT SETUP to return to the normal operating mode.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-39
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.11.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY)
Figure 3D-15: Equipment setup for wall Bucky AEC calibration Please note the following points regarding wall Bucky calibration: If the wall Bucky is dedicated to chest radiography, a focused grid with a 10:1 or 12:1 ratio should be used along with an SID of 72 in. (180 cm). If the wall Bucky will be used for conventional as well as chest radiography, then two grids should ideally be used. See the note at the bottom of this page.
A reasonable compromise if a single grid must be used is a 10:1 ratio, 60 in. (150 cm) grid. NOTE: SINCE MOST WALL BUCKYS ARE USED AT 40 AND 72 IN. (100 AND 180 CM) SID, THE GRID MUST BE CHOSEN WITH CARE WITH RESPECT TO CUT-OFF. A TYPICAL GRID WILL HAVE AN 8:1 RATIO, WITH 85 LINE PAIR / INCH OR 10:1 RATIO WITH 150 LINE PAIR / INCH (STATIONARY). TYPICALLY, 400 SPEED FILM SCREEN WILL BE USED WITH 90 SECOND PROCESSING.
Page 3D-40
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.11.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) Cont Grid Absorption
AEC Calibration
3D
The following information may aid in selecting a grid and / or estimating doses in front of the Bucky if required: The percentages listed are approximate. A 10:1 ratio 60 in. (150 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13 cm) from center: At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 18% At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption = 40% A 12:1 ratio 60 in. (150 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13 cm) from center: At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 20% At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption = 50% A 10:1 ratio 72 in. (180 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13 cm) from center: At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption = 65% A 12:1 ratio 72 in. (180 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13 cm) from center: At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption = 75% A 10:1 ratio 40 in. (100 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13 cm) from center: At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 65% A 12:1 ratio 40 in. (100 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13 cm) from center: At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 75%
NOTE:
BREAKPOINT CALIBRATIONS MAY HAVE BEEN DONE FOR ALL THREE FILM SCREEN COMBINATIONS DURING TABLE BUCKY AEC CALIBRATION. IF SO, THE REMAINING IMAGE RECEPTORS MUST USE THE CALIBRATION CURVES PREVIOUSLY ESTABLISHED FOR THOSE FILM SCREENS. IF AN UNUSED FILM SCREEN COMBINATION IS AVAILABLE FOR WALL BUCKY USE, IT IS SUGGESTED THAT TWO RECEPTOR SELECTOR BUTTONS ON THE CONSOLE BE ASSIGNED TO SELECT THE WALL BUCKY. THE FIRST WALL BUCKY SELECTOR SHOULD BE USED FOR 40 IN. (100 CM) SIDS WITH THE APPROPRIATE PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED FILM SCREEN. THE SECOND WALL BUCKY SELECTOR SHOULD THEN BE USED WITH THE PREVIOUSLY UNCALIBRATED FILM SCREEN AT 72 IN. (180 CM) SIDS. THIS METHOD WILL ALLOW THE GRID TO BE OPTIMIZED FOR EACH SID, AS A SEPARATE DEDICATED FILM SCREEN WITH ITS OWN CALIBRATION CURVE CAN BE ASSIGNED TO THE 72 IN. (180CM) SID.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-41
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.10.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) Cont Step Action USE OF ONE FILM SCREEN FOR BOTH SIDS USING PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED FILM SCREENS Set up the X-ray tube stand as shown in figure 3D-15. Align the tube stand and wall Bucky such that the central ray is centered relative to the image receptor. Open up the collimator to expose all three fields of the AEC pickup. Ensure that the central ray remains centered relative to the image receptor. Place the R probe at the film plane, i.e. behind the grid. If this cannot be done, then attach the probe to the front of the Bucky. Ensure that the R-probe is located directly under the central ray. The R meter must be set to measure in the micro-R range. Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-12) in the X-ray field, ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber. Select the wall Bucky image receptor. Select the slowest film screen used for the wall Bucky, then select the appropriate mA for that film screen per table 3D-12 (example 320 mA for 100 speed film). Select 75 kV, large focus, center field. Make an exposure and note the dose and mAs. Referring to table 3D-13, select the previously established dose required at the 75 kV knee breakpoint for the film speed being calibrated. Note that the dose values in the table are based on a specific R-probe placement during table Bucky calibration (either at the film plane, or alternately in front of the Bucky). If the probe placement for wall Bucky calibration is not the same as it was for table Bucky calibration, use the estimated dose correction factor in this subsection under GRID ABSORPTION. Adjust the required gain potentiometer on the AEC board (see note below) while taking exposures until the dose noted in the previous step is obtained. CHANNEL 2 ON THE AEC BOARD IS TYPICALLY USED FOR THE WALL BUCKY AEC CHAMBER. YOUR INSTALLATION MAY USE A DIFFERENT CHANNEL ON THE AEC BOARD. DO NOT READJUST THE GAIN POT FOR THE CHANNEL THAT WAS PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED (FOR TABLE BUCKY). REFER TO TABLE 3D-10 FOR THE AEC BOARD GAIN POTENTIOMETER (GAIN POT) DESIGNATIONS FOR THE VARIOUS AEC BOARDS. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same technique, expose the film and develop it. Measure the O.D. The desired value should have been previously recorded in a copy of table 3D-1. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the desired value, adjust the gain pot (as per step 10) to increase or decrease the density, then repeat the previous two steps. Change the SID to 40 in. (100 cm) and repeat steps 11 to 13. Adjust the gain pot if necessary to achieve an acceptable compromise between both SIDs. Verify the O.D. at a range of different kVs. USE OF TWO FILM SCREENS (ONE FOR EACH SID) USING ONE PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED FILM SCREEN AND ONE UNCALIBRATED FILM SCREEN Select the wall bucky image receptor via the selector configured for the 40 in. (100 cm) SID. Repeat steps 1 to 13 at the 40 in. (100 cm) SID position using the appropriate previously calibrated film screen.
1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7.
8. 9.
10.
11. 12. 13. 14. 14.
15. 16.
Page 3D-42
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc. 3D.11.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) Cont Step 17. 18. 19. 20.
AEC Calibration
3D
21.
Action Verify the O.D. at a range of different kVs. Switch the generator OFF. Re-enter the programming mode as detailed in the TABLE BUCKY AEC calibration section. Select the wall Bucky image receptor via the selector configured for the 72 in. (180 cm) SID. Calibrate the film screen assigned to this SID as per the table Bucky procedure. The calibration pot is NOT to be adjusted during this procedure (this was calibrated in the preceding procedure). All breakpoints, including the 75 kV knee breakpoint, are to be calibrated by adjusting the calibration numbers ONLY. When complete, exit the AEC CALIBRATION and GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
3D.12.0 AEC CALIBRATION (AUX, SFD, ETC) The remaining image receptors are calibrated in a similar manner to the table Bucky receptor. Only the gain pot for that channel is to be adjusted at the slowest film screen used on that receptor. DO NOT READJUST THE GAIN POT FOR PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED RECEPTORS, AND DO NOT READJUST THE CALIBRATION VALUES IN THE AEC CALIBRATION MENU FOR PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED FILM SCREENS. Refer to 3D.4.0 if a PMT is to be used for AEC during digital acquisition or spot film work. THE MEMORY FUNCTION THAT WAS TEMPORARILY CHANGED TO OFF EARLIER IN THIS CHAPTER MAY NOW BE RESET TO THE DESIRED VALUE.
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-43
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
Page 3D-44
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
Acceptance Testing
CHAPTER 4 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

CONTENTS:
4.1.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................ 4-1 4.2.0 REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT FOR GENERATOR VERIFICATION. ........................................................ 4-2 4.3.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (BASIC FUNCTIONS) .............................................................................................. 4-3 4.3.1 Console Rad Tests..................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.3.2 Console Fluoro Tests ................................................................................................................................. 4-4 4.3.3 Generator Preliminary Tests ...................................................................................................................... 4-5 4.3.4 Low Speed Starter Verification................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.3.5 Dual Speed Starter Verification .................................................................................................................. 4-8 4.4.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (KVP, TIME, MA AND MAS) ..................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.1 Generator Rad Tests.................................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.2 Generator Fluoro Tests ............................................................................................................................ 4-13 4.5.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (OPTIONAL INTERFACES) ................................................................................... 4-15 4.6.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (AEC)...................................................................................................................... 4-15 4.7.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (ABS)......................................................................................................................4-15 4.8.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (DAP)......................................................................................................................4-15 4.9.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (HVL, LINEARITY AND REPRODUCIBILITY) ....................................................... 4-16
4.1.0
INTRODUCTION This section details acceptance testing, which verifies that the generator is performing within limits. It is recommended that this be done whenever the generator is reconfigured, or component(s) are replaced which may affect the X-ray output. Examples of such components are the X-ray tube, HT tank, generator CPU board, generator interface board, AEC board, control board 1 and control board 2 in the HF power supply (Millenia) or the control board (Indico 100), and the filament supply board(s).
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-1
Acceptance Testing
CPI Canada Inc.
WARNING:
1. USE EXTREME CARE IN MEASURING HIGH VOLTAGES. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT MAY CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH. 2. EVEN WITH THE GENERATOR SWITCHED OFF AT THE CONSOLE, (OR THE LOCKOUT SWITCH INSIDE THE MAIN CABINET LOCKED OUT), MAINS VOLTAGE IS STILL PRESENT INSIDE THE GENERATOR CABINET. THIS VOLTAGE IS EXTREMELY DANGEROUS; USE EXTREME CAUTION. 3. THE ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS, LOCATED ON THE BASE OF THE HF POWER SUPPLY, PRESENT A HAZARD FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF. VERIFY THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE SERVICING OR TOUCHING ANY PARTS.
WARNING:
THE PROCEDURES IN THIS CHAPTER REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF X-RAYS. TAKE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.
WARNING:
1. ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE EQUIPMENT UNDER TEST AND ALL ASSOCIATED TEST EQUIPMENT IS PROPERLY GROUNDED. 2. ENSURE THAT THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES ARE INTACT / UNDAMAGED AND PROPERLY CONNECTED BEFORE ATTEMPTING EXPOSURES.
ENSURE THAT THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE COMPLETED PRIOR TO PERFORMING THE ACCEPTANCE TESTING: The generator is interfaced to room equipment noted in the product description / compatibility statement. The tube auto calibration has been done as per chapter 2 of this manual. The receptors have been programmed as per chapter 3C of this manual. If the installation has AEC, verify that all receptors have been calibrated as per chapter 3D of this manual. If the installation has ABS, verify that the imaging system has been calibrated as per chapter 3E of this manual. Acceptance testing shall only be started after the installation is complete i.e.; generator in final position and installed as per the previous chapters of this manual.
4.2.0
REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT FOR GENERATOR VERIFICATION. kV measuring device such as a Dynalyzer (or equivalent). This will be required for verifying kV and mA calibration during preventative maintenance or if recalibration is necessary, for example after replacing the generator CPU board or control board 1 in the HF power supply. See note on page 11 regarding use of a Dynalyzer on Indico 100 generators. Storage oscilloscope. mA / mAs meter. Radiation meter 0-1000 mR and 1-15 R/min. Lead diaphragm or equivalent to collimate the beam. General purpose DVM. Strobe or reed tachometer. Current probe 0 to 20 amps AC. A set of HVL filters. Calculator.
Page 4-2
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-08
CPI Canada Inc. 4.3.0 4.3.1 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (BASIC FUNCTIONS) Console Rad Tests
Acceptance Testing
For the touch screen console, check the console functionality by pressing the equivalent switch position on the touch screen for the functions described in section 4.3.1 and 4.3.2. Verify the correct response on the touch screen console for each function that is tested. Step 1. 2. 3. Action Press the power ON then power OFF buttons on the console. Press power ON again to switch the unit on. Press each of the receptor buttons that are active (those that have been enabled during generator configuration). Result Check
Unit switches on and off. Unit switches on. Verify that the adjacent LED lights for each receptor. For receptor 6 on the 23 X 56 cm console (adjacent to the power ON button) only the top LED will light. Note: The TECHNIQUE / MODE SELECT button used to select AEC / mAs / mA/ms in steps 4, 5, 6 will only be functional if APR mode has been disabled during generator configuration (the TECHNIQUE SELECT function is disabled if APR mode is enabled). 4. Select an active radiographic receptor that has A: The AEC LED lights. AEC programmed. B: kV value is displayed. Press the technique select button to select C: mA value is displayed. AEC. D: AEC, mAs value or ms Verify the following displays: value is displayed depending on the AEC backup mode selected. E: Density value is displayed. 5. Press the technique select button to select A: The mAs LED lights. mAs. B: kV value is displayed. Verify the following displays: C: mAs value is displayed. 6. Press the technique select button to select A: The mA/ms LED lights. mA/ms. B: kV value is displayed. Verify the following displays: C: mA value is displayed. D: ms value is displayed. 7. kV increases if kV + is pressed. Press the kV +/- buttons. kV decreases if kV - is pressed. 8. Ensure that three-point operation is selected (mA/ms). mA increases if mA + is pressed. Press the mA +/- buttons. mA decreases if mA - is pressed. 9. Ensure that three-point operation is selected (mA/ms). ms increases if ms + is pressed. Press the ms +/- buttons. ms decreases if ms - is pressed. 10. Ensure that AEC is selected. Density increases if density + is pressed. Press the DENSITY +/- buttons. Density decreases if density - is pressed. 11. Press the focus select button. The large and small focal spot LEDs alternately light as the switch is toggled. 12. Ensure that AEC is selected. The three film-screen LEDs (I, II, Press the film-screen select button. III) alternately light as the switch is toggled.
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-3
Acceptance Testing Console Rad Tests (Cont) Step 13. 14. Action Select 60 kV, 50 mA, 100 ms. Press the PREP button. Press the X-ray button. Result The adjacent LED lights.
CPI Canada Inc.
4.3.1
Check
15.
Ensure that AEC is selected. Press the FIELD select button (23 X 56 cm console) or press the individual AEC field select buttons in sequence (all other consoles).
16.
Press the power OFF button on the console.
The X-ray warning indicator lights during an X-ray exposure, and an audible tone is heard from the console. The three field indicator LEDs light to indicate field selection [L+C+R], [R], [C], [R+C], [L], [L+R], [L+C] as the switch is toggled (23 X 56 cm console). For other consoles, the LEFT, CENTER, and RIGHT field selection LEDs should light as each field is selected. The unit switches off.
4.3.2
Console Fluoro Tests This section applies only to R&F units. BEFORE CONTINUING, ENSURE THAT THE REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL IS CONNECTED (IF USED WITH THIS INSTALLATION). Step 1. 2. Action Press the power ON button on the console. Select an active fluoro receptor. Result Unit switches on. A: The fluoro display area of the console lights. B: The remote fluoro control panel lights (if used). The dose display on the LCD display changes as the switch is toggled. A: The MAG display on the console LCD and remote fluoro display changes (IF I/I MODES IS ENABLED DURING GENERATOR CONFIGURATION) as the MAG button is toggled. B: The Mag display on the console LCD and remote fluoro display increases if MAG + button is pressed, decreases if MAG - button on the remote fluoro control is pressed (IF I/I MODES IS ENABLED DURING GENERATOR CONFIGURATION. Check
3.
Press the DOSE button.
4.
Press the MAG button on the console. Press the MAG +/- buttons on the remote fluoro control if used.
Page 4-4
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-08
CPI Canada Inc. 4.3.2 Console Fluoro Tests (Cont) Step 5. Action Press the ABS button on the console to enter ABS mode.
Acceptance Testing
6.
Press the ABS button on the remote fluoro control if used, else press the ABS button on the console. Press the fluoro kV +/- buttons on the console and remote fluoro control if used.
7.
8.
Press the fluoro mA +/- buttons on the console and remote fluoro control if used.
9.
Press the ACCUMULATED TIME button on the console. Press the ACCUMULATED TIME button on the remote fluoro control if used. Press the pulse fluoro button on the console (if the pulse fluoro option is fitted). Press the power OFF button on the console.
10.
11.
12.
Result A: The LED adjacent to the button lights. B: The LED adjacent to the ABS button on the remote fluoro control (if used) lights. The ABS indicator LEDs adjacent to the ABS buttons on the console and the remote fluoro control (if used) switch off. kV increases if kV + is pressed. kV decreases if kV - is pressed. Confirm tracking of the kV displays on the console and the remote fluoro control. mA increases if mA + is pressed. mA decreases if mA - is pressed. Confirm tracking of the mA displays on the console and the remote fluoro control. The accumulated time indicator will light, then extinguish on the console as the switch is toggled. The ACC indicator will light, then extinguish on the remote fluoro control as the switch is toggled. The pulse fluoro indicator will light, then extinguish as the switch is toggled. Unit switches off.
Check
4.3.3
Generator Preliminary Tests USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN MEASURING HIGH VOLTAGES.
WARNING:
NOTE:
VERIFY THE POSITION OF EACH OF THE SWITCHES OF SW1 ON THE GENERATOR CPU BOARD FOR THE GENERATOR UNDER TEST AS PER THE FOLLOWING TABLE. THESE SWITCHES MUST BE SET CORRECTLY PRIOR TO CONTINUING. REFER TO THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION (SECTION 1D) AS NECESSARY FOR THE PRODUCT DEFINITION.
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-5
Acceptance Testing Generator Preliminary Tests (Cont)
CPI Canada Inc.
4.3.3
For GENERATOR POWER, refer to copy of the compatibility statement / product description (PD) form in Chapter 1D GENERATOR POWER SW1-3 SW1-2 SW1-1 30 kW (350 Series) ON ON OFF Millenia only ON ON OFF 32 kW (Indico 100 only) ON OFF ON 40 kW (Indico 100 only) 50 kW (650 Series) OFF ON ON 65 kW (850 Series) OFF ON OFF 80 kW (1050 Series) OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 100 kW (Indico 100 only) OFF SW1-4: OFF for two filament boards, ON for one filament board. SW1-5: OFF for 150 max kV, ON for 125 max kV. SW1-6: OFF for dual speed, ON for low speed. SW1-7: OFF for 2 tube, ON for 1 tube. SW1-8: ON. Do not inadvertently switch this to OFF! Setting to OFF resets to the factory defaults (calibration, configuration, etc).
Step 1. 2.
Action Ensure unit is switched OFF. Press the power ON button on the console.
Result DS1 on generator interface board is lit. One or more LEDs on the driver/auxiliary board in HF power supply are lit. Millenia generators only. The generator will not switch on with the switch in the lockout position.
Check
3.
4.
5.
Switch OFF the console. Switch the NORMAL/LOCKOUT switch on the generator interface board to LOCKOUT. Switch the console ON. Switch the NORMAL/LOCKOUT switch to the NORMAL position. Switch the console ON. Verify that each active receptor (those that have been enabled during generator configuration) displays the desired X-ray tube on the LCD display.
The unit switches on. Receptor 1 Tube # _____ Receptor 2 Tube # _____ Receptor 3 Tube # _____ Receptor 4 Tube # _____ Receptor 5 Tube # _____ Receptor 6 Tube # _____
Page 4-6
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-08
CPI Canada Inc. 4.3.3 Generator Preliminary Tests (Cont) 6. Verify that each active receptor selects the desired AEC channel. This must be done by measuring the voltage at specified pins on the AEC board edge connector. Logic low (approx. 1 VDC) means CHANNEL ENABLED, logic high (approx. 11.5 VDC) means CHANNEL DISABLED. Refer to figure 4-1 for pin assignments on the AEC board: CHANNEL 1 = PIN 8 CHANNEL 2 = PIN 7 CHANNEL 3 = PIN 6 CHANNEL 4 = PIN 5 Switch OFF the console.
Acceptance Testing
7.
Receptor 1 Ch # _______ Receptor 2 Ch # _______ Receptor 3 Ch # _______ Receptor 4 Ch # _______ Receptor 5 Ch # _______ Receptor 6 Ch # _______ N/A
Figure 4-1: AEC board pin assignments
THE MILLENIA AND INDICO 100 FAMILY OF GENERATORS ARE FITTED WITH A LOW SPEED STARTER, OR OPTIONAL DUAL SPEED STARTER. USE SECTION 4.3.4 OR 4.3.5, AS APPLICABLE, FOR YOUR GENERATOR.
4.3.4
Low Speed Starter Verification Step 1. Action Result Connect a current probe to the common lead of tube 1. A 60 Hz waveform dropping to Switch ON the console. less than half amplitude after Press and hold the PREP button. prep complete. Measure the rotor boost time. Should be approximately 1.5 sec. Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify that the tube(s) reach operating speed at the end of boost. Speed 3300 RPM. FOLLOW STEPS 4 TO 6 IF TUBE 2 IS USED (LOW SPEED STARTER) Check
2. 3.
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-7
Acceptance Testing Low Speed Starter Verification (Cont) 4. Connect a current probe to the common lead of tube 2. Press and hold the PREP button. Measure the rotor boost time. Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify that the tube(s) reach operating speed at the end of boost. Switch OFF the console.
CPI Canada Inc.
4.3.4
5. 6.
A 60 Hz waveform dropping to less than half amplitude after prep complete. Should be approximately 1.5 sec. Speed 3300 RPM. N/A
7.
4.3.5
Dual Speed Starter Verification From the product description, be sure the actual tube being used is correctly selected at the dual speed starter. Refer to the dual speed starter table in chapter 2. Tube 1 selection verified _______ Tube 2 selection verified _______ THE GENERATOR MUST BE PROGRAMMED FOR DUAL SPEED STARTER OPERATION IN ORDER TO BE ABLE TO VERIFY BOTH MODES OF OPERATION IN THIS SECTION. ***** PLEASE OBSERVE A MAXIMUM OF 2 HIGH SPEED BOOSTS PER MINUTE ***** Step 1. Action Connect a current probe to the common lead of tube 1. Switch ON the console. Select 70 kVp, minimum mA, 50 ms. Press and hold the PREP button. Measure the rotor boost time. Result Check
2.
3.
4.
Select 100 kVp, maximum mA, 50 ms, small focus. Press and hold the PREP button. Measure the rotor boost time.
A 60 Hz waveform dropping to less than half amplitude after prep complete. Should agree with the value in the dual speed starter table in chapter 2. A 180 Hz waveform dropping to less than half amplitude after prep complete. Should agree with the value in the dual speed starter table in chapter 2.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify that the tube(s) reach operating speed at end of boost. Use the techniques in steps 1 and 3 to select low and high-speed modes Low Speed 3300 RPM. respectively. High Speed 9500 RPM. After a high-speed prep, verify that the Will hear the X-ray tube slow dynamic brake is applied. down to 60 Hz. FOLLOW STEPS 7 TO 12 IF TUBE 2 IS USED (DUAL SPEED STARTER) Connect a current probe to the common lead of tube 2. A 60 Hz waveform dropping to Select 70 kVp, minimum mA, 50 ms. less than half amplitude after Press and hold the PREP button. prep complete. Measure the rotor boost time. Should agree with the value in the dual speed starter table in chapter 2.
Page 4-8
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-08
CPI Canada Inc. 4.3.5 Dual Speed Starter Verification (Cont) Step 9. Action Select 100 kVp, maximum mA, 50 ms, small focus. Press and hold the PREP button. Measure the rotor boost time.
Acceptance Testing
10.
Result A 180 Hz waveform dropping to less than half amplitude after prep complete. Should agree with the value in the dual speed starter table in chapter 2.
Check
11.
12. 13.
Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify that the tube(s) reach operating speed at end of boost. Use the techniques in steps 7 and 9 to select low and high-speed modes respectively. After a high-speed prep, verify that the dynamic brake is applied. Switch OFF the console
Low Speed 3300 RPM. High Speed 9500 RPM. Will hear the X-ray tube slow down to 60 Hz. N/A
4.4.0 4.4.1
ACCEPTANCE TESTS (KVP, TIME, MA AND MAS) Generator Rad Tests Measurement of kVp, mA, and time may be done via test points at the generator CPU board as per figure 4-2. These are direct feedback voltages and are scaled to represent the actual kVp and X-ray tube current AS LONG AS THE GENERATOR IS CALIBRATED. REFER TO NOTES ON PAGE 11.
NOTE:
TEST EQUIPMENT TOLERANCES MUST BE ALLOWED FOR IN THE MEASUREMENTS IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS. LIMITS STATED ARE THE MAXIMUM ALLOWED LIMITS, INCLUDING EQUIPMENT TOLERANCES AND MEASUREMENT ERROR.
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-9
Acceptance Testing Generator Rad Tests (Cont)
CPI Canada Inc.
4.4.1
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
TP8 TP6 TP7 TP9 TP11 TP13 TP10 TP12 TP14 TP15 TP24 TP25 TP22 TP23
TP16 TP17 TP18 TP19 TP20
TP21
FILE: ML_CPU1.CDR
KVP RAD mA AEC RAMP
- +
TP6 TP7
TP8 TP10 TP12 TP14 TP15
1VOLT = 20 KV 1 VOLT = 100 mA
TP9
- + - +
FLUORO mA TP11 - + TP13 + ABS
1 VOLT = 2.5 mA
THE SCALING FACTORS LISTED ABOVE ARE NOMINAL VALUES. NOTE: THIS DIAGRAM IS TYPICAL, ACTUAL GENERATOR CPU BOARDS MAY DIFFER IN DETAIL
Figure 4-2: Test point locations
Page 4-10
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-08
CPI Canada Inc. 4.4.1 Generator Rad Tests (Cont)
Acceptance Testing
CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING TESTS REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF APPROPRIATE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL.
X-RADIATION.
USE
NOTE:
IF USING TEST POINTS TP6 & 8, TP7 & 10, TP11 & 14 IN FIGURE 4-2 FOR ACCEPTANCE TESTING, THE SCALING FACTORS SHOWN MUST BE VERIFIED USING AN APPROPRIATE CALIBRATED REFERENCE STANDARD. THE ACTUAL MEASURED SCALING VALUES SHOULD THEN BE USED IN THIS PROCEDURE.
A DYNALYZER IS NOT RECOMMENDED FOR MA MEASUREMENTS WITH INDICO 100 GENERATORS. BANDWIDTH LIMITATIONS OF THE DYNALYZER WILL RESULT IN INACCURATE MA MEASUREMENTS AT MA VALUES LESS THAN APPROXIMATELY 100 MA. MA MEASUREMENTS SHOULD BE MADE WITH AN MA / MAS METER CONNECTED TO THE MA TEST JACKS ON THE HT TANK. EXPOSURE TIMES MUST BE GREATER THAN 100 MS TO ENSURE ACCURATE MEASUREMENTS.
NOTE:
Refer to figure 4-2 for test point locations referenced in the following section(s). Step 1. Action SEE NOTE ABOVE RE USE OF TEST POINTS FOR VERIFYING CALIBRATION Connect scope probe channel 1 input to TP6 and TP8 (kVp) Connect scope probe channel 2 input to TP7 and TP10 (Rad mA). Adjust scope gains as required. Use the KV signal to trigger the scope. Switch ON the generator and after initialization select the following radiographic technique: kVp = 100, mA = 100, Time = 50 ms Select an off-table receptor. Make an exposure and measure the kVp at TP6 and TP8 and the Rad mA at TP7 and TP10. Using scaling factors in figure 4-2, verify the following results: Repeat step 3 but set the values to kVp = 65, mA = 200. Result N/A Check
2.
N/A
3.
4.
kVp = 100 KV 3%. mA = 100 mA 4% (Millenia). mA = 100 mA 5% (Indico 100). Time = 50 ms 2 ms. kVp = 65 KV 3%. mA = 200 mA 4% (Millenia). mA = 200 mA 5% (Indico 100). Time = 50 ms 2 ms.
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-11
Acceptance Testing Generator Rad Tests (Cont) Step 5. Action Repeat step 3 but set the values to kVp = 125, mA = 200.
CPI Canada Inc.
4.4.1
Result kVp = 125 KV 3%. mA = 200 mA 4% (Millenia). mA = 200 mA 4% (Indico 100). Time = 50 ms 2 ms.
Check
6.
Select 75 kVp, 200 mA. Select the exposure times shown below (3 point operation). (Measure time and mA on the scope and check that their product is as per the RESULT column). Measure time at 75% of the peak kVp waveform. A: 10 ms (2 mAs) B: 20 ms (4 mAs) C: 63 ms (12 mAs) D: 100 ms (20 mAs) Select 75 kVp. Select the mAs shown below (2 point operation). Measure time at 75% of the peak kVp waveform. A: 2 mAs 5%. B: 4 mAs 5%. C: 12 mAs 5%. D: 20 mAs 5%. NOTE: The time associated with each mAs setting will vary depending on generator configuration. Use the time displayed in the LCD window as the reference for the measurements below. time per LCD disp (2% + 1ms). time per LCD disp (2% + 1ms). time per LCD disp (2% + 1ms). time per LCD disp (2% + 1ms).
7.
8.
A: 2 mAs (time per LCD display) B: 8 mAs (time per LCD display) C: 25 mAs (time per LCD display) D: 63 mAs (time per LCD display) Select 200 mA, 50 ms (3 point operation). Select the kVp values shown below. The measurements may be done noninvasively or from TP6 and TP8 using the scope. A: B: C: D: E: 50 kVp 60 kVp 80 kVp 100 kVp 125 kVp
A: B: C: D: E:
50 kVp (3% + 1 kVp). 60 kVp (3% + 1 kVp). 80 kVp (3% + 1 kVp). 100 kVp (3% + 1 kVp). 125 kVp (3% + 1 kVp).
Page 4-12
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-08
CPI Canada Inc. 4.4.1 Generator Rad Tests (Cont) Step 9. Action Select 75 kVp, 50 ms (3 point operation). Select the mA values shown below. Measure mA at 75% of the peak kVp waveform. A: B: C: D: E: 50 mA 100 mA 200 mA 400 mA 800 mA A: B: C: D: E: Result
Acceptance Testing
Check
50 mA (5% + 1 mA). 100 mA (5% + 1 mA). 200 mA (5% + 1 mA). 400 mA (5% + 1 mA). 800 mA (5% + 1 mA).
Note: The higher mA values will not be available on all generator models and / or programmed tube types.
4.4.2
Generator Fluoro Tests This section applies only to R&F units. Step 1. Action Place the generator into the fluoro mode of operation. Connect scope probe channel 1 input to TP6 and TP8 (kVp). Connect scope probe channel 2 input to TP11 and TP14 (fluoro mA). Use the kV signal to trigger the scope. Place imaging system into non-ABS mode or cover the I.I. input with lead. Set 3 mA fluoro. Select the kV values shown below using the remote fluoro control if fitted, or the fluoro section of the console. Result N/A Check
2. 3.
N/A
A: B: C: D: E:
50 KV 65 KV 80 KV 100 KV 110 KV
A: B: C: D: E:
50 kVp (10% + 1 kVp). 65 kVp (5% + 1 kVp). 80 kVp (5% + 1 kVp). 100 kVp (5% + 1 kVp). 110 kVp (5% + 1 kVp).
Measure the kVp at TP6 and TP8. Using scaling factors in figure 4-2 verify kV values per the RESULTS column:
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-13
Acceptance Testing Generator Fluoro Tests (Cont) Step 4. Action Select 70 kVp fluoro. Select the fluoro mA values shown below: A: B: C: D: 1.0 mA 2.0 mA 4.0 mA 6.0 mA A: B: C: D: Result
CPI Canada Inc.
4.4.2
Check
1.0 mA 20%. 2.0 mA 20%. 4.0 mA 15%. 6.0 mA 15%.
5. 6.
Measure the fluoro mA at TP11 and TP14. Using scaling factors in figure 4-2 verify mA values per the RESULTS column: Press the PPS + and - buttons (if the pulse fluoro option is fitted). Run a sufficiently long fluoro exposure to accumulate some time on the console fluoro display, and on the remote fluoro control if used Press the ZERO button on the console and on the remote fluoro control if applicable.
Verify that the pulsed fluoro rate increases and decreases.
Verify that the accumulated time is reset to zero after pressing each of the ZERO buttons.
Page 4-14
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-08
CPI Canada Inc. 4.5.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (OPTIONAL INTERFACES)
Acceptance Testing
Refer to separate supplements in this manual for further information IF APPLICABLE.
4.6.0
ACCEPTANCE TESTS (AEC) This section applies only to generators with AEC. Review Section 3D: AEC Calibration. Recheck the mAs, Dose, and O.D. as recorded during initial installation. Follow the appropriate steps in section 3D to verify the AEC calibration.
4.7.0
ACCEPTANCE TESTS (ABS) This section applies only to non-digital R&F generators with ABS. Review section 3E: ABS calibration. Recheck the dose limits and input dose as described in the procedure.
4.8.0
ACCEPTANCE TESTS (DAP) This section applies only to Indico 100 X-ray generators with DAP. Review Section 3F: DAP SETUP AND CALIBRATION. Follow the appropriate steps in section 3F to verify the DAP calibration.
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-15
Acceptance Testing
CPI Canada Inc.
4.9.0
ACCEPTANCE TESTS (HVL, LINEARITY AND REPRODUCIBILITY) The procedure for performing reproducibility, linearity and HVL testing is contained in a separate document, part number 740917 that immediately follows this page.
Page 4-16
Rev. J
Ch # 740904-08
CPI Canada Inc.
Troubleshooting
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING
CONTENTS:
SECTION TITLE 5.1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................... 5-1 5.2.0 STATUS AND ERROR CODES (NON-TOUCH SCREEN).................................................................................... 5-2 5.2.1 Operator Messages (Non-Touch Screen) .......................................................................................................... 5-2 5.2.2 Limit Messages (Non-Touch Screen)................................................................................................................. 5-2 5.2.3 Error Messages (Non-Touch Screen) ................................................................................................................ 5-3 5.3.0 STATUS AND ERROR CODES (TOUCH SCREEN) ........................................................................................... 5-10 5.3.1 Operator Messages (Touch Screen)................................................................................................................ 5-10 5.3.2 Limit Messages (Touch Screen)....................................................................................................................... 5-10 5.3.3 Error Messages (Touch Screen) ...................................................................................................................... 5-11 5.4.0 MISCELLANEOUS FAULTS ................................................................................................................................ 5-18 5.4.1 Erratic Console Faults ...................................................................................................................................... 5-18
5.1.0
INTRODUCTION The Millenia and Indico 100 console will display status messages on the LCD display during normal and abnormal operation of the generator. This chapter contains tables of those messages and suggests actions to be taken by service personnel to correct any malfunctions that may occur. Section 5.2.0 details status and error messages for generators with the standard (non-touch screen console). Refer to section 5.3 for status and error messages for the touch screen console.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-09
Rev. G
Page 5-1
Troubleshooting STATUS AND ERROR CODES (NON-TOUCH SCREEN) Operator Messages (Non-Touch Screen) These messages indicate the status of the generator. No action is required. MESSAGE INITIALIZATION SPINNING ROTOR X-RAY READY X-RAY ON DAP NOT READY
CPI Canada Inc.
5.2.0 5.2.1
DESCRIPTION Displayed during power up sequence. Displayed when prep state is active. Displayed when generator is ready to expose Displayed during both a rad and fluoro exposure. The optional DAP (Indico 100 only) is in its warm up state, and not ready to make DAP measurements.
5.2.2
Limit Messages (Non-Touch Screen) These messages indicate that an exposure has been requested that exceeds one or more limits. MESSAGE TUBE KV LIMIT GEN KV LIMIT TUBE MA LIMIT GEN MA LIMIT TUBE KW LIMIT GEN KW LIMIT TUBE MAS LIMIT GEN MAS LIMIT GEN MS LIMIT CAL LIMIT PROBLEM Requested kV not allowed as tube kV limit has been reached. Requested kV not allowed as generator kV limit has been reached. Requested mA not allowed as tube mA limit has been reached. Requested mA not allowed as generator mA limit has been reached. Requested parameter not allowed as tube kW limit has been reached. Requested parameter not allowed as generator kW limit has been reached. Requested mAs not allowed as tube mAs limit has been reached. Requested mAs not allowed as generator mAs limit has been reached. Requested ms not allowed as generator ms limit has been reached. Requested parameter not calibrated. ACTION None. None. None. None. None. None. None. None. None. Recalibrate X-ray tube or select a calibrated parameter. Select another density or program requested density step. Wait for anode to cool. Reset fluoro timer. Select valid parameter.
AEC DENSITY LIM
Requested density not programmed.
ANODE HEAT WARN FL TIMER WARN INVALID PARAM
Anode has exceeded programmed warning level. Fluoro interval timer 5.0 mins. Generator detected invalid parameter within received message, message ignored.
Page 5-2
Rev. G
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc. 5.2.2 Limit Messages (Cont) HOUSE HEAT WARN GEN DUTY WARNING X-ray tube housing heat has exceeded housing warning limit. The generator has reached its duty cycle warning limit.
Troubleshooting
DAP ACCUM WARN DAP RATE WARN
The accumulated DAP value has reached the programmed DAP limit. The current DAP rate exceeds the programmed DAP rate limit.
Wait for housing to cool. Re-evaluate technique factors. Allow generator to cool if possible. If exposures are continued, serious generator damage may result due to overheating. Reset the DAP. Reduce the dose.
5.2.3
Error Messages (Non-Touch Screen) These messages indicate that an error has occurred. The errors are logged in the error log, previous errors should be reviewed by service personnel before taking further action. ERROR CODE MESSAGE APR MEMORY ERROR GEN EPROM ERR PROBLEM APR data has been corrupted. Generator CPU EPROM has been corrupted. Generator CPU NVRAM data has been corrupted. ACTION See note 1 near end of this section. Call product support for new generator CPU EPROM. Re-initialize generator CPU NVRAM using generator factory defaults. Reset time and date. Call product support. Power unit off and retry rotor start.
E001
E003
GEN NVRAM ERR
E004 E005 E006
GEN RTC ERROR PS CONTACT ERR ROTOR FAULT
Generator CPU real time clock is not functioning. Main contactor in HF power supply did not energize. 1. Rotor starter may have detected a current fault in the stator. 2. Power supply was not ready to start rotor. Power supply has detected filament current <2 amps.
E007
FILAMENT FAULT
1. Check for open filament in X-ray tube. 2. Check for poor connections in the cathode cable. 3. Check fuses on filament board(s).
Rev. G
Page 5-3
Troubleshooting Error Messages (Cont) ERROR CODE E008 MESSAGE KV/MA FAULT PROBLEM Power supply has detected a fault in the kV or mA output during an exposure and immediately terminated the exposure. This may be caused by arcing in the Xray tube, arcing of the HV cables, or HT tank.
CPI Canada Inc.
5.2.3
E009 E011
PS NOT READY HIGH MA FAULT
E012
LOW MA FAULT
E013
MANUAL TERMIN
Power supply is not ready to make an exposure. Generator CPU detected mA greater than allowed tolerance. Generator CPU detected mA less than allowed tolerance. Operator released exposure switch during exposure.
ACTION 1. If arcing of the Xray tube is suspected, check condition of tube. The X-ray tube may be damaged or simply require seasoning. Refer to chapter 6 for tube seasoning procedure. 2. If failure of HT tank is suspected, contact product support. Retry exposure. Recalibrate X-ray tube. * Recalibrate X-ray tube. * 1. Re-take exposure if necessary. 2. Check for faulty switch contacts or wiring. 1. Check exposure technique settings. 2. Check that correct AEC chamber is energized. 1. Check exposure technique settings. 2. Check that correct AEC chamber is energized. 1. Check exposure technique settings. 2. Increase tomo back up time if necessary.
E014
AEC BUT ERROR
AEC exposure exceeded allowed back up time.
E015
AEC BU MAS ERR
AEC exposure exceeded allowed back up mAs.
E016
TOMO BUT ERROR
Tomo exposure exceeded back up time.
Page 5-4
Rev. G
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc. 5.2.3 Error Messages (Cont) ERROR CODE E017 E018 E019 MESSAGE NOT CALIBRATED PREP TIMEOUT ANODE HEAT LIMIT PROBLEM Selected mA not calibrated for selected kV. Generator has been in prep state too long. Selected parameters will cause X-ray tube to exceed its programmed anode heat limit. X-ray tube # 1 too hot and its thermal switch has opened. X-ray tube # 2 too hot and its thermal switch has opened. Door is open. Collimator is not ready. Generator did not receive a Bucky contact closure in a reasonable time after start of Rad expose state. II safety is not ready. Spare input is not ready. Prep input active during power on initialization phase. X-ray input active during power on initialization phase. Fluoro input active during power on initialization phase. Communication error detected with remote fluoro control unit.
Troubleshooting
ACTION Recalibrate X-ray tube. Reduce length of time in prep state. Reduce parameters or wait for tube to cool. Wait for X-ray tube # 1 to cool. Wait for X-ray tube # 2 to cool. Close door. Check collimator. Check for grid movement and drive signal to Bucky. Check II safety. Check spare input. Check prep switch and input for short circuit. Check X-ray switch and input for short circuit. Check fluoro switch and input for short circuit. 1. Check remote fluoro control cable for damage and proper connection. 2. Turn power off and then on to Reset Generator. 1. Check console cable for damage and proper connection. 2. Turn power off and then on to reset generator. Replace lithium battery.
E020
THERMAL INT #1
E021
THERMAL INT #2
E022 E023 E024
DOOR INTERLOCK COLLIMATOR ERR CASSETTE ERROR
E025 E026 E028
II SAFETY INT SPARE INT PREP SW CLOSED
E029
X-RAY SW CLOSED
E030
FLUORO SW CLOSED
E031
REMOTE COMM ERR
E032
CONSOLE COMM ERR
Generator has detected error in communication to console.
E033
GEN BATTERY LOW
Generator detects lithium battery voltage is low.
Rev. G
Page 5-5
Troubleshooting Error Messages (Cont) ERROR CODE E034 E035 E036 E037 E038 E039 MESSAGE +12VDC ERROR -12VDC ERROR +15VDC ERROR -15VDC ERROR CAL DATA ERROR AEC DATA ERROR PROBLEM +12VDC rail is out of tolerance. -12VDC rail is out of tolerance. +15VDC rail is out of tolerance. -15VDC rail is out of tolerance. Generator detects corrupt calibration data. Generator detects corrupt AEC data. Generator detects corrupt Fluoro data. Generator detects corrupt receptor data. Generator detects corrupt tube data. KV detected in non x-ray state.
CPI Canada Inc.
5.2.3
ACTION Check +12VDC rail. Check -12VDC rail. Check +15VDC rail. Check -15VDC rail. Re-calibrate X-ray tube(s). Reprogram AEC data or set factory defaults. Reprogram fluoro data or set factory defaults. Reprogram receptor data or set factory defaults. Reprogram tube data or set factory defaults. Switch OFF generator. Prevent further use of generator. Call product support. Reset error.
E040
FLUORO DATA ERROR
E041
REC DATA ERROR
E042
TUBE DATA ERR
E043
KV ERROR
E044
COMM ERROR
E045
NOT SUPPORTED
E046
MODE INHIBITED
E047 E048
FL TIMER LIMIT FOCUS MISMATCH
Received communication message not valid and ignored. Received message valid, but not supported by this system. Received message valid, but not allowed during present state. Fluoro Timer has exceeded time limit. Focus selected does not match current focus enabled by power supply.
Reset error.
Reset error.
Reset Fluoro timer. Check power supply interface cables between power supply and generator CPU board. Reprogram to enable function.
E049
NOT ENABLED
Requested function not programmed to be enabled.
Page 5-6
Rev. G
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc. 5.2.3 Error Messages (Cont) ERROR CODE E050 MESSAGE GEN DATA ERROR PROBLEM Generator detects corrupt generator limit data. Generator has detected no feedback signal from AEC device.
Troubleshooting
E051
AEC DEVICE ERR
E052
HIGH SF CURRENT
E053
HIGH LF CURRENT
E054
AEC OUT OF RANGE
Generator detects small focus filament current greater than limits in standby mode. Generator detects large focus filament current greater than limits in standby mode. AEC reference has reached a maximum or minimum limit.
ACTION Reprogram generator limit data or set factory defaults. 1. Check that X-ray tube is pointing at correct AEC device. 2. Check AEC cable for damage and proper connection. Check small focus filament board.
Check large focus filament board.
E055 E056 E057
NO FIELDS ACTIVE NO TUBE SELECTED AEC STOP ERROR
AEC enabled but no fields are selected. All Receptors have no X-ray tube programmed. AEC stop signal (P.T. stop signal) is active low indicating exposure is finished during prep state.
Re-adjust AEC calibration including density to operate within AEC range (O to 1OVDC). Select AEC field(s). Program receptor(s) with tube number. 1. Check that P.T. ramp does not exceed P.T. reference during prep state. 2. Check AEC device for proper operation. Call product support.
E058
CONSOLE BUT ERR
E059
HOUSE HEAT LIMIT
Console has detected exposure exceeded backup time and terminated exposure. X-ray tube housing has exceeded limit.
Wait for tube to cool.
Rev. G
Page 5-7
Troubleshooting Error Messages (Cont) ERROR CODE E060 MESSAGE EXP KV HIGH PROBLEM KV exceeds high KV tolerance level.
CPI Canada Inc.
5.2.3
E061
EXP KV LOW
KV exceeds low KV tolerance level.
E062
EXP_ SW ERROR
E063
FACTORY DEFAULTS
The EXP_SW signal on the generator Interface and generator CPU board is enabled when it should be disabled. SW1 switch 8 on the generator CPU board is set to default the generator CPU NVRAM with factory defaults.
ACTION 1. Check the output of the kV reference DAC on the generator CPU board. 2. Measure the output of the generator with a dynalyzer or a non-invasive kVp meter. 1. Check the output of the kV reference DAC on the generator CPU board. 2. Measure the output of the generator with a dynalyzer or a non-invasive kVp meter. Call product support.
E066
NO SYNC PULSE
Pulsed fluoro has been requested, but no sync pulse is present.
E070
SOFTWARE KEY ERR
E071
DAP OVERFLOW
Defective or missing GAL U29 on generator CPU board 734573. The accumulated DAP value exceeds the display limit.
Set SW1 switch 8 to its non default position. The generator will not exit the initialization phase until this switch is set. 1. Check that the imaging system is active, and cables are connected properly. 2. Check JW22 on the generator interface board. Call product support for new GAL U29. Reset the DAP.
Page 5-8
Rev. G
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc. 5.2.3 Error Messages (Cont) ERROR CODE E072 MESSAGE DAP DEVICE ERROR PROBLEM The DAP device is not functional.
Troubleshooting
E073 E100
DAP DATA ERROR CAL_MAX MA ERR
The DAP configuration data is corrupted. Maximum mA has been exceeded during auto calibration. Auto calibration has exceeded data table length due to an excessive number of exposures.
E101
CAL_DATA LIMIT
E102
CAL_MAX FIL ERR
Maximum filament current for the selected focus has been exceeded.
E103
CAL_MAN TERM
E104
CAL_NO MA
Operator released exposure button during auto calibration. No mA feedback detected during auto calibration.
ACTION 1. Check the DAP wiring. 2. Check the DAP interface board. Reset factory defaults. Repeat auto calibration and/or decrease standby current. 1. Check to see if the filament standby current is too low. 2. Retry auto calibration. 1. Check to see if the maximum filament current limit can be increased. 2. Retry auto calibration. Retry auto Calibration. Check power supply Interface cables between HF power supply and generator CPU board. Reduce filament standby current on primary and/or secondary filament.
E105
CAL_MIN MA ERR
Minimum generator mA was exceeded at start of calibration. This is usually caused by too high a filament standby current on the primary and or secondary filament. (Primary is the current filament being calibrated, secondary is the other filament and applies only to generators with two independent filament supplies).
Rev. G
Page 5-9
Troubleshooting STATUS AND ERROR CODES (TOUCH SCREEN) Operator Messages (Touch Screen) These messages indicate the status of the generator. No action is required. MESSAGE Generator Ready Unable to establish generator communication. Communication with generator reestablished
CPI Canada Inc.
5.3.0 5.3.1
DESCRIPTION Indicates that the generator is ready to make an exposure. Indicates that the console is unable to communicate with the generator. Ensure that the generator is switched on, and that the console cable is properly connected to J2 on the rear of the console. Indicates that the console has re-established communication with the generator.
5.3.2
Limit Messages (Touch Screen) These messages indicate that an exposure has been requested that exceeds one or more limits. MESSAGE Anode warning level exceeded Calibration limit: selected parameter not calibrated. Deselect tomo table Fluoro timer warning level exceeded Generator AEC density limit PROBLEM Anode has exceeded programmed warning level. Requested parameter not calibrated. ACTION Wait for the anode to cool. Recalibrate X-ray tube or select a calibrated parameter. Deselect the tomo receptor. Reset fluoro timer. Select another density or program requested density step. Re-evaluate technique factors. Allow generator to cool if possible. If exposures are continued, serious generator damage may result due to overheating. None. None. None. None. None.
Request operator to deselect tomo table. Fluoro interval timer 5.0 mins. Requested density not programmed.
Generator duty cycle warning
The X-ray generator has reached its duty cycle warning limit.
Generator kV limit Generator kW limit Generator mA limit Generator mAs limit Generator ms limit
Requested kV not allowed as generator kV limit has been reached. Requested parameter not allowed as generator kW limit has been reached. Requested mA not allowed as generator mA limit has been reached. Requested mAs not allowed as generator mAs limit has been reached. Requested ms not allowed as generator ms limit has been reached.
Page 5-10
Rev. G
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc. 5.3.2 Limit Messages (Cont) MESSAGE Generator PPS limit Invalid communication parameter Select tomo table. Tube housing heat warning Tube kV limit Tube kW limit Tube mA limit Tube mAs limit PROBLEM Generator PPS limit has been reached. Generator detected invalid parameter within received message, message ignored. Request operator to select tomo table. X-ray tube housing heat has exceeded housing warning limit. Requested kV not allowed as tube kV limit has been reached. Requested parameter not allowed as tube kW limit has been reached. Requested mA not allowed as tube mA limit has been reached. Requested mAs not allowed as tube mAs limit has been reached.
Troubleshooting
ACTION None. Select valid parameter. Select the tomo receptor Wait for the tube housing to cool. None. None. None. None.
5.3.3
Error Messages (Touch Screen) These messages indicate that an error has occurred. The errors are logged in the error log, previous errors should be reviewed by service personnel before taking further action.
ERROR CODE E001
MESSAGE Generator CPU EPROM checksum error Generator CPU NVRAM error
PROBLEM Generator CPU EPROM has been corrupted. Generator CPU NVRAM data has been corrupted.
E003
E004 E005 E006
Generator CPU Real Time Clock error. Main Contactor Error Rotor Fault
Generator CPU real time clock is not functioning. Main contactor in HF power supply did not energize. 1. Rotor starter may have detected a current fault in the stator. 2. Power supply was not ready to start rotor.
ACTION Call product support for new generator CPU EPROM. Re-initialize generator CPU NVRAM using generator factory defaults. Reset time and date. Call product support. Power unit off and retry rotor start.
Rev. G
Page 5-11
Troubleshooting Error Messages (Cont) ERROR CODE E007 MESSAGE Filament Fault PROBLEM Power supply has detected filament current <2 amps.
CPI Canada Inc.
5.3.3
E008
mA Fault
Power supply has detected a fault in the kV or mA output during an exposure and immediately terminated the exposure. This may be caused by arcing in the Xray tube, arcing of the HV cables, or HT tank.
E009 E011
Power Supply Not Ready MA During Exposure Too High MA During Exposure Too Low Manually Terminated Exposure
E012
E013
Power supply is not ready to make an exposure. Generator CPU detected mA greater than allowed tolerance. Generator CPU detected mA less than allowed tolerance. Operator released exposure switch during exposure.
ACTION 1. Check for open filament in X-ray tube. 2. Check for poor connections in the cathode cable. 3. Check fuses on filament board(s). 1. If arcing of the Xray tube is suspected, check condition of tube. The X-ray tube may be damaged or simply require seasoning. Refer to chapter 6 for tube seasoning procedure. 2. If failure of HT tank is suspected, contact product support. Retry exposure. Recalibrate X-ray tube. * Recalibrate X-ray tube. * 1. Re-take exposure if necessary. 2. Check for faulty switch contacts or wiring. 1. Check exposure technique settings. 2. Check that correct AEC chamber is energized.
E014
AEC Back-up Timer Exposure Terminated
AEC exposure exceeded allowed back up time.
Page 5-12
Rev. G
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc. 5.3.3 Error Messages (Cont) ERROR CODE E015 MESSAGE AEC mAs Exceeded Exposure Terminated PROBLEM AEC exposure exceeded allowed back up mAs.
Troubleshooting
E016
Tomo Back-up Timer Exposure Terminated
Tomo exposure exceeded back up time.
E017 E018 E019
Uncalibrated Exposure Parameter Preparation Timeout Anode Heat Limit
E020
Thermal Switch Interlock #1 Error Thermal Switch Interlock #2 Error Door Interlock Collimator Interlock Error Cassette Interlock Error
E021
E022 E023 E024
E025 E026 E027
E028
Image Intensifier Safety Interlock Error Spare Input Interlock Error Receptor Timeout Error Receptor did not respond within the timeout period Prep Input Active During Initialization Phase X-Ray Input Active During Initialization Phase Fluoro Input Active During Initialization Phase
Selected mA not calibrated for selected kV. Generator has been in prep state too long. Selected parameters will cause X-ray tube to exceed its programmed anode heat limit. X-ray tube # 1 too hot and its thermal switch has opened. X-ray tube # 2 too hot and its thermal switch has opened. Door is open. Collimator is not ready. Generator did not receive a Bucky contact closure in a reasonable time after start of Rad expose state. II safety is not ready. Spare input is not ready. The receptor is not responding Prep input active during power on initialization phase. X-ray input active during power on initialization phase. Fluoro input active during power on initialization phase.
ACTION 1. Check exposure technique settings. 2. Check that correct AEC chamber is energized. 1. Check exposure technique settings. 2. Increase tomo back up time if necessary. Recalibrate X-ray tube. Reduce length of time in prep state. Reduce parameters or wait for tube to cool. Wait for X-ray tube # 1 to cool. Wait for X-ray tube # 2 to cool. Close door. Check collimator. Check for grid movement and drive signal to Bucky. Check II safety. Check spare input. Wait for receptor to be ready, then retry exposure. Check prep switch and input for short circuit. Check X-ray switch and input for short circuit. Check fluoro switch and input for short circuit.
E029
E030
Rev. G
Page 5-13
Troubleshooting Error Messages (Cont) ERROR CODE E031 MESSAGE Remote Fluoro Communication Error PROBLEM Communication error detected with remote fluoro control unit.
CPI Canada Inc.
5.3.3
E032
Console Communication Error
Generator has detected error in communication to console.
E033 E034 E035 E036 E037 E038 E039
Warning Lithium Battery Voltage Low +12VDC Error -12VDC Error +15VDC Error -15VDC Error Calibration Data Corrupt Error AEC Data Corrupt
Generator detects lithium battery voltage is low. +12VDC rail is out of tolerance. -12VDC rail is out of tolerance. +15VDC rail is out of tolerance. -15VDC rail is out of tolerance. Generator detects corrupt calibration data. Generator detects corrupt AEC data. Generator detects corrupt Fluoro data. Generator detects corrupt receptor data. Generator detects corrupt tube data. KV detected in non x-ray state.
ACTION 1. Check remote fluoro control cable for damage and proper connection. 2. Turn power off and then on to Reset Generator. 1. Check console cable for damage and proper connection. 2. Turn power off and then on to reset generator. Replace lithium battery. Check +12VDC rail. Check -12VDC rail. Check +15VDC rail. Check -15VDC rail. Re-calibrate X-ray tube(s). Reprogram AEC data or set factory defaults. Reprogram fluoro data or set factory defaults. Reprogram receptor data or set factory defaults. Reprogram tube data or set factory defaults. Switch OFF generator. Prevent further use of generator. Call product support. Reset error.
E040
Fluoro Data Corrupt
E041
Receptor Data Corrupt
E042
Tube Data Corrupt
E043
High Voltage Error - kV detected in non X-ray state
E044
Invalid Communication Message
Received communication message not valid and ignored.
Page 5-14
Rev. G
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc. 5.3.3 Error Messages (Cont) ERROR CODE E045 MESSAGE Communication Message Not Supported Mode Inhibited PROBLEM Received message valid, but not supported by this system. Received message valid, but not allowed during present state. Fluoro Timer has exceeded time limit. Focus selected does not match current focus enabled by power supply.
Troubleshooting
ACTION Reset error.
E046
Reset error.
E047 E048
Fluoro Timer Limit Focus mismatch error
Reset Fluoro timer. Check power supply interface cables between power supply and generator CPU board. Reprogram to enable function. Reprogram generator limit data or set factory defaults. 1. Check that X-ray tube is pointing at correct AEC device. 2. Check AEC cable for damage and proper connection. Check small focus filament board.
E049 E050
Not Enabled Generator Limit Data Corrupt AEC Feedback Error (No Feedback Signal Detected)
Requested function not programmed to be enabled. Generator detects corrupt generator limit data. Generator has detected no feedback signal from AEC device.
E051
E052
High Small focus filament current error in standby
E053
High Large focus filament current error in standby
E054
AEC Reference out of range
Generator detects small focus filament current greater than limits in standby mode. Generator detects large focus filament current greater than limits in standby mode. AEC reference has reached a maximum or minimum limit.
Check large focus filament board.
E055 E056
No fields selected in AEC Receptor Disabled
AEC enabled but no fields are selected. All Receptors have no X-ray tube programmed.
Re-adjust AEC calibration including density to operate within AEC range (O to 1OVDC). Select AEC field(s). Program receptor(s) with tube number.
Rev. G
Page 5-15
Troubleshooting Error Messages (Cont) ERROR CODE E057 MESSAGE AEC Stop Signal In Wrong State PROBLEM AEC stop signal (P.T. stop signal) is active low indicating exposure is finished during prep state.
CPI Canada Inc.
5.3.3
E058
Console Back-up Timer
E059 E060
Housing Heat Limit Exceeded High kV Error
Console has detected exposure exceeded backup time and terminated exposure. X-ray tube housing has exceeded limit. KV exceeds high KV tolerance level.
ACTION 1. Check that P.T. ramp does not exceed P.T. reference during prep state. 2. Check AEC device for proper operation. Call product support.
Wait for tube to cool. 1. Check the output of the kV reference DAC on the generator CPU board. 2. Measure the output of the generator with a dynalyzer or a non-invasive kVp meter. 1. Check the output of the kV reference DAC on the generator CPU board. 2. Measure the output of the generator with a dynalyzer or a non-invasive kVp meter. Call product support.
E061
Low kV Error
KV exceeds low KV tolerance level.
E062
EXP_SW Signal Active in Standby State
E063
Factory Defaults Set
The EXP_SW signal on the generator Interface and generator CPU board is enabled when it should be disabled. SW1 switch 8 on the generator CPU board is set to default the generator CPU NVRAM with factory defaults.
Set SW1 switch 8 to its non default position. The generator will not exit the initialization phase until this switch is set.
Page 5-16
Rev. G
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc. 5.3.3 Error Messages (Cont) ERROR CODE E066 MESSAGE No Sync Signal PROBLEM Pulsed fluoro has been requested, but no sync pulse is present.
Troubleshooting
E067
Power Supply Duty Cycle Limit
Power supply duty cycle limit exceeded.
E070
Generator software key error DAP overflow error
E071
E072
DAP device error
Defective or missing GAL U29 on generator CPU board 734573. The accumulated DAP value exceeds the display limit. The DAP device is not functional.
ACTION 1. Check that the imaging system is active, and cables are connected properly. 2. Check JW22 on the generator interface board. Re-evaluate technique factors. Allow generator to cool if possible. If exposures are continued, serious generator damage may result due to overheating. Call product support for new GAL U29. Reset the DAP.
E073 E100
DAP data error Calibration Error - Maximum mA Exceeded
The DAP configuration data is corrupted. Maximum mA has been exceed during auto calibration. Auto calibration has exceeded data table length due to an excessive number of exposures.
E101
Calibration Error Calibration Data Table Exceeded
E102
Calibration Error - Maximum Filament Current Exceeded
Maximum filament current for the selected focus has been exceeded.
E103
Calibration Error - Manually Terminated
Operator released exposure button during auto calibration.
1. Check the DAP wiring. 2. Check the DAP interface board. Reset factory defaults. Repeat auto calibration and/or decrease standby current. 1. Check to see if the filament standby current is too low. 2. Retry auto calibration. 1. Check to see if the maximum filament current limit can be increased. 2. Retry auto calibration. Retry auto Calibration.
Rev. G
Page 5-17
Troubleshooting Error Messages (Cont) ERROR CODE E104 MESSAGE Calibration Error - No mA PROBLEM No mA feedback detected during auto calibration.
CPI Canada Inc.
5.3.3
E105
Calibration Error - Minimum mA Not Calibrated
Minimum generator mA was exceeded at start of calibration. This is usually caused by too high a filament standby current on the primary and or secondary filament. (Primary is the current filament being calibrated, secondary is the other filament and applies only to generators with two independent filament supplies).
ACTION Check power supply Interface cables between HF power supply and generator CPU board. Reduce filament standby current on primary and/or secondary filament.
The generator purges the existing X-ray tube auto calibration data before starting the auto calibration routine and saving new calibration data. Therefore, auto calibration should be a last resort during general troubleshooting, and should only be done to recalibrate the tube. For example, if a low mA fault is presented, you should ensure that the generator is fully functional, and actually needs recalibration. If calibration is attempted on a partially functional generator, the auto calibration routine may be aborted before any calibration is done, and the generator will inhibit further exposures until the selected mA is calibrated for the selected kV.
1.
For an APR MEMORY ERROR fault, the console factory defaults must be restored or the APR must be restored via GenWare. The procedure for resetting console factory defaults is described in chapter 6.
5.4.0 5.4.1
MISCELLANEOUS FAULTS Erratic Console Faults SYMPTOM: In some environments that are electrically noisy, the console may exhibit erratic faults i.e. RAM data error, intermittent loss of communication, or random fault messages may be displayed. SOLUTION: Connect a separate ground wire, #14 AWG (2.3 mm2) or larger from the ground stud on the rear of the console (marked CONSOLE GROUND in the figure rear of control console in chapter 2) to the ground stud located to the left of the main input fuse block. This is marked GROUND in the figure generator mains connection in chapter 2.
Page 5-18
Rev. G
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc
Regular Maintenance
CHAPTER 6 REGULAR MAINTENANCE

CONTENTS:
Section Title 6.1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................... 6-2 6.2.0 X-RAY GENERATOR UPDATE/SERVICE RECORD............................................................................................ 6-2 6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE................................................................................................................................. 6-2 6.4.0 OIL FILL/LEVEL CHECK (HT TANK) ..................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.4.1 Millenia Oil Fill/Level Check ............................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.4.2 Indico 100 Oil Fill/Level Check ........................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.5.0 CLEANING ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-6 6.6.0 EPROM REPLACEMENT / SOFTWARE UPGRADE ............................................................................................ 6-6 6.6.1 Console Software / EPROM............................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.6.2 Power EPROM ................................................................................................................................................... 6-7 6.6.3 Dual Speed Starter EPROM (If fitted) ................................................................................................................ 6-7 6.6.4 Resetting Factory Defaults ................................................................................................................................. 6-7 6.7.0 SOFTWARE KEY INSTALLATION / REPLACEMENT........................................................................................... 6-9 6.8.0 BATTERY REPLACEMENT ................................................................................................................................. 6-10 6.9.0 TUBE CONDITIONING / SEASONING ................................................................................................................ 6-10 6.9.1 Tube Conditioning (Overview).......................................................................................................................... 6-10 6.9.2 Tube Conditioning (Procedure) ........................................................................................................................ 6-11 6.10.0 END OF PRODUCT LIFE................................................................................................................................... 6-12
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-1
Regular Maintenance INTRODUCTION
CPI Canada Inc
6.1.0
This chapter of the manual provides a recommended schedule for periodic maintenance of the Millenia and Indico 100 family of generators. NOTE: REFERENCES IN THIS SECTION TO CONSOLE SERVICING (CONSOLE EPROM REPLACEMENT, SETTING CONSOLE CPU FACTORY DEFAULTS, CONSOLE BATTERY REPLACEMENT, ETC) DO NOT APPLY TO THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE. THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE IS NOT FIELD SERVICEABLE, PLEASE CONTACT THE FACTORY FOR SERVICE.
6.2.0
X-RAY GENERATOR UPDATE/SERVICE RECORD The X-ray generator update / service record is stored in the upper cabinet of the generator (Millenia) or on the back of the panel which accesses the control boards in the lower cabinet (Indico 100). The installation date and location should be recorded on this form at the time of the original site installation. Service and repairs must be recorded in the update / service record. The record should be as thorough as possible, detailing the scope and type of work that was performed (all service and a record of all replacement parts that were installed). Additionally, the person performing the work should date and sign the record. This information will be invaluable in the future for traceability and to ensure continued compatibility of the generator.
6.3.0
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE MAINTENANCE IS TO BE PERFORMED ONLY BY COMPETENT, TRAINED PERSONNEL WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH THE POTENTIAL HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT.
WARNING:
NOTE:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE FREQUENCY MAY BE DETERMINED BY CERTAIN REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS OF THE COUNTRY OR STATE IN WHICH THE INSTALLATION IS LOCATED. ALWAYS CHECK THE LOCAL CODES AND REGULATIONS WHEN DETERMINING A MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.
WARNING: ALWAYS SWITCH OFF MAINS POWER TO THE GENERATOR AND WAIT A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE BEGINNING ANY PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE, INCLUDING CLEANING.
WARNING: OBSERVE ESD PRECAUTIONS. KEEP ALL STATIC - SENSITIVE COMPONENTS AND CIRCUIT BOARDS IN THEIR STATIC - SHIELDING PACKAGING UNTIL READY TO INSTALL. ENSURE THAT YOU ARE GROUNDED AT ALL TIMES WHEN HANDLING STATIC - SENSITIVE COMPONENTS AND CIRCUIT BOARDS.
Page 6-2
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-10
CPI Canada Inc 6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (Cont) Maintenance Frequency As governed by local regulations. Every 6 Months AND whenever a related certifiable X-ray component is replaced: Description of Preventative Maintenance Check and recalibrate the DAP meter in the generator. 1.
Regular Maintenance
Clean and re-grease all HV connections using vapour proof compound. Clean the control console, remote fluoro control (if used) and main cabinet as needed. REFER TO 6.5.0 CLEANING BEFORE PROCEEDING Perform the X-ray tube auto calibration routine, refer to chapter 2. Verify the calibration of the generator; refer to chapter 4 of this manual. Test the X-ray tube thermal switch circuits in the generator. Disconnect the tube thermal switch(s) and verify the correct error message, and that X-ray exposures are inhibited. For fan cooled Indico 100 generators in particular, remove accumulated dust from the cooling vents. Vacuuming is recommended. Perform any additional tests required by laws governing this installation. Examine the following for any visible damage and replace any damaged components: The exterior of the control console and remote fluoro control if used, including the membrane switch assembly. The cable between the control console and the generator main cabinet and between the remote fluoro control (if used) and generator main cabinet. The hand switch and fluoro footswitch (if used) and the cables connecting these to the console. Open the generator cabinet and examine the unit for any visible damage: missing or loose ground connections, oil leaks, damaged cables etc. Ensure that there are no obstructions blocking any of the ventilation holes or louvers on the generator cabinet. Replace the lithium battery on the CPU board in the control console and on the generator CPU board in the main cabinet. Refer to the spares list in chapter 8 for the required part number. Refer to subsection 6.7.0 for battery replacement procedure.
2.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7. Every 12 months: 1.
2.
3. Every 5 years:
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-3
Regular Maintenance OIL FILL/LEVEL CHECK (HT TANK)
CPI Canada Inc
6.4.0
The insulating oil level in the HT transformer does NOT require periodic checking under normal conditions. However, if there is evidence of possible oil loss, the procedure for checking the correct oil level follows. Refer to 6.4.1 for Millenia generators, and to 6.4.2 for Indico 100 generators. 6.4.1 Millenia Oil Fill/Level Check 1. 2. Using a suitable wrench, remove the oil fill cap on top of the HT transformer. Measure the oil level from the TOP surface of the oil fill flange using a clean ruler. The oil level should be in the range of 7/8 (22 mm) to 1 3/8 (35 mm) from the top of the flange. Add oil if the oil level is low, that is greater than 1 3/8 (35 mm) from the top. Use only fresh oil, type Shell DIALA AX or equivalent. Take care not to damage delicate components inside the tank if using a funnel for oil fill. Replace the oil filler cap and tighten when finished. Wipe up any oil spills. Dispose of soiled absorber in compliance with government requirements and ensure conformity to local disposal regulations.
3.
4.
Figure 6-1: Millenia HT tank oil fill
Page 6-4
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-10
CPI Canada Inc 6.4.2 Indico 100 Oil Fill/Level Check 1. 2. 3. Loosen the oil fill plug screw on the Indico 100 tank lid. With the screw sufficiently loosened, remove the rubber (neoprene) plug.
Regular Maintenance
Use a clean ruler, strip of cardboard, or other equivalent material to determine the oil level -measured always from the TOP surface of the HT tanks lid. Normally the oil level should be between 0.88 - 1.25 inches (22 - 32 mm) from the top of the tank lid. If the oil level is between 1.25 - 1.6 inches (32 - 41 mm) from the top of the tank lid, then clean oil should be added as needed. If the oil level is greater than 1.6 inches (41 mm) below the top of the tank lid, please consult the factory.
Figure 6-2: HT tank oil level
4.
Use only fresh oil, type Shell DIALA AX or equivalent. It is critical that air is not added when topping up the oil. The following procedure is strongly recommended when adding oil. Use a new clean syringe to remove oil from the container. A 60 cc catheter tip syringe is recommended. Approximately 60 cc of oil is required to raise the oil level by one millimeter. Turn the syringe upright and expel any trapped air. Place the tip of the syringe through the oil-fill plug and into the oil, ensuring that it is below the surface of the oil. Gently eject the oil from the syringe into the HT tank, while making sure that the tip of the syringe remains below the surface of the oil until all of the oil is emptied from the syringe. Repeat the previous steps until the required amount of oil has been added.
5.
Replace the oil fill plug. Once the plug is installed and the screw properly seated, tighten the screw 4 turns. This will secure the oil fill plug. Wipe up any oil spills. Dispose of soiled absorber in compliance with government requirements and ensure conformity to local disposal regulations. THE OIL DOES NOT CONTAIN PCBs.
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-5
Regular Maintenance CLEANING
CPI Canada Inc
6.5.0
Never use anything other than soap and water to clean plastic surfaces. Other cleaners may damage the plastic. Never use any corrosive, solvent or abrasive detergents or polishes. Ensure that no water or other liquid can enter any equipment. This precaution prevents short circuits and corrosion forming on components. Methods of disinfection used must conform to legal regulations and guidelines regarding disinfection and explosion protection. If disinfectants are used which form explosive mixtures of gases, these gases must have dissipated before switching on the equipment again. Disinfection by spraying is not recommended because the disinfectant may enter the X-ray equipment. If room disinfection is done with an atomizer, it is recommended that the equipment be switched OFF, allowed to cool down and covered with a plastic sheet. When the disinfectant mist has subsided, the plastic sheet may be removed and the equipment be disinfected by wiping.
6.6.0
EPROM REPLACEMENT / SOFTWARE UPGRADE PLEASE TAKE APPROPRIATE ELECTROSTATIC PRECAUTIONS AT ALL TIMES WHEN HANDLING THE EPROMs.
WARNING:
6.6.1
Console Software / EPROM 1. Console software for the 23 X 56 cm console and for the Rad-only console resides in an EPROM. When the software for these consoles needs to be field upgraded, a replacement EPROM will be supplied. Console software for the 31 X 42 cm console initially resides in flash memory on the console board. The console software will be field upgraded by one of the following methods: The flash memory may be reprogrammed in the field if the required hardware is available (a suitable computer, a flash loader, and the proper cables). For details, please consult the factory. Alternatively, an EPROM may be supplied containing the updated software. Continue with the following steps if upgrading the software via an EPROM. With the generator mains power switched OFF, open the console to gain access to the console EPROM. Refer to chapter 2, the section CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE, for the procedure to access the console CPU board. Locate and carefully remove the existing EPROM on the console CPU board (refer to figure 1E-4). This does not apply if the console software currently resides in flash memory as described in step 2. Carefully insert the replacement EPROM into the socket observing the orientation per figure 1E-4. For Indico 100 with the 31 X 42 cm console: Ensure that JW1 on the console board is set to the EPROM BOOT position in order to run the updated software on EPROM. Refer to figure 1E-4. This jumper is initially set to the FLASH BOOT position in order to boot from flash memory. JW1 on the console board must be set to the FLASH BOOT position in order to run existing or upgraded console software from flash memory. Re-assemble the console as per the procedure in chapter 2. Refer to 6.6.4 before re-energizing the generator.
2.
3.
4. 5. 6.
7. 8.
Page 6-6
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-10
CPI Canada Inc 6.6.2 Power EPROM 1. 2.
Regular Maintenance
With the generator mains power switched OFF, locate and carefully remove the existing power EPROM on the generator CPU board (U38 or U41, refer to figure 1E-1). Carefully insert the replacement EPROM into the socket observing the orientation per figure 1E-1. NOTE THAT THE REPLACEMENT EPROM MAY HAVE FOUR LESS PINS THAN THE SOCKET IT IS TO BE INSERTED INTO. IF THIS IS SO, THE EMPTY PINS MUST BE ON THE PIN 1 SIDE OF THE EPROM AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 1E-1. Refer to 6.6.4 before re-energizing the generator.
3.
6.6.3
Dual Speed Starter EPROM (If fitted) 1. Switch the generator mains power OFF, AND WAIT 5 MINUTES FOR THE DC BUS CAPACITORS TO FULLY DISCHARGE. STEPS 2 AND 3 APPLY TO MILLENIA GENERATORS ONLY. IN INDICO 100 GENERATORS, THE DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD IS FULLY ACCESSIBLE WITH THE APPROPRIATE GENERATOR SIDE PANEL(S) REMOVED. 2. Loosen the two nuts securing the clamping bracket at the top of the dual speed starter. Slide the bracket up and gently remove the dual speed starter assembly. The cables connected to the dual speed starter do not need to be removed in order to change the EPROM. Carefully rotate the dual speed starter chassis to fully expose the dual speed starter board inside the unit. Locate and carefully remove the existing EPROM on the dual speed starter board (U26, refer to figure 1E-6). Carefully insert the replacement EPROM into the socket observing the orientation per figure 1E-6. Reinstall the dual speed starter assembly by reversing steps 2 and 3 (Millenia).
3. 4. 5. 6.
6.6.4
Resetting Factory Defaults If the part number (not revision) of the replacement EPROM is different from the EPROM being replaced, then the FACTORY DEFAULT procedure(s) must be performed as detailed below. This will initialize the CPUs NVRAM as required by the new software and sets the data to its factory-configured state. Note that there are separate procedures for the console CPU board and for the generator CPU board. For Indico 100 with the 31 X 42 cm console, the console software is initially programmed into flash memory on the console board. If the console software needs to be field-upgraded, an EPROM may be supplied containing the updated software. As noted above, if the part number (not revision) of the replacement firmware is different from that being replaced, then the FACTORY DEFAULT procedure(s) must be performed as detailed below. The part number and revision of the software in flash memory is displayed at the password screen, below the message ENTER PASSWORD: _____, when initially entering into programming mode. This is only displayed if running the software from flash memory. Refer to the section EPROM REPLACEMENT, Console EPROM for details regarding the use of flash memory vs. EPROM.
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-7
Regular Maintenance Resetting Factory Defaults (Cont) CONSOLE CPU FACTORY DEFAULTS: 31 X 42 CM CONSOLE USING AN EPROM AND 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE: 1. 2. 3.
CPI Canada Inc
6.6.4
With the power OFF, set switch 8 of SW1 on the console CPU board to its ON position. Power ON the generator. The console will prompt for a YES or NO to loading defaults for two conditions (console settings and APR memory). Select YES to both. Power OFF the console. Reset switch 8 of SW1 on the console CPU board to its OFF position.
This will initialize both the CONSOLE settings (refer to CONSOLE settings in chapter 3C) and the APR to the factory default settings.
31 X 42 CM CONSOLE USING FLASH MEMORY AND RAD-ONLY CONSOLE: 1. 2. 3. 4. In chapter 3C, refer to LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS. This is in the UTILITY menu, under the CONSOLE submenu. Set LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS to YES. Select << and EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu. Select EXIT again to return to the GENERATOR SETUP menu. Briefly switch the generator OFF, and then ON again. The console will prompt for a YES or NO to loading defaults when it is powered on again. Select YES to both prompts to reset the console and APR defaults. This will initialize both the CONSOLE settings (refer to CONSOLE settings in chapter 3C) and the APR to the factory default settings.
5.
The LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS setting automatically resets to NO the next time the generator is switched on.
GENERATOR CPU FACTORY DEFAULTS: 1. 2. 3. With the power OFF, set switch 8 of SW1 on the generator CPU board to its OFF position. Power ON the generator. After the initialization is complete, the console will display the message FACTORY DEFAULTS. Power OFF the generator. Reset switch 8 of SW1 on the generator CPU board to its ON position.
This will initialize all generator data to the factory defaults (tube selection, generator limits, receptor setup, I/O configuration, AEC setup, AEC calibration, fluoro setup, tube calibration, time & date, error log and statistics).
Page 6-8
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-10
CPI Canada Inc 6.7.0 SOFTWARE KEY INSTALLATION / REPLACEMENT
Regular Maintenance
WARNING:
PLEASE TAKE APPROPRIATE ELECTROSTATIC PRECAUTIONS AT ALL TIMES WHEN HANDLING THE SOFTWARE KEY I.C.
This feature is available on Indico 100 generators only. The software key activates specific options in the Indico 100 X-ray generator, and may need to be installed to add certain options, or may need to be replaced if it is desired to alter the current configuration of the generator. To install or replace the software key follow the procedure below. 1. 2. 3. 4. With the generator mains power switched OFF, locate the socket for the software key, U29, on the generator CPU board. Refer to figure 6-3. Remove the existing I.C. U29, if fitted. The original I.C. should be placed in anti-static packaging, and may be set aside for future use in a generator that requires the options that are activated by that I.C. Carefully insert the replacement software key into the U29 socket observing the orientation per figure 6-3. Perform setup and calibration, if required, of the new features that have been activated by the new software key. Refer to the applicable sections of the service manual.
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
U29
EPROM U41
FILE: ML_CPU2.CDR
Figure 6-3: Software key location and orientation
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-9
Regular Maintenance BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CPI Canada Inc
6.8.0
To replace the battery on the console CPU board or on the generator CPU board, follow the procedure below. Refer to the figure showing the location of these batteries in chapter 2, in the section CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE. Refer to that section in chapter 2 for console disassembly instructions to gain access to the console CPU board if required. NOTE: THE CONSOLE BATTERY SHOULD BE REPLACED WITH THE GENERATOR POWERED UP. THIS WILL PREVENT THE CONSOLE DATA FROM BEING LOST WHEN THE BATTERIES ARE REMOVED. THIS IS THE ONLY EXCEPTION TO THE RULE OF NOT SERVICING THE GENERATOR WHILE THE POWER IS ON. FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE LOCATIONS AND HAZARDS BEFORE REPLACING THIS BATTERY.
1.
Remove the battery from the holder by gently prying under the battery at the access slot in the battery holder using a small screwdriver. Slide the battery over the edge of the holder and remove it when it is free. Check the voltage of the new battery prior to inserting it. This should be nominally 3.0V, do not use if it is under 2.80 V. Wipe the replacement battery with a clean cloth, and ensure that the holder is clean and free of debris before inserting the battery. Gently lift the spring contact on the holder and insert the replacement battery positive (+) side up
2.
3.
4.
6.9.0
TUBE CONDITIONING / SEASONING Tube conditioning or seasoning is particularly important for new tubes or tubes that have not been used for several days. This should be performed on each X-ray tube before attempting auto calibration, as an unseasoned tube may not operate properly at higher kV values without arcing. Refer to the X-ray tube manufacturers instructions, if available, for the tube conditioning or seasoning procedure. If the X-ray tube manufacturers instructions are not available, the following procedure may be used:
6.9.1
Tube Conditioning (Overview) The generator does X-ray tube auto calibration at 50 kV, 60 kV, 70 kV, 80 kV, 100 kV and 120 kV. The tube normally needs to be seasoned before it can be operated at the higher voltages encountered during auto calibration. Tube seasoning is started by auto calibrating the kV stations up to and including part of the 70 kV station. The tube is then seasoned at 70 kV. Progressively higher kV stations are then auto calibrated and seasoned. Finally the entire kV and mA range is auto calibrated, then the tube is seasoned at the remaining high kV values. Manually releasing the exposure button during auto calibration of a particular kV station in the following procedure prevents the generator from attempting operation beyond that kV/mA value.
NOTE:
THE TUBE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDED SEASONING PROCEDURE, IF AVAILABLE, MUST ALWAYS BE USED IN PLACE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE.
Page 6-10
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-10
CPI Canada Inc 6.9.1 NOTE: Tube Conditioning (Overview) Cont
Regular Maintenance
LOW SPEED ONLY EXPOSURES ARE RECOMMENDED FOR THE SEASONING EXPOSURES, TO PREVENT EXCESSIVE HEAT BUILD-UP IN THE HOUSING FROM THE STATOR WINDINGS OR THE ROTOR BEARINGS. X-ray tubes that have not been used for more than 8 hours may suffer thermal shock if operated at high mA and kV without a warm-up procedure. A cold anode (Molybdenum) is very brittle and when suddenly heated over a small area may experience thermal cracking of the anode surface, eventually leading to permanent tube damage.
6.9.2
Tube Conditioning (Procedure) X-ray tube seasoning should be done on LARGE focus in order to minimize tube wear. The procedure below is intended for seasoning an X-ray tube prior to attempting tube auto calibration. To season a tube that does not need to be calibrated, simply follow steps 2, 4, 6, 8, and 9. 1. 2. Start the tube auto calibration sequence, and manually terminate the exposure at 70 kV and 250 mA. Season the tube at 70 kV by taking approximately 10 exposures of 200 mA and 100 ms. These exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds. Restart the auto calibration sequence and manually terminate the exposure at 100 kV and 250 mA. Season the tube at 100 kV by taking approximately 5 exposures of 200 mA and 100 ms. These exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds. Restart the auto calibration sequence and manually terminate the exposure at 120 kV and 160 mA. Season the tube at 120 kV by taking approximately 5 exposures of 160 mA and 100 ms. These exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds. Restart the auto calibration sequence and allow the auto calibration sequence to complete. Season the tube at 130 kV by taking approximately 5 exposures of 100 mA and 50 ms. These exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds. Repeat step 8 at 140 kV, and then at 145 kV.
3. 4.
5. 6.
7. 8.
9.
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-11
Regular Maintenance
CPI Canada Inc
6.10.0 END OF PRODUCT LIFE If the generator has completed its useful service life, local environmental regulations must be complied with in regard to disposal of possible hazardous materials used in the construction of the generator. In order to assist with this determination, the noteworthy materials used in the construction of this generator are itemized below: ITEM Electrical insulating oil in HT tank. This is a mineral oil with trace additives (60 Litre (17 U.S. gal) for Millenia, 25 Litre (6.5 U.S. gal) for Indico 100). Solder (lead/tin). Epoxy fiberglass circuit board materials, tracks are solder on copper. Wire, tinned copper. Insulated with PVC, tefzel, or silicone. Steel and / or aluminum (generator cabinet and console chassis). Plastic (console enclosure and console membrane). Electrical and electronic components: ICs, transistors, diodes, resistors, capacitors, etc.
WARNING:
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE, INCINERATE, OR SHORT-CIRCUIT THE BATTERY(S) IN THIS PRODUCT. DO NOT PUT IT IN TRASH THAT IS DISPOSED OF IN LANDFILLS; DISPOSE OF IT AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL ORDINANCES. THE FLUORESCENT LAMP IN THE LCD DISPLAY CONTAINS MERCURY. DO NOT PUT IT IN TRASH THAT IS DISPOSED OF IN LANDFILLS; DISPOSE OF IT AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL ORDINANCES. THE LCD IS MADE OF GLASS. IF THE LCD BREAKS DUE TO ROUGH HANDLING OR DROPPING, AND THE INTERNAL FLUID GETS IN YOUR EYES OR ON YOUR HANDS, IMMEDIATELY WASH THE AFFECTED AREAS WITH WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES. SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IF ANY SYMPTOMS ARE PRESENT AFTER WASHING.
Page 6-12
Rev. L
Ch # 740904-10
CPI Canada Inc
Theory of Operation
CHAPTER 7 THEORY OF OPERATION

CONTENTS:
7.1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 7-2 7.2.0 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION.................................................................................................... 7-2 7.2.1 System ON (MD-0762).............................................................................................................................. 7-2 7.2.2 DC bus & power distribution (MD-0788) ................................................................................................... 7-3 7.2.3 Room interface (MD-0763)........................................................................................................................ 7-6 7.2.4 X-ray exposure Rad / fluoro (MD-0761) .................................................................................................... 7-8 7.2.5 kV control and feedback (MD-0759) ....................................................................................................... 7-10 7.2.6 Filament drive and mA control (MD-0760) .............................................................................................. 7-11 7.2.7 Low speed starter (MD-0764) ................................................................................................................. 7-14 7.2.8 Dual speed starter (MD-0765)................................................................................................................. 7-15 7.2.8 Dual speed starter (Cont) ........................................................................................................................ 7-16 7.2.9 Rad / fluoro and power mode select (MD-0786) ..................................................................................... 7-16 7.2.10 Interlocks & tube 1 / tube 2 tellback (MD-0787).................................................................................... 7-16 7.2.11 AEC (MD-0757)..................................................................................................................................... 7-17 7.2.12 ABS (MD-0758) ..................................................................................................................................... 7-20 7.2.13 Remote fluoro control (MD-0766).......................................................................................................... 7-21 7.2.14 Digital interface (MD-0767) ................................................................................................................... 7-21 7.2.15 DAP (MD-0828)..................................................................................................................................... 7-23 7.2.16 Serial communications (MD-0829)........................................................................................................ 7-24
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. J
Page 7-1
Theory of Operation INTRODUCTION
CPI Canada Inc
7.1.0
This chapter contains the theory of operation for the Indico 100 series of X-ray generators. The theory of operation is organized by functional blocks as depicted in the functional drawings in chapter 9.
7.2.0
FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION Refer to the appropriate functional block diagram in chapter 9 in conjunction with the theory of operation in this chapter. Waveforms and voltages at the pertinent test points are shown on the last page of each functional drawing.
7.2.1
System ON (MD-0762) The left side of this drawing shows the wiring from the ON and OFF switches on the console keyboard assemblies to J4-10, J4-11 and J4-12 on the generator interface board for the various Indico 100 consoles (J16-3, J16-6, J16-7 for the Rad-only console). The generator interface board on the Indico 100 X-ray generator includes power ON and OFF switches S2 and S1 that may be used to switch the generator on and off locally while working on the equipment. These switches are connected in parallel with the main generator power ON and OFF switches that are located on the console. Pressing either of the power ON switches described above turns on Q2 on the generator interface board. This turns on Q3, holding the collector of Q3 low. This latches Q2 on by holding the base of Q2 low when the ON button is released. The collector of Q3 is connected to K2 and K3 via D16. These relays will energize if S3 is in the NORMAL position when the generator is switched on. If S3 is in the LOCKOUT position, the generator cannot be inadvertently switched on. When K2 and K3 are energized, the DC rails (+5 V, +12 V, +15 V, +24 V, -12 V, -15 V, and -24 V) on the generator interface board are established, and +24 V is supplied to the console via K3 (see MD-0788, sheet 4). The generator CPU will issue a P/S ON (power supply ON) command after the +5 V rail is detected as described in 7.2.2. JW1 on the generator interface board may be jumpered such that K1 is energized only when the generator is switched on, or such that K1 is energized at all times that the AC mains to the generator is on. K1 switches the 110 and 220 VAC supplies for the room interface board, as shown on sheet 4 of MD0788. Pressing either of the OFF switches turns on Q1 on the generator interface board. This turns off Q2, turning off Q3. This will de-energize K2, K3, and / or K1 on the generator interface board, removing the DC rails from the generator interface board and removing the +24 V supply from the console. Deenergizing K1 (if applicable) will disconnect the 110 / 220 VAC supplies to the room interface board. In normal operation, J17-1 and J17-2 are joined via a wire jumper. An emergency-off switch may be connected to the generator by removing the jumper between J17-1 and J17-2, and then wiring the emergency-off switch to J17-1 and J17-2.
Page 7-2
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc 7.2.2 DC bus & power distribution (MD-0788)
Theory of Operation
Refer to MD-0788, sheet 1: Sheet 1 of MD-0788 applies to three phase units. Portions of sheet 1 are common to single phase and three phase units. Sheet 2 details the circuits that are different between single and three phase generators. Assuming that the AC mains is connected and switched on, line voltage is applied to the primary of room interface transformer T2 via F1 and F2. This will establish the 24 VDC supply via F5 and D3 on the generator interface board, as shown on sheet 4. Several seconds after the generator has been switched on as per 7.2.1, the generator CPU will issue a P/S ON (power supply ON) command, resulting in 24 VDC being applied to J5-3 and J5-4 on the auxiliary board as described under MD-0788, sheet 3. This will energize K1 and K2 on the power input board via relay K1 on the auxiliary board (K1 is shown in the normal, i.e. no soft-start fault position). With K2 on the power input board energized, line voltage is applied to power supply auxiliary transformer T1. The primary of T1, an autotransformer, supplies 120 VAC for the fans and for the tube 1 / tube 2 solenoid in the HT tank, 120 or 240 VAC for rotor boost, and 52 / 73 / 94 VAC for rotor-run as described later in this section. The secondary of T1 supplies low voltage AC to the auxiliary board as per sheet 3. When K1 on the power input board is energized, line voltage is applied to the input of D1 via soft-start current limit resistors R10 and R11, thus pre-charging the DC bus capacitors. Normal charging of the DC bus is sensed by U1 via R5 to R8, D3, R18 / R19 and R16 / R17. The emitter of U1 will rise toward +6 V as the DC bus charges. The emitter is connected to the soft-start protection circuit on the auxiliary board. If the DC bus capacitors charge normally, K1 on the auxiliary board will remain de-energized, D3 will be lit, and the soft start driver circuit (U3B, Q6, etc) will issue a contactor-closed signal after approximately 20 seconds. This will light D2 on the auxiliary board, output a logic low signal to the CPU via J5-7 of the auxiliary board to indicate that the main contactor is closed, and close the main power contactor K5 on the power input board. The line voltage will then be directly rectified by D1 to produce approximately 560 VDC for 400 V units, or approximately 670 VDC for 480 V units. This DC bus voltage is switched by the inverter board(s) to produce the drive for the primary of the HT transformers as described in 7.2.5. If U1 on the power input board does not indicate normal bus charging, the soft start protection circuit will energize K1 on the auxiliary board. This will open K1 on the power input board, but leave K2 energized via R1 / R2. De-energizing K1 on the power input board opens the soft-start charging path via R10 and R11. With K1 on the auxiliary board energized, Q6 on the auxiliary board cannot turn on. This keeps K5 on the power input board de-energized, and holds J5-7 of the auxiliary board high to indicate to the generator CPU that the main contactor is open. For R&F generators, a logic circuit (U11, Q9, etc) on the auxiliary board controls the cooling fans in the generator. During fluoroscopic operation, and for approximately 20 minutes after switching from fluoro to Rad operation, the output of the fluoro fan timer / driver circuit will be low, lighting D37 on the auxiliary board and energizing K4 on the power input board. This will supply 120 VAC to the cooling fans from T1 via F4 and K4 on the power input board. When tube 2 is selected (two tube units only), J1-6 on the auxiliary board is pulled low via the control board. This will close K3 on the power input board, supplying 120 VAC to energize the tube 1 / tube 2 solenoid in the HT tank. The tube 1 / tube 2 select signal is also taken to J2-9 on the low speed starter board as described in 7.2.7. When the generator is switched off, the loss of the DC rails on the generator interface board (which supplies the generator CPU board) will remove the drive for K1 and K2 on the power input board, causing these relays to open. Line voltage will then be removed from the power supply auxiliary transformer T1, causing loss of the DC rails on the auxiliary board. When the 12 V rail has collapsed, U2 on the power input board will turn off. This allows the DC bus discharge circuit to be biased on by R20, rapidly discharging the DC bus capacitors through R16 / R17 and R18 / R19.
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. J
Page 7-3
Theory of Operation DC bus & power distribution (Cont)
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.2
Depending on the tap settings on T1, the low speed starter boost voltage will be 120 or 240 VAC, and the run-voltage will be 52, 73, or 94 VAC. Refer to chapter 2 of the service manual for the procedure for setting these taps.
Refer to MD-0788, sheet 2: Sheet 2 of MD-0788 applies to single-phase units. The circuits that are common to single phase and three phase units are described on sheet 1. Assuming that the AC mains is connected and switched on, line voltage is applied to the primary of room interface transformer T2 via F1 and F2. This will establish the 24 VDC supply via F5 and D3 on the generator interface board, as shown on sheet 4. Several seconds after the generator has been switched on as per 7.2.1, the generator CPU will issue a generator-ON command, resulting in 24 VDC being applied to J5-3 and J5-4 on the auxiliary board as described under MD-0788, sheet 3. This will energize K1 and K2 on the power input board. With K2 on the power input board energized, line voltage is applied to power supply auxiliary transformer T1. The primary of T1, an autotransformer, supplies 120 VAC for the fans and for the tube 1 / tube 2 solenoid in the HT tank, 120 or 240 VAC for rotor boost, and 52 / 73 / 94 VAC for rotor-run as described later in this section. The secondary of T1 supplies low voltage AC to the auxiliary board as per sheet 3. When K1 on the power input board energizes, line voltage is applied to the voltage doubler circuit via soft-start current limit resistors R10 and R11, thus pre-charging the DC bus capacitors. Normal charging of the DC bus is sensed by U1 via R6 to R8, R16 to R21, D3, etc. D2 will light to indicate that U1 is energized (indicating that the DC bus is charged). The emitter of U1 will rise toward +6 V as the DC bus charges. The emitter is connected to the soft-start protection circuit on the auxiliary board, and is described on sheet 1. If the DC bus capacitors charge normally, the main contactor K5 on the power input board will close, applying the line voltage directly to the voltage doubler circuit where it is rectified and doubled to produce approximately 650 VDC. This DC bus voltage is switched by the inverter board(s) to produce the drive for the primary of the HT transformers as described in 7.2.5. If U1 on the power input board does not indicate normal bus charging, the soft start protection circuit will energize K1 on the auxiliary board, and K5 will remain de-energized as described previously The operation of the cooling fans via K4 on the power input board and the operation of the tube 1 / tube 2 solenoid via K3 is described on the previous page. The power down sequence is similar to that described on the previous page, except that single phase units do not have a rapid discharge circuit. The DC bus capacitors will discharge through bleeder resistors connected across the bus capacitors, with a time constant 5 minutes. Depending on the tap settings on T1, the low speed starter boost voltage will be 120 or 240 VAC, and the run-voltage will be 52, 73, or 94 VAC. Refer to chapter 2 of the service manual for the procedure for setting these taps.
Page 7-4
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc 7.2.2 DC bus & power distribution (Cont)
Theory of Operation
Refer to MD-0788, sheet 3: Line voltage is connected to the primary of power supply auxiliary transformer T1 when the generator is switched ON, i.e. when K2 on the power input board is energized. The DC rails on the auxiliary board will then be established (+/- 35 V via F3, F4 and D32, and +/- 12 V via F1, F2, D33, U5 and U6 which are connected in parallel, and U4). The required DC rails are then distributed to the filament supply board(s) and to the control and dual speed starter boards as shown on sheet 3. Regulators on the control board and dual speed starter board supply +5 V for those boards as shown. When the main contactor K5 on the power input board closes, J5-7 of the auxiliary board is taken low. This logic low signal is taken to the control board, where it enables the prep signal to the dual speed starter board as described in 7.2.8, and also turns on Q16 on the control board, turning on opto-coupler U9 on the generator CPU board. The output of U9, which indicates the contactor-closed status, is monitored by the CPU via U24. U9 also drives contactor-closed status LEDs DS9 / DS10, where DS9 lights to indicate that the contactor is closed. When the +5 V rail on the generator interface board is established, the generator CPU will start to function. The CPU will perform its start-up diagnostics, and then output data (bit 0) via U27, U19, and U16 to energize opto coupler U17 on the generator CPU board. This will turn on Q4, applying 15 V to J5-3 and J5-4 on the auxiliary board via current limit resistors R27 / R32 and the control board, resulting in approximately 24 VDC to close K1 and K2 on the power input board, as described earlier. DS34 / DS35 indicate the P/S ON status, where DS34 lights to indicate that the power supply is on. The tube 1 / tube 2 select signal (bit 2) is generated by the CPU, then latched and buffered by U27 and U19 on the generator CPU board. The tube 1 / tube 2 select signal is then applied to U16 and to the tube 1 / tube 2 tellback logic circuit as per 7.2.10. The output of U16 drives U7 on the control board, which inturn drives Q1. Q1 turns on when tube 2 is selected, pulling J1-6 on the auxiliary board low. This energizes K3 on the power input board as described earlier. The tube 1 / tube 2 select signal is also fed to the dual speed starter as described in 7.2.8. For continuous fluoro mode, the CPU sends data (bit 7) to data latch U27 on the generator CPU board. This is then applied to driver U16, and to DS22 / DS23 which indicate continuous fluoro (FLUORO) or Rad / pulsed fluoro (FLUORO bar) operation. The output of U16 drives opto coupler U40 on the control board, which pulls J1-5 on the auxiliary board high for Rad / pulsed fluoro operation and low for continuous fluoro operation. This high / low signal is applied to the fluoro fan timer / driver circuit (sheet 1), and to the Rad / fluoro and power mode select circuits as described in 7.2.9. When pulsed fluoro or low power Rad operation is selected, the CPU sends data (bit 3) to data latch U49. The data latch drives Q1 and DS2 / DS4 on the generator CPU board. DS2 lights to indicate low power / pulsed fluoro operation, while DS4 indicates high power Rad operation. Q1 on the generator CPU board drives opto coupler U41 on the control board, which pulls J1-3 on the auxiliary board high for PF / low power operation, and low for high power Rad mode. This signal is then applied to the fluoro fan timer / driver circuit (sheet 1), and to the Rad / fluoro and power mode select circuits as described in 7.2.9. U3C and U3D on the auxiliary board monitor the + and -12 V supplies on that board. The outputs of U3C and U3D will switch low if either of these supplies drops below predefined limits, lighting DS1 and sending a fault signal to the control board and to the driver for K1 on the low speed starter board. A soft-start fault signal is generated if the DC bus capacitors do not charge normally (SOFT START FAULT SIGNAL from the soft start driver circuit on page 1). This signal is fed to U3A on the auxiliary board, whose output will switch low if a soft-start fault exists. This is ORed together with the outputs of U3C and U3D, and has the same effect as described above for a +/-12 V fault.
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. J
Page 7-5
Theory of Operation DC bus & power distribution (Cont)
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.2
Refer to MD-0788, sheet 4: Line voltage is connected to the primary of room interface transformer T2 whenever the AC mains is connected and switched on. With the generator switched on, K2 on the generator interface board will close, establishing the DC rails on the generator interface board via F3 / F4 and D1 (+/- 24 V, + 15 V via U5, +5 V via F6 and the +5 V / +16 V power supply circuit, + 12 V via U3, -12 V via U2, and -15 V via U4). The required DC rails are then distributed to the digital I/O board, to the AEC board, to the room interface board, and to the generator CPU board, where DS33 and DS36-DS39 indicate the presence of the associated DC rails. The 24 VDC supply that is derived from D3 / C10 is used by the on / off circuit on the generator interface board (MD-0762), and is also fed to the console when the on / off circuit closes K3. Power supplies and / or voltage regulators on the console produce the required DC rails for the console circuits. Additionally, the console includes a 300 VAC power supply that drives the cold-cathode fluorescent lamp that backlights the LCD display. 110 and 220 VAC is supplied to the room interface board. The 110 / 220 VAC supplies are only present when K1 on the generator interface board is closed. K1 may be configured to be closed at all times that AC mains is supplied to the generator, or K1 may be configured to close only when the generator is switched on. Refer to 7.2.1, SYSTEM ON, for details. 24 VDC is available at J17-3 and J17-4 to drive the coil of a power distribution relay in installations with installer supplied power distribution circuits. The maximum current available from this source is 100 mA.
Refer to MD-0788, sheet 5: Sheet 5 shows the power distribution (DC rails) to the remote fluoro control, and to the Indico 100 consoles other than those shown on page 4.
7.2.3
Room interface (MD-0763) Refer to MD-0763, sheet 1: Sheet 1 shows the room interface inputs. These are shown on the left side of the drawing. Nine of the inputs energize opto couplers via 4-pin jumpers; the remaining inputs energize the associated opto coupler directly. The inputs that have a connector (JW7, JW10, JW15, etc) in series with the opto coupler(s) may be configured such that shorting the input turns on the opto coupler, or may be configured such that applying 24 VDC across the input energizes the opto coupler. The remaining inputs are only active when the inputs are shorted. For inputs with a 4-pin jumper in series with the opto coupler, the jumper must be across pins 2 and 3 of the connector if the input is a 24 VDC source. If using this configuration, observe the polarity of the 24 VDC source to ensure that the opto coupler is correctly driven. Jumper across pins 1 and 2 and pins 3 and 4 of the connector if it is desired to activate the opto coupler by shorting across that input. For the REMOTE FLUORO EXPOSURE input and the REMOTE EXPOSURE input, two or three opto couplers are connected in series. MD-0763 shows the opto coupler relevant to the room interface function. The second and / or third opto coupler is shown on MD-0761 and described in 7.2.4. One set of thermal switch inputs is available on the room interface board as shown. A second set of thermal switch inputs is available on the stator terminal block. The thermal switch inputs on the stator terminal block are routed to T1 and T2 (at R33 and R34 respectively) on the generator interface board. The generator CPU monitors the output of each opto coupler via logic circuits on the generator interface board.
Page 7-6
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc 7.2.3 Room interface (Cont)
Theory of Operation
Refer to MD-0763, sheet 2: Sheet 2 shows the room interface outputs. These are shown on the right side of the drawing. Five of the outputs may be configured to supply +24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220 VAC or to provide a dry contact closure when the output is active. Three of the outputs may be configured to supply +24 VDC or to provide a dry contact closure when the output is active, and the remaining three outputs are permanently configured to provide a dry contact closure when the output is active. When any of the outputs on the room interface board are to be made active, the generator CPU will send data to address decoders, latches, and driver circuits on the generator interface board. These circuits decode the data, and drive relays K1 to K13 on the room interface board. The contacts of each of these relays drive the room interface outputs. JW1 to JW5 may be configured such that the corresponding output is a dry relay contact by placing the jumper in the DRY position. Placing the jumper in the LIVE position will cause +24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220 VAC to be output, depending on the voltage source selected at TB11. To select the desired voltage source, a wire jumper must be connected from TB11 pins 1-5 to TB10 to select 220 VAC, to TB9 to select 110 VAC, or to TB8 to select 24 VDC. For example, if it is intended that the TOMO / BUCKY 4 SELECT output should provide 110 VAC when that output is active, JW1 must be jumpered in the LIVE position and a wire jumper must be connected from TB11-4 to one of the available positions on TB9. With JW1 to JW5 in the LIVE position, relays K1 - K4 and K6 switch the return side of the circuit. If multiple switched voltage outputs are required, jumper the desired voltage to TB11, select the DRY position on JW1 to JW5, connect the switched output to the relay output (example TB1-1 for JW1), and connect the common return directly to TB7. Relays K1 to K4 and K6 have R-C snubbers connected across the contacts to quench contact arcing when the relay opens while driving inductive loads. If the output is configured to supply 110 or 220 VAC, and the load is an opto coupler or other low-current device, sufficient AC current may flow through the snubber to energize the load when the relay is open. If this is the case, the jumper that is in series with the snubber may need to be removed. Further details on this may be found in chapter 3B. JW6 to JW8 may be configured such that the corresponding output is a dry relay contact by placing the jumper in the DRY position. Placing the jumper in the LIVE 24 VDC position will cause +24 VDC to be output. The remaining outputs (collimator bypass, room light, and mag 1 to mag 3) are permanently configured to provide dry contact closures when the output is active.
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. J
Page 7-7
Theory of Operation X-ray exposure Rad / fluoro (MD-0761)
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.4
Refer to MD-0761, sheet 1: The keyboard assembly and console board shown on sheet 1 is used on the 31 X 42 cm console. The console portion of these circuits for the other Indico 100 console types is shown on sheet 3 and 4. Pressing PREP pulls J4-7 on the generator interface board low via U25 on the console board. This turns on U15 on the generator interface board. The generator CPU monitors the output of U15 via U18 and U25, with a valid prep command being recognized when the output of U15 is low. Pressing X-ray will pull J4-8 on the generator interface board low via U26 on the console board. This will turn on U37 and U38 on the generator interface board. The generator CPU monitors the output of U37 via U18 and U25. The software will recognize a logic low at the output of U37 as a hardware X-ray request (X-ray switch pressed), and consequently will pull the emitter of U38 low via U25, U12, and U7. With the emitter of U38 held low and U38 energized, the collector of U38 will be held low. This energizes U22 on the generator interface board, turning on U46 on the generator CPU board. The generator CPU monitors the output of U46, recognizing a valid X-ray request when the output of U46 is low. DS42 on the generator CPU board will light to indicate that an X-ray request is being made. An input via the REMOTE TOMO SELECT input will energize U8 and U10 on the generator interface board (refer also to 7.2.3). The generator CPU monitors the output of U10 via U18 and U25, and recognizes a logic low at the output of U10 as a remote tomo X-ray request. When a remote tomo exposure request is received, the CPU will pull the emitter of U8 low via U25, U12, and U7. With the emitter of U8 held low and U8 energized, the collector of U8 will be held low. This turns on U22 and U46 as described above, indicating to the CPU that a valid remote tomo request is being made. A remote X-ray exposure request via the REMOTE EXPOSURE input will energize U41and U43 on the generator interface board (refer also to 7.2.3). The generator CPU monitors the output of U41 via U18 and U25, and recognizes a logic low at the output of U41 as a remote exposure request. When a remote exposure request is received, the CPU will pull the emitter of U43 low via U25, U12, and U7. With the emitter of U43 held low and U43 energized, the collector of U43 will be held low. This turns on U22 and U46 as described above, indicating to the CPU that a valid X-ray request is being made. Pressing the fluoro foot switch (if connected to the console) will pull J4-6 on the generator interface board low via U24 on the console board. This will turn on U30, U42, and U44 on the generator interface board. These same opto couplers will be energized if the fluoro foot switch is connected to the room interface board (refer to 7.2.3), and the fluoro foot switch is pressed. The generator CPU monitors the output of U30 via U18 and U25. The software will recognize a logic low at the output of U30 as a fluoroscopic X-ray request, and consequently will pull the emitter of U42 low via U25, U12, and U7. With the emitter of U42 held low and U42 energized, the collector of U42 will be held low. This turns on U22 and U46 as described above, indicating to the CPU that a valid X-ray request is being made. The generator interface board contains a last image hold circuit consisting of U44, U32, U39, C30, etc. The last image hold circuit will keep U32 energized for approximately 100 milliseconds after the fluoro foot switch has been released. The emitter of U32 will be held low by the generator CPU for the time of the last image hold setting (up to 99 ms) in the receptor setup menu (chapter 3C). This will hold the collector of U32 low, keeping U22 and U46 energized as previously described, and allowing the frame store device to complete the last image. The console CPU (U18) monitors the output of U24, U25, and U26 on the console board, recognizing a console fluoroscopic X-ray request when the output of U24 is low, a prep request when the output of U25 is low, and a console X-ray request when the output of U26 is low.
Page 7-8
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc 7.2.4 X-ray exposure Rad / fluoro (Cont)
Theory of Operation
Refer to MD-0761, sheet 2: When a prep request has been made as described on page 1, the CPU will write data to the kV enable and prep latches within U27 on the generator CPU board. The kV enable and prep commands light DS30 and DS27 on the generator CPU board when active, and drive U4 and U2 respectively on the control board via U19 and U16 on the generator CPU board. The emitter of U4 on the control board is held low when the HT tank is properly connected. If the output of U4 is high (HT tank not connected, or kV enable command not present), the ENABLE line (TP10) will be held low by the comparator circuit consisting of U11A, RN8, etc. This will hold the output of the PREP ENABLED and X-RAY REQUEST comparator circuits low via D21 and D24, inhibiting the prep and Xray functions. If the kV ENABLE command is present, the output of U4 will be low, and the kV enable line (TP10) will be high. This will reverse bias D21 and D24, allowing the PREP and X-RAY lines to be pulled high when requested. The RESET command resets kV and mA faults that are latched by circuits on the control board. Pressing the MENU / RESET button on the console toggles the kV enabled circuit, resetting the fault latches. The output of U2 on the control board will be low when PREP is active, causing the prep line (TP18) to be pulled high by the comparator circuit consisting of U11B, U10C, etc. The prep command is taken to the GENERATOR READY detector circuit and the logic OR / NOR circuits via D25. If the prep command is present, and no faults exist, the base of Q12 will be pulled low, turning on Q12, thus indicating a generator-ready condition. The prep command also initiates the boost cycle on the low speed or dual speed starter (refer to 7.2.7 and 7.2.8). When the generator CPU has received a valid X-ray request, the CPU will send an X-ray command to data latch U27 on the generator CPU board. This will light DS26 on the generator CPU board, and will pull the anodes of U5 and U3 on the control board high. The cathodes of U5 and U3 are held low by the EXPOSURE ENABLE command from U22 (the line connected to the cathode of U46 on the generator CPU board, page 1) during an X-ray request. Therefore, opto couplers U5 and U3 will only be energized if both the hardware and software X-ray commands are present. Because these opto couplers and the comparator circuits (U11D, RN7, U10D, etc) are connected in parallel, both opto couplers must be turned on for TP12 to be pulled high. The X-ray request line is taken to the OR / NOR circuits consisting of Q4, Q13, D91, etc. If the prep request is present, and no faults exist at the time of the X-ray request, the line at TP14 will be pulled high. This enables the output of the VCO as described in 7.2.5. The GENERATOR READY detector and the logic OR / NOR circuits are shown as a functional block with six inputs as shown (PREP input, X-RAY input, and four fault inputs), and three outputs (GENERATOR READY, DRIVE ENABLE, and HV / MA FAULT). The generator-ready and drive enable signals are inhibited if any of the fault inputs are active (+/- 12V/SS FAULT, FILAMENT FAULT, STATOR FAULT, HIGH KV / INVERTER FAULT, or HIGH MA FAULT). This will disable the inverter drive, preventing any kV output.
Refer to MD-0761, sheet 3: Opto coupler U6 on the generator CPU board will be turned on when the power supply ready signal that originates on page 2 is present. The generator CPU monitors the output of U6 via U24, and DS17 on the generator CPU board will light to indicate the generator-ready status. For the Rad-only console, pressing PREP and X-RAY energizes U9 and U10 respectively. The inputs to the generator interface board at J16-4 and J16-5 are pulled low via the LED portion of U9 / U10 and the closed prep or X-ray exposure switch. For the 23 X 56 cm console, the operation is similar to that for the 31 X 42 cm console as described on sheet 1, except that the component reference designations are different.
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. J
Page 7-9
Theory of Operation X-ray exposure Rad / fluoro (Cont)
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.4
Refer to MD-0761, sheet 4: Sheet 4 shows the console prep and X-ray exposure circuits for the touch screen console. Pressing prep or X-ray on the console directly pulls J4-7 and J4-8 on the generator interface board low, initiating the appropriate action in the generator as described earlier.
7.2.5
kV control and feedback (MD-0759) Refer to MD-0759, sheet 1: When the CPU is satisfied that all requirements have been met to allow an X-ray exposure as described in 7.2.4, the kV reference voltage will be produced by D/A converter U22 on the generator CPU board. This is buffered by U14A, inverted by U13A on the control board, and then summed with the positive going kV feedback signal from U16B at the input of error amplifier U13B. Error amplifier U13B will regulate the kV by producing a DC output that is proportional to the difference between the kV reference voltage and the kV feedback voltage. The HT primary current is sampled by T1, and rectified by D27 to D30 to produce a current limit signal (a negative voltage proportional to the primary current). This is applied to the input of U21A, where it will limit the kV demand if the primary current exceeds normal limits. This current limit signal is also fed to comparator U15, which generates a fault pulse if excessive primary current is sensed. The fault pulse is detected by latch U32D and inverted by U33D. A primary (resonant) over current fault will light D70 and pull the input of U33E low via D66. This will force the output of U33E high. The output of U33E is one of the inputs to the GENERATOR READY detector and logic OR / NOR circuits described in 7.2.4. The presence of a fault will immediately remove the generator-ready and drive enable signals, inhibiting the inverter gate drive, thus preventing inverter damage due to the over-current condition. The output of U21A will swing increasingly negative for increased kV demand. This kV demand voltage is buffered and inverted by U21B, and then applied to the VCO (voltage controlled oscillator). The VCO generates complementary output pulses that vary in frequency. The frequency of these pulses is inversely proportional to demanded generator output power. The current sense feedback from T2 synchronizes the start of the pulses. The output pulses from the VCO are applied to AND gates U24A and U24B. The drive enable signal from MD-0761 is applied to the control inputs of U24, holding these inputs high if all logic conditions to allow an X-ray exposure are satisfied. The pulses are inverted and level shifted by U26A and U26B, and then applied to the gate-drive circuit as described on page 2. The differential kV feedback voltage from the HT tank is brought to J9 on the generator control board. This is applied to the inputs of U12A and U12B, where the kV feedback scaling is precisely set by R215. The differential feedback signals are then summed by U16B. The output of U16B supplies a kV feedback signal to error amplifier U13B as described earlier. The kV feedback signal is also fed to the CPU via U16A on the control board, and U15A, U15B, and A/D converter U37 on the generator CPU board where it is used to monitor the output voltage during an exposure. The kV feedback signal is also routed to the high kV detector and latch, which drives D69 and U33E. The output of U33E, when high, will inhibit the inverter gate drive as described previously. The outputs of U14A and U15A on the generator CPU board are summed and compared by the HV ON DETECTOR CIRCUIT, consisting of U30D, Q6, etc. This produces a HV ON signal when the actual kV is greater than approximately 75% of the demanded kV. The HV ON signal is brought to the digital interface board, where it is made available to those digital imaging systems that require this signal to synchronize the exposure.
Page 7-10
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc 7.2.5 kV control and feedback (Cont)
Theory of Operation
The generator control board contains circuits that protect against an inverter shoot-through fault. If a shoot through fault is sensed, current sense transformers on the inverter board(s) will supply a current pulse that is fed to the control board at J14-1 & J14-3, J15-1 & J15-3, and / or J16-1 & J16-3. An inverter fault is then detected by comparator circuits on the control board, latched, and inverted (a logic low at the outputs of the INVERTER 1, INVERTER 2, or INVERTER 3 FAULT LATCH & LOGIC INVERTER circuits indicates a fault). An inverter fault will light D80, D81, or D82, and will pull the output of the logic OR circuit (D87-D89, U35C) low. This will take the input of U33E low, forcing the output of U33E high, thus inhibiting the inverter gate drive as per high primary current and high kV faults described earlier. The fault latches that drive the input of U33E are reset by the RESET command, which originates on MD0761.
Refer to MD-0759, sheet 2: The drive pulses from page 1 are applied to the input of the gate-drive circuit on the control board. The gate-drive circuit utilizes MOSFETs that form a full bridge inverter circuit. This circuit provides current gain for the gate pulses. The high frequency gate pulses are then applied to the power MOSFETS on the inverter board(s) via J10 and / or J11 and / or J12 on the control board. The inverter board(s) produce the high power drive for the HT transformers (Indico 100 X-ray generators use one, two, or three inverter boards, depending on output power). The output of the inverter board(s) drive the primaries of the HT transformers via the resonant capacitor and the fluoro / EMC / sharing inductors. During radiographic operation, contactor K1 shorts out the fluoro inductor. This inductor is in-circuit during fluoroscopy, and optimizes the output tuning during fluoroscopic operation. The drive circuit for K1 is detailed in 7.2.9. For 65, 80, and 100 kW units, the drive to inverter board #3 is disabled by a relay on the power mode select board during low power operation. Refer to 7.2.9 for details.
Refer to MD-0759, sheet 3: The HT tank has similar anode and cathode sections. The cathode and anode sections each have their own high voltage transformer and high voltage multiplier board. The anode section generates the anode voltage, 0 to 75 kV, and the cathode section generates the cathode voltage, 0 to -75 kV. The anode and cathode sections contain voltage dividers that supply kV anode and cathode feedback voltages. The kV feedback from the HT tank is brought to J9 on the control board as described earlier in this section. The HT tank is not field-repairable. Defective HT tanks must be exchanged with equivalent units.
7.2.6
Filament drive and mA control (MD-0760) Refer to MD-0760, sheet 1: When the CPU receives a prep request, D/A converter U18 or U22 on the generator CPU board will output the filament reference voltage (1 volt = 1 amp of filament current). For units with two filament supplies, U18 outputs the small filament drive and U22 outputs the large filament drive. For units with a single filament board, U22 supplies the filament drive. The filament drives are buffered by U14D and U14B, and then routed to the filament supply board via J3 and J10 of the generator CPU board. The filament reference voltage is applied to U1B on the filament supply board. The output of U1B is summed with the output of current limit clamp U1A. The filament current limit is set at 5.5 or 6.5 amps via JW1.
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. J
Page 7-11
Theory of Operation Filament drive and mA control (Cont)
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.6
The filament reference voltage may be measured at the cathode of D6 on the filament board (at the output of U1B). Attempting to measure the filament reference at the input to U1B will provide erroneous results. The filament reference voltage is then summed with the filament feedback voltage at the input of error amplifier U4B. When the filament reference is greater than the feedback, the output of U4B rises, causing the pulse width at the output of U3 to increase. The filament supply blocks are shown in very limited detail on sheet 1 of MD-0760. Refer to sheet 3 for a more detailed functional diagram of the filament supply board. PWM (pulse width modulator) U3 drives MOSFETS Q6, Q7, Q12, and Q13, which form a full bridge inverter. The MOSFETS convert the + and - 35 V supplies to high frequency AC to drive the primary of the filament transformers at the filament switching frequency, approximately 40 kHz, via C22, the primary of T1, J4 / J8 / K1, J5 on the filament supply board, and J4 on the tank lid board. The output of filament current sense transformer T1 on the filament supply board is rectified by D12, D13, D27, and D28, and fed to the RMS converter circuit consisting of U7 and associated components. The output of the RMS converter drives U4A, which is a variable gain amplifier. The filament current feedback is calibrated such that 1 volt = 1 amp of filament current. The calibrated filament feedback voltage (representing actual filament current) appears at the input of buffer U2B and at the summing input of error amplifier U4B as previously described. The output of U2B is brought to J2-2 or J2-4 on the filament supply board, depending on configuration. This filament current feedback signal is then fed to the CPU as shown on sheet 2 and 3. The filament feedback signal from the output of U2B is compared with a 1.7 volt reference by U2A. The output of U2A will swing low if the filament current drops below approximately 1.7 amps, indicating a filament fault. This will turn off Q1 on the filament supply board, taking J2-10 on the filament board and J3-10 on the control board high. The FILAMENT FAULT signal is taken to one of the inputs on the GENERATOR READY detector and logic OR / NOR circuits described in 7.2.4, where a fault will inhibit inverter drive by removing the generator-ready and drive enable signals. A filament fault condition will also turn off Q15 on the control board, turning off opto coupler U7 on the generator CPU board. The output of U7 drives filament fault status LEDs DS13 /DS14 and the input of U24, which is monitored by the generator CPU. The HIGH KV / INVERTER FAULT and the HIGH MA FAULT signals from MD-0759 and MD-0760 respectively are ORed together, and designated as the HV / MA FAULT signal. This is fed to the base of Q14 on the control board, and will be high for a fault. During a HV / mA fault, Q14 will be turned off, turning off opto coupler U8 on the generator CPU board. The output of U8 is monitored by the CPU via U24. U8 also drives DS11 / DS12, with DS12 being lit for a HV / mA fault condition. For generators with a single filament board, U27 on the generator CPU board outputs the large / small filament select command. The output of U27 will be low for large focus, lighting DS24. U19 and U16 invert the large / small focus signal and drive U1 on the control board. The output of U1 will be low for large focus, causing the large / small select line, J3-11 on the control board, to be pulled high by the comparator circuit consisting of U11C, Q2 etc. This de-energizes K1 on the filament board, selecting large focus. The logic high signal at J3-11 drives the base of Q3 on the control board, holding Q3 off when large focus is selected. Q3 drives opto coupler U10 on the generator CPU board, turning off U10 for large focus. The output of U10 is monitored by the CPU via U24.
Page 7-12
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc 7.2.6 Filament drive and mA control (Cont)
Theory of Operation
Refer to MD-0760, sheet 2: The filament drive from page 1 is applied to the secondaries of the filament transformers, which provide high voltage isolation and drive the X-ray tube filaments via the HV cathode board and the cathode high voltage connector as shown. When an exposure is being made, X-ray tube current flows through series resistors on the HV anode and cathode boards. The voltage developed across these resistors, which is proportional to the X-ray tube current, is taken to J9 of the control board. Transient protectors on the high voltage boards clamp the voltage across the series resistors during high voltage arcs. The ground side of the high voltage boards in the HT tank is connected to the mA test jacks E17 / E18 on the tank lid board. Transient protectors on the tank lid board clamp the voltage across the mA measuring device during high voltage arcs, and prevent the voltage at E17 and E18 from rising above approximately 15 volts if the mA test jack shorting strap is removed. The anode mA feedback that appears at J9-1 and J9-2 of the generator control board is scaled approximately 0.4 volts = 100 mA of anode current, and is applied to the input of differential amplifier U6B. The output of U6B is taken to the anode over current detector, whose output is applied to the high anode current latch and inverter circuit. The output of U33C will be low for a high anode current condition. This will light D72 and pull the input of U33E low via D65, forcing the output of U33E high. The output of U33E is one of the inputs to the GENERATOR READY detector and logic OR / NOR circuits described in 7.2.4. An over current condition will immediately remove the generator-ready and drive enable signals, preventing possible damage due to the over-current condition. The ANODE OVERVOLTAGE signal from MD-0759 is also fed into the anode over current detector circuit. Therefore, an anode over voltage condition will disable the inverter gate drive as described above. The output of U6B is also applied to the input of U9 and U30B. U30B provides a scaled mA feedback voltage, calibrated by R216, such that 1 volt = 100 mA at the output of U30B. The output of U30B is fed to the generator CPU board as shown on sheet 3. U9 is a high gain amplifier, and provides a scaled mA feedback voltage 1 volt = 2.5 mA. R212 calibrates the mA feedback, and R213 provides offset voltage adjustment. The output of U9 is fed to the generator CPU board as shown on sheet 3. The cathode mA feedback at J9-4 and J9-3 of the generator control board is used for cathode overcurrent detection only. The cathode mA feedback is applied to the input of differential amplifier U6A. The output of U6A is taken to the cathode over current detector, whose output is applied to the high cathode current latch and inverter circuit. The output of U33B will be low for a high cathode current condition. This will light D71 and pull the input of U33E low via D64, inhibiting the inverter drive as described above for an anode over voltage fault. The CATHODE OVERVOLTAGE signal from MD-0759 is also fed into the cathode over current detector circuit. Therefore, a cathode over voltage condition will disable the inverter gate drive as described above. The high anode and high cathode current fault latches are reset by the RESET command, which originates on MD-0761. The large and small filament current feedback signals from page 1 are brought to J3 on the control board, and then routed to J2 and J1 on the control board. From there, these signals are taken to the generator CPU board as shown on sheet 3.
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. J
Page 7-13
Theory of Operation Filament drive and mA control (Cont)
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.6
Refer to MD-0760, sheet 3: The large and small filament current feedback signals from page 2 are fed to differential amplifiers U30A and U30B respectively on the generator CPU board. The CPU monitors the outputs of U30A and U30B via A/D converter U37. The Rad mA feedback voltage (1 volt = 100 mA) is applied to U15C on the generator CPU board, and the fluoro mA feedback signal (1 volt = 2.5 mA) is applied to U23A. The outputs of U15C and U23A are fed to A/D converter U37, which supplies the mA feedback values to the CPU. The CPU uses the Rad and fluoro mA feedback information to regulate the X-ray tube mA and to perform mA monitoring functions during exposures. The figure on the right of sheet 3 is an expanded functional schematic of the Indico 100 filament supplies, showing more detail than the figures on page 1.
7.2.7
Low speed starter (MD-0764) Refer to MD-0764, sheet 1: The 120 / 240 VAC and the 52 / 73 / 94 VAC supplies originate on MD-0788. The boost voltage (120 or 240 VAC) and the run-voltage (52, 73, or 94 VAC) is supplied by the power supply auxiliary transformer T1. These voltages must be properly selected via taps on T1 as described in chapter 2 of the service manual. When the CPU receives a prep request, the ENABLE command is generated as described in 7.2.4. This command originates on the control board, and is brought to the cathode of D17 on the auxiliary board. This is ORed with the TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH & THERMOSTAT OPEN and 12 VDC / SOFT START FAULT signal in the base circuit of Q15. If all three of these lines are high, i.e. if the ENABLE command is present and no tube 1 / tube 2 mismatch & thermostat open or 12 VDC / soft start faults exist, the base of Q15 will be pulled high, turning on Q15. This will energize K1 on the low speed starter board. K1 is a protection relay that is closed during normal operation, and open-circuits the stator drive if any of the above faults are present. Also when a prep request is made, the PREP command will be applied to the boost and run logic circuit on the auxiliary board. This will pull J4-11 on the control board low, energizing U2 on the low speed starter board, initiating the boost cycle. The boost duration is 1.5 seconds or 2.5 seconds, and is determined by the setting of JW1 on the auxiliary board. At the completion of the boost cycle, the boost and run logic circuit will pull J4-11 high, turning U2 on the low speed starter off. Approximately 100 milliseconds after U2 turns off, J4-12 will be pulled low, turning on U1 on the low speed starter board, initiating the rotor-run cycle. Q2 and Q1 are triacs that are triggered on the zero crossing points of the AC waveform when U2 or U1 is energized. These act as low resistance switches when triggered, with Q2 switching the stator boost voltage, and Q1 switching the stator run-voltage. The output of the triacs is ORed together; therefore their common output will carry the boost voltage or run-voltage, depending on which triac is energized. The COMMON line (AC return), connects to the common terminal on the stator terminal blocks via K1. The boost / run voltages that are controlled by Q2 and Q1 are brought to protection relay K1, and then applied to the main winding via K3 and K4, and to the shift winding via K2, shift capacitor C3, and K4. K4 switches the main and shift currents to tube 1 or tube 2. The TUBE SELECT signal that drives K4 is described in 7.2.2. K3 and K2 are current sense relays that are energized when the stator current is above preset limits. With K3 and K2 closed, Q3 on the auxiliary board is supplied with base current. This will turn on Q3, turning on Q18 on the control board.
Page 7-14
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc 7.2.7 Low speed starter (Cont)
Theory of Operation
The STATOR FAULT line (J6-10) on the control board will be low if there is no stator fault, and high for a fault. This is one of the inputs to the GENERATOR READY detector and logic OR / NOR circuits described in 7.2.4. A stator fault condition will immediately remove the generator-ready and drive enable signals, inhibiting kV output. When the CPU detects a stator fault condition (via the circuits depicted on sheet 2), the kV enable and prep signals are immediately removed, opening relay K1 on the low speed starter board.
Refer to MD-0764, sheet 2: When Q18 on the control board is turned on as described on sheet 1, indicating no stator fault, U5 on the generator CPU board will be turned on. The CPU monitors the output of U5 via U24, and DS20 / DS21 indicate the stator fault status (DS20 indicates no stator fault, and DS21 indicates a stator fault).
7.2.8
Dual speed starter (MD-0765) Refer to MD-0765, sheet 1: The CPU will determine whether the pending exposure should be made at low speed or high-speed operation. Based on this determination, the CPU will output the high speed / low speed command via U27 on the generator CPU board. The output of U27 drives DS8 and DS7 on the generator CPU board, and energizes U12 on the dual speed starter board via U19 and U16. The dual speed starter CPU monitors the output of U12, and sets low or high-speed operation based on the state of U12. The CONTACTOR CLOSED signal that originates on the auxiliary board and closes the main contactor K5, is also brought to the emitter of Q7 on the control board via R94. This signal is low when the contactor is closed, turning on U13 on the dual speed starter board if the prep command is present. The PREP COMMAND is brought to the cathode of D47 on the control board. This is low when prep is not requested, turning on Q7. With Q7 on, the cathode of U13 on the dual speed starter will be held high, keeping U13 off. During prep, the prep command will be high. This turns off Q7, allowing U13 to turn on. The dual speed starter CPU monitors the output of U13, and starts the boost cycle when the output of this opto coupler is low. The TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 select signal from MD-0788 is applied to J4-16 of the control board. This will be low when tube 2 has been selected, energizing U14 on the dual speed starter board. The dual speed starter CPU monitors the output of U14, and selects tube 1 or tube 2 based on the state of U14. K1 on the dual speed starter board will close to select tube 1, and K2 will close to select tube 2, all at the start of prep. K4 is energized only when K1 or K2 is energized, thus isolating the high voltage from the stator terminals at all times except during normal operation of the dual speed starter. The dual speed starter contains an inverter (Q1 to Q4) that produces the required stator current at 50, 60, 150, or 180 Hz by precisely switching the 560 / 650 volt DC bus. The dual speed starter CPU controls the switching of the inverter via the driver circuit consisting of U1-U10 and T1-T4, etc. The setting of DIP switches SW1 and SW2 determines all stator drive parameters (boost voltage and boost time, run voltage, brake voltage and brake time, etc). The modulated output from the inverter is applied to the common stator terminal via one leg of the inverter. The shift and main currents are taken from the other leg of the inverter via K5 and K6. K1-A and K2-A switch the main current, and K1-A and K1-B switch the shift current. K3 is open for high-speed operation. Therefore, only the high-speed phase shift capacitor will be in the circuit. K3 will close for low-speed operation, connecting the low-speed phase shift capacitor in parallel with the high-speed phase shift capacitor.
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. J
Page 7-15
Theory of Operation Dual speed starter (Cont)
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.8
The contacts of current sense relays K5 and K6 will be closed when the stator current is above preset limits. With K5 and K6 closed, Q5 on the dual speed starter board is supplied with base current. This will turn on Q5, whose output is monitored by the dual speed starter CPU. If a stator fault is detected, the CPU will output a high at J1-10 on the dual speed starter board. This signal is fed to the GENERATOR READY detector and logic OR / NOR circuits described in 7.2.4. A fault condition will immediately remove the generator-ready and drive enable signals, inhibiting kV output. Also, the dual speed starter CPU will open K1 or K2 and K4 on the dual speed starter board, removing the stator drive. The stator fault signal is also applied to the base of Q18 on the control board. The base of Q18 will be low if there is no stator fault, turning on Q18. This will turn on U5 on the generator CPU board. The generator CPU monitors the output of U5 via U24, and DS20 / DS21 indicate the stator fault status.
7.2.9
Rad / fluoro and power mode select (MD-0786) The circuits shown on MD-0786 control the Rad / fluoro contactor on the resonant board, and the relay on the power mode select board, both described in 7.2.5. The Rad / fluoro select signal from J1-5 of MD-0788 is applied to the base of Q5 on the auxiliary board via R79. This is high for Rad / pulsed fluoro mode, and low for continuous fluoro mode. When in Rad / pulsed fluoro mode, Q5 will be turned on, lighting D36 and energizing K1 on the resonant board. K1 shorts out the fluoro inductor as described in 7.2.5. In continuous fluoro mode, Q5 is off, de-energizing K1. Inverter # 3 on 65, 80, and 100 kW generators is disabled during low power operation (pulsed fluoro, continuous fluoro, or low power Rad exposures). This is accomplished as described below. When in continuous fluoro mode, and the collector of Q5 is high, the base of Q4 will be pulled high via D38. This will turn on Q4, energizing K1 on the power mode select board. This removes gate drive from inverter #3. The low / high power select signal from J1-3 of MD-0788 is applied to the base of Q4 on the auxiliary board via D44. This is low for high power Rad exposures, and high for pulsed fluoro / low power Rad operation. Q4 will be turned on during pulsed fluoro / low power operation, energizing K1 on the power mode select board, removing gate drive from inverter #3.
7.2.10 Interlocks & tube 1 / tube 2 tellback (MD-0787) For R&F generators, JW4 on the auxiliary board is jumpered in the ON position, and a thermal switch is mounted on the inverter heat sink. This switch will open if an inverter over temperature is detected. This pulls J2-4 on the auxiliary board high, turning on Q10 and lighting D42. With J2-10 pulled high, Q8 is turned on via D26 and R7. The output of Q8, low for a fault, holds the base of Q15 on the auxiliary board low as described in 7.2.7. The output of Q8 is also ORed with the kV ENABLE signal on MD-0761, inhibiting the prep and X-ray functions when the output of Q8 is low. The tube 1 / tube 2 tellback portion of MD-0787 ensures that the actual tube selection matches the requested tube selection. Logic circuits compare the tube 1 / tube 2 request signal to the feedback from a contact closure in the HT tank. The TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SELECT command from MD-0788 is low when tube 2 is selected, and high for tube 1. This is applied to one input of the tube 1 / tube 2 tellback logic circuit. The output of U7 is connected to the other input of this logic circuit.
Page 7-16
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc 7.2.10 Interlocks & tube 1 / tube 2 tellback (Cont)
Theory of Operation
When the tank is in the tube 1 position, U7 and U8 on the auxiliary board are off, and the collector of U7 will be high. In the tube 2 position, U7 and U8 are turned on, and the collector of U7 will be low. If a mismatch is detected, the base of Q8 is pulled high, turning Q8 on. With Q8 turned on, Q15 on the auxiliary board will be turned off, and the prep command will be inhibited as described above. When U8 on the auxiliary board is on (tube 2 position), U3 on the generator CPU board will be turned on. The output of U3 and the TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SELECT signal are connected to U35 on the generator CPU board. U35 decodes the binary inputs, and lights DS5 or DS6 as appropriate.
7.2.11 AEC (MD-0757) Refer to MD-0757, sheet 1: This shows the circuits on the generator interface board that connect to the A2EC2 detector, and the circuits between the generator CPU and the AEC board. Eight lines supply the AEC chamber select signals, the field select signals, and the start signal to the AEC board via U25 / U23 and driver U33 on the generator interface board. The AEC start signal is also connected to the base of Q7 on the generator interface board, where it turns Q7 on when the start signal is present, taking J14-3 high. The AEC ramp (PT RAMP) from the AEC board is buffered by U23C on the generator CPU board, and fed to A/D converter U37 such that it can be monitored by the CPU. D/A converter U18 on the generator CPU board generates the AEC reference voltage. This is buffered by U14C, and fed to the AEC board via J10-10 on the generator interface board. The magnitude of the AEC reference voltage is determined by the CPU, and will be a value between 0 and 10 volts. The AEC reference is also taken to the A2EC2 detector via J14-1. The AEC board generates the PT stop signal when the magnitude of the AEC ramp is equal to the AEC reference voltage. This signal will switch low when the exposure is to be terminated. An active PT stop signal will pull the base of Q5 low, turning Q5 off, thus turning Q6 on. The output of Q6 is connected to one of the interrupt inputs on the CPU via U45C on the generator CPU board, where it will terminate the AEC exposure immediately when the interrupt is received.
Refer to MD-0757, sheet 2: The A2EC2 system, in conjunction with GenWare, establishes AEC calibration curves by using a pair of photo diode detectors to measure the light output from the cassette screens. When A2EC2 calibration is about to be performed, and the exposure starts, the opto coupler that is connected to J2-3 / J2-4 on the A2EC2 detector circuit is energized. This releases the short on the integrating capacitor, which is part of the integrator circuit, via the analog switch. The integrator will then generate a ramp whose slope is proportional to the light sensed by the photo diode detectors. The integrator output is amplified and compared to the AEC reference voltage. The output of the comparator circuit drives U46 on the generator interface board when S1 is closed. The output of U46 will be low when the magnitude of the ramp at the comparator input is equal to the AEC reference voltage. This will terminate the exposure by generating an interrupt at the CPU as described for the PT stop signal on the previous page. The A2EC2 detector assembly includes on-board +/-8 VDC regulators.
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. J
Page 7-17
Theory of Operation
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.11 AEC (Cont) Refer to MD-0757, sheet 3: This page shows the functional schematic of the AEC board used with solid-state AEC chambers. The signal from the AEC chamber is applied between the common anode and the cathode inputs of J1/J11, J2/J12, J3/J13, and / or J4/J14. The AEC board will either be fitted with 5 pin in-line connectors, or circular style connectors, depending on the application. U11A, U11B, U1A, and U1B are extremely high gain preamplifiers that convert the current output from the AEC diodes (several hundred pico amps, typically) to a useable voltage. The output of each preamplifier is connected to the AEC gain adjustment potentiometers, R1 to R4, used for AEC calibration. The AEC signal is then taken to the input of analog switches U6A to U6D. The chamber-select signals exit on the generator interface board as per sheet 1. Only one chamber may be active at one time, and the active channel is indicated by DS1 to DS4 on the AEC board. The chamber-select signals are inverted by U2A to U2D; and then connected to the control inputs of analog switches U6A to U6D. The analog switch corresponding to the selected AEC input channel will be closed when that channel is selected, thus connecting the preamplifier for the active channel to gain stage U9B. The field select signals from the generator interface board are also active-low. An active field select signal will pull the base of Q1, Q2, or Q3 low. This will turn on that transistor, supplying +12 V at the field select lines connected to D30, D18, or D19. More than one field may be active at one time. The field select signals are connected to the control inputs of analog switches at the inputs of U11A, U11B, U1A, and U1B. This will switch the selected combination of AEC inputs (L, M, R) to the summing node of each preamplifier. The voltage output of the preamplifiers will be proportional to the number of fields selected, i.e. the preamplifier output when 3 fields are selected will be 3 times that with a single field selected. The field select signals are also connected to three analog switches in the feedback loop of U9B. One of these switches will be closed for each AEC field that is selected. With one field selected, the gain of this stage will be maximum; with three fields selected the gain of this stage will be divided by three. The variable gain of U9B, which depends on the number of fields selected, compensates for the variable voltage output of the preamplifiers as described in the previous paragraph, thus keeping the signal output from U9B constant relative to the number of fields that are selected. The output of U9B drives the input of difference amplifier U10B, which subtracts the sample and hold voltage from the input voltage as described in the next paragraph. The start signal also exits from the generator interface board. This signal, when active, will cause DS5 on the AEC board to light. The start signal is buffered and inverted by U2F and U2E, and will be logic low at the output of U2E when the start signal is active. This opens the analog switch that is part of the sample and hold circuit at the input of U10B, and also opens analog switch U12 during an AEC exposure. These analog switches are closed at all other times. The sample and hold circuit will sample any electrical noise at the output of U9B during standby operation, and subtract this noise from the AEC signal during an AEC exposure. This ensures that the output of U10B is proportional to the AEC chamber output current only, and is not influenced by noise. The output of 10B drives integrating amplifier U10A. Analog switch U12 opens when an AEC exposure starts, allowing C37 to start integrating the AEC voltage. This will produce a ramp whose slope is proportional to the input voltage at U10A. The AEC ramp is taken to the generator interface board where it is processed as described earlier in this section, and also fed to comparator U13 on the AEC board where it is compared to the AEC reference voltage. The output of U13 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp equals the reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator interface board.
Page 7-18
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc 7.2.11 AEC (Cont)
Theory of Operation
Refer to MD-0757, sheet 4: This is the functional schematic of the AEC board used with ionization type AEC chambers. The AEC chambers are connected to J1/J11, J2/J12, J3/J13, and / or J4/J14. The AEC board will either be fitted with 12 pin in-line connectors, or 9 pin D connectors, depending on the application. The AEC signal from the AEC chamber(s) is routed to the input of analog switches S1A to S1D on the AEC board. These analog switches are controlled by the chamber-select signals. The chamber-select signals exit on the generator interface board as per sheet 1. Only one chamber may be active at one time, and the active channel is indicated by DS1 to DS4 on the AEC board. The chamber-select signals are inverted by U3B, U3C, U3D, and U3F; and connected to the control inputs of the analog switches described in the previous paragraph. The analog switch corresponding to the selected AEC input channel will be closed when that channel is selected, thus connecting the AEC signal to preamplifier U1A, which provides voltage gain. The input of U1A will be configured such that U1A is a non-inverting amplifier for use with AEC chambers that have a positive going output, and as an inverting amplifier for use with chambers with a negative voltage output. The start signal also exits from the generator interface board. This signal, when active, will cause DS5 on the AEC board to be lit. The start signal is buffered and inverted by U3E and U3A, and will be logic low at the output of U3A when the start signal is active. This opens the analog switch that is part of the sample and hold circuit at the input of U2A during an AEC exposure. This analog switch is closed at all other times. The sample and hold circuit will sample any electrical noise at the output of U1A during standby operation, and subtract this noise from the AEC signal during an AEC exposure. This ensures that the output of U2A is proportional to the AEC chamber output voltage only, and is not influenced by noise. The output of U2A connects to the common inputs of analog switches S2A to S2D. These analog switches are controlled by the chamber-select signal, and the switch corresponding to the active channel will be closed. This connects the output of U2A to the AEC gain adjustment potentiometer R1 to R4 corresponding to the active channel. The AEC signal, which will be either a ramp or a DC voltage depending on AEC chamber type, is now fed to the input of U2B. This will be factory configured as an integrating amplifier by connecting C4 into the circuit for use with AEC chambers that output a DC output voltage, or U2B will be configured as a linear amplifier by connecting R32 into the circuit for use with AEC chambers that provide a ramp voltage. The start signal also connects to analog switch S4. This switch opens when an AEC exposure starts, allowing U2B to start integrating or amplifying the AEC signal. The output of U2B will be a positive going ramp regardless of the AEC chamber type in use. This ramp voltage is processed by U4A and U4B, and also fed to the short AEC exposure time compensation circuit consisting of R11 to R14, S3A to S3D, R53 and C11. Analog switches S3A to S3D are controlled by the chamber-select signal. The switch corresponding to the active channel will be closed, connecting the phase-lead network C11 / R53 to the wiper of the AEC short-time adjustment potentiometer. This circuit is disabled when the wipers of R11 to R14 are at the ground end of the potentiometers, and maximum short-time compensation is provided when the wipers are set to the end of the potentiometers connected to U2B. The AEC ramp from U4B is taken to the generator interface board where it is processed as described earlier in this section, and also fed to comparator U6 on the AEC board where it is compared to the AEC reference voltage. The output of U6 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp equals the reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator interface board. The START, and LEFT, MIDDLE, and RIGHT field select signals are brought to the AEC chambers via J1/J11, J2/J12, J3/J13, and J4/J14. The AEC board will be factory configured to directly output the active low signal from the generator interface board to the AEC chamber if required, or to output +12 V or +24 V if the chamber requires active high signals. For AEC chambers that require active high outputs, the start, left, middle, or right field select signal is taken from the collector of Q1 to Q4, respectively. The active low signals from the generator control board turn on Q1 to Q4, outputting either +12 V or +24V (depending on factory configuration) at the collector when active.
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. J
Page 7-19
Theory of Operation
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.11 AEC (Cont) Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J11 to J14. Jumpering pins 2-3 of the field selector jumpers (JW7 / JW8 for channel 1, JW5 / JW6 for channel 2, JW3 / JW4 for channel 3, JW1 / JW2 for channel 4) connects the right field select signal to pin 6 and the left field select signal to pin 2. Jumpering pins 1-2 of the field selector jumpers connects the right field select signal to pin 2 and the left field select signal to pin 6. The AEC board also contains a DC to DC converter that produces +45 V, + or - 300 V, and +500 VDC. The converter circuit consists of U7, T1, output voltage adjustment potentiometer R79, and associated components. The +45 V output is hard wired to all of the AEC chamber connectors, and + or - 300 V is permanently connected to J1 to J4. Additionally, the AEC board will be factory configured to supply either + or - 300 V or +500 V to J11 to J13, and to pin 1 on J1 to J4 (in addition to the + or - 300 V fixed output at pin 2).
Refer to MD-0757, sheet 5: Refer to schematics 734628 and 728401 for the universal AEC board. Schematic 728401 shows the DC to DC converter (U3 and associated components) that produces +50, +300 and +500 VDC for use with ion chambers, and up to -1000 VDC for photo multiplier tubes. R10 adjusts the high voltage output when ABS operation is selected. R24 adjusts the high voltage output when AEC channel 1, 2, or 3 is selected. R19 adjusts the high voltage output when AEC channel 4 is selected. Refer to chapter 3D, the section Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation for further details. The AEC chambers are connected to J1 to J4, and the high voltage for the PMT is taken from J7 on the AEC interface board. J6 interconnects the signals between the AEC board and connectors J1 to J4 on the AEC interface board. Schematic 734628, sheet 1, shows the amplifier and control portion of the AEC circuits. These boards are factory configured via jumpers JW2, JW3, and JW5-74 such that the AEC board is compatible with the AEC chamber types that were specified at the time of the generator order. The individual AEC channels are selected under software control, with the switching being done via analog switches on the AEC board. R1 to R4 are the AEC gain potentiometers, and R91 to R94 are used for short time compensation. Schematic 734628, sheet 2, shows the switching circuits for the start and field select signals. This also shows the analog switches that switch the inputs from solid-state AEC chambers. Schematic 734628, sheets 3 to 5 show the required jumper positions and circuit modifications needed for compatibility with various AEC chambers. It is not recommended that the universal AEC board be field reconfigured.
7.2.12 ABS (MD-0758) The composite video signal is fed into J8 on the generator interface board, and proportional DC is applied to J7. The jumpers (designated JW__) select the input source, input polarity, gain, etc. Refer to chapter 3E for the required positions for these jumpers. Composite video applied to J8 is amplified by U17D and applied to gain stages U17A and U17B. Generators with the conventional fluoro option are fitted with analog gain potentiometer R48, and units with the pulsed fluoro option use digital pot U49. The processed ABS signal exits the generator interface board at J11-3, and is buffered by U23D on the generator CPU board. The ABS signal is then fed to the sample and hold circuit, which smoothes out the ABS feedback signal during pulsed fluoro operation. The CPU monitors the output of the sample and hold circuit via A/D converter U37, and uses this information to maintain constant image brightness by regulating the fluoro kV and / or mA.
Page 7-20
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc 7.2.12 ABS (Cont)
Theory of Operation
The output of the PMT at J7-12 of the generator interface board is split by R118 and fed to J7-10 such that the PMT output is also available for AEC control. This is applicable if a PMT is to be used for AEC control on AEC channel 4. Refer to chapter 3D, the section AEC USING A PMT for further details.
7.2.13 Remote fluoro control (MD-0766) The remote fluoro control communicates with the generator via an RS-232 protocol. Serial communication is handled by U20 and U11 on the generator CPU board, and U7 on the remote fluoro control board. DS15 on the generator CPU board will flash to indicate that the generator is sending data to the remote fluoro control, and DS19 will flash to indicate that the remote fluoro control is sending data back to the generator. The micro controller on the remote fluoro control board handles all remote fluoro functions. It decodes serial data from the generator and decodes inputs from the remote fluoro keyboard assembly. The micro controller drives the speaker on the remote fluoro control board, transmits data to the data latches on the remote fluoro display board in order to drive the desired LEDs, and sends data to the generator in order to set up the requested fluoro parameters.
7.2.14 Digital interface (MD-0767) Refer to MD-0767, sheet 1: This page shows the interface circuits between the generator CPU and the digital I/O board. Included are eight data and address lines, and four control lines for the data and address bus. The HV ON signal that originates on the generator CPU board is described in 7.2.5, and is routed to the digital I/O board as shown. The EXPOSURE ENABLE command is generated by some imaging systems, and is ORed with the output of U22 on the generator interface board as shown in MD-0761. When this line is pulled low, U46 on the generator CPU board is energized, initiating an X-ray exposure as described in 7.2.4. Some imaging systems generate a DIGITAL IMAGING ABS signal. This is fed into the input of U17B on the generator interface board when JW21 is in the appropriate position to select that ABS signal source. Refer to 7.2.12 for details. A sync signal that synchronizes the start of exposures is fed to the CPU via U51, U45A / U45B, and U28 on the generator CPU board. Depending on the position of JW22 on the generator interface board, the sync signal will be either 50 / 60 Hz line frequency pulses from the zero crossing circuit U40 on MD-0788, or these may be sync pulses supplied by the digital imaging system. DS40 on the generator CPU board will light when sync pulses are present. This document does not detail the imaging system pin-outs. Refer to the imaging system documentation and the appropriate CPI digital imaging supplement for this information.
Refer to MD-0767, sheet 2: This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 733752. The address decoder circuits decode the address and data bus. U4 latches the output data, and driver U6 provides the required current gain to drive the output devices. The emitter of U10 is taken low when the generator is ready to make an exposure, and the imaging system will request an exposure by taking the cathode of U10 low. This results in the collector of U10 being pulled low when the generator is ready and the imaging system requests an exposure. The output of U10 is the EXPOSURE ENABLE command, described on sheet 1. DS4 and DS6 to DS10 indicate the status of the outputs.
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. J
Page 7-21
Theory of Operation
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.14 Digital interface (Cont) Multiplexer U7 selects one of two ABS feedback signals, these are designated as the DIGITAL IMAGING ABS signal, and fed back to the generator interface board as shown on sheet 1. The digital outputs from the imaging system (inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U11 to U13. When active, these opto couplers will light DS3 to DS1 respectively, and pull the inputs of U8 low. The output of U8 is read by the generator CPU via the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O board. The HV ON signal is applied directly to U6, which drives DS4 (EXON) and the corresponding input on the imaging system. U14 and U16 provide isolation for the corresponding outputs on the digital I/O board. SW1 must be set as defined in the digital imaging supplement. This configures the software specifically to be compatible with the imaging system in use.
Refer to MD-0767, sheet 3: This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 733947 and 735921. The address decoder circuits decode the address and data bus. U13 and U14 latch the output data, and drivers U15 and U16 provide the required current gain to drive the output devices. Q2 and Q3 provide level translation for those two outputs (these source +24 VDC when active). The HV ON signal is applied to Q1 via D3. This takes the collector of Q1 low when the high voltage is on. Monostable timer U17 holds Q1 on for approximately 13 milliseconds after the exposure has stopped. The digital outputs from the imaging system (inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U3 to U8. When active, these opto couplers will pull the inputs of U12 low. The output of U12 is read by the generator CPU via the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O board. SW1 must be set as defined in the digital imaging supplement. This configures the software specifically to be compatible with the imaging system in use.
Refer to MD-0767, sheet 4: This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 735406. The address decoder circuits decode the address and data bus. U4 latches the output data, and driver U6 provides the required current gain to drive U7, U10, and U16. U7 and U10 pull the associated inputs on the imaging system low when active. The emitter of U14 is taken low when the generator is ready to make an exposure, and the imaging system will request an exposure by taking the anode of U14 high. This results in the collector of U14 being pulled low when the generator is ready and the imaging system requests an exposure, turning on U16. The output of U16 is the EXPOSURE ENABLE command, described on sheet 1. The output of U15, which will also be low when an exposure is requested, is monitored by generator CPU via U8 and the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O board. The digital outputs from the imaging system (inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U11 and U13. When active, these opto couplers will pull the corresponding inputs of U8 low. The output of U8 is read by the generator CPU via the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O board. This I/O board assembly includes an on-board +5 VDC regulator, U12, that connects to J2-21 and to the anode of U11. SW1 must be set as defined in the digital imaging supplement. This configures the software specifically to be compatible with the imaging system in use.
Page 7-22
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc 7.2.14 Digital interface (Cont)
Theory of Operation
Refer to MD-0767, sheet 5: This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 736153. The address decoder circuits decode the address and data bus. U4 latches the output data, and driver U6 provides the required current gain to drive U7, U10, and U13 to U15. These opto couplers pull the associated inputs on the imaging system low when active. DS3, DS4, and / or DS7 to DS9 light to indicate the active outputs. The HV ON signal is NANDed with an output from U4 at the input of U3C. With both inputs to U3C high, the output of U3D will be high. This energizes U15 via driver U6 and DS9 / R9. The digital outputs from the imaging system (inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U11 and U12. When these inputs are active, DS5 and / or DS6 will light, and the corresponding inputs of U8 will be low. The output of U8 is read by the generator CPU via the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O board. SW1 must be set as defined in the digital imaging supplement. This configures the software specifically to be compatible with the imaging system in use.
Refer to MD-0767, sheet 6: This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 736894. CPLD U1 decodes the address and data bus, and latches the output data. The output data is applied to driver U3, U11, and U17. U3 and U11 provide the required current gain to drive the corresponding inputs on the imaging system. The associated LEDs will light to indicate which outputs are active. U17 drives the base of Q1, which provides level translation for that output (sources +24 VDC when active). U17 also energizes K1, and pulls the emitters of U5, U7, U14, and U16 low when the generator is ready to make an exposure. Signals from the table or imaging system will request an exposure by taking the anode of U4, U6, U13, or U15 high. This will energize opto couplers U4 / U5, U6 / U7, U13 / U14, or U15 / U16 respectively. The outputs of U5, U7, U14, and U16 are ORed together, and provide the EXPOSURE ENABLE command, described on sheet 1. The outputs of U4, U6, U13, U15, and U8 are monitored by the generator CPU via U1. The digital outputs from the imaging system (inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U2, U9, U10, and U12. The outputs of these drivers are monitored by the generator CPU via U1. The LED in series with each input will light to indicate the status of that input. The DIGITAL IMAGING ABS signal is taken directly from the imaging system to J1-20.
7.2.15 DAP (MD-0828) The DAP circuit consists of micro-controller U1, RS-232 driver U2, and associated components on the DAP interconnect board. Micro-controller U1 operates under control of the CPU on the generator CPU board via U31 and U38, and controls all DAP functions (switches the +15 V supply via Q1, Q2, Q3 / Q4, Q5 / Q6, Q7 / Q8, and Q9 / Q10 as required to control and test the DAP devices. The micro-controller also counts the DAP pulses via U5 for DAP chamber #1, and U6 for DAP chamber #2). DS2 and DS3 on the DAP interconnect board indicate that the DAP chambers are sending pulses back to the micro-controller, and DS29 and DS32 on the generator CPU board indicate that the CPU is transmitting and receiving data respectively. +24 VDC is supplied to the DAP interconnect board from the room interface board. Regulators on the DAP interconnect board regulate this to +15 V and +5 V.
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. J
Page 7-23
Theory of Operation
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.16 Serial communications (MD-0829) Refer to MD-0829, sheet 1: The console board shown on sheet 1 is used on the 31 X 42 cm console. The console for the other Indico 100 console types is shown on sheet 2. When the generator is switched on and the start-up diagnostics are completed, the console CPU will attempt to communicate with the generator CPU. The console will send data to the generator, and then wait for a response from the generator. If the console receives a response, communication may continue. If the console CPU does not receive a response from the generator CPU, a communication error message will be presented. When the console is sending data to the generator, DS41 on the console board and DS3 on the generator CPU board will flash. DS1 on the generator CPU board and DS42 on the console board will flash to indicate that the generator CPU board is sending data to the console. The console communicates with the generator via RS-232 drivers U23 (console board) and U12 (generator CPU board). U27 on the console board is an RS-232 driver for the serial port, J2. DS44 and DS43 will flash to indicate that data is being sent to, and received from the serial port. The generator CPU board may include optional communications ports J1 and J2. These are driven via U31 and U42 / U38. Communication to and from these ports is indicated by DS29, DS32, DS43, and DS44. DS40 on the console board will flash at a consistent 1 Hz rate if the CPU is operational.
Refer to MD-0829, sheet 2: Sheet 2 shows the console board for the 23 X 56 cm console, and for the Rad only console. Also shown are optional communications ports on the generator CPU board. The generator CPU board may include optional communications ports J15 and J16. These are driven via U50. Communication to and from these ports is indicated by DS45 to DS48. DS16 on the generator CPU board will flash at a consistent 1 Hz rate if the CPU is operational.
For the 23 X 56 cm console: When the console is sending data to the generator, D4 on the console board will flash. D3 on the console board will flash to indicate that the generator CPU board is sending data to the console. The console communicates with the generator via RS-232 driver U6, or RS-422 drivers U5 / U9 for special applications. U20 on the console board is an RS-232 driver for the serial port, J2. D2 and D1 will flash to indicate that data is being sent to, and received from the serial port. D6 on the console board will flash at a consistent 1 Hz rate if the CPU is operational.
Page 7-24
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc 7.2.16 Serial communications (Cont)
Theory of Operation
For the Rad-only console: When the console is sending data to the generator, DS2 on the console board will flash. DS3 on the console board will flash to indicate that the generator CPU board is sending data to the console. The console communicates with the generator via RS-232 driver U8. U11 on the console board is an RS-232 driver for the serial port, J4. DS4 and DS5 will flash to indicate that data is being sent to, and received from the serial port. DS1 on the console board will flash at a consistent 1 Hz rate if the CPU is operational. Sheet 3 does not apply to Indico 100.
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. J
Page 7-25
Theory of Operation
CPI Canada Inc
Page 7-26
Rev. J
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc
Spares
CHAPTER 8 SPARES
CONTENTS: Section Title 8.1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST INDICO 100 GENERATOR.................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.0
INTRODUCTION This chapter contains the list of recommended spare parts for the various models of Indico 100 generators.
Ch # 740895-07
Rev. V
Page 8-1
Spares SPARE PARTS LIST INDICO 100 GENERATOR
CPI Canada Inc
8.2.0
DESCRIPTION Generator CPU board Generator interface board Room interface board Power supply control board Filament board Auxiliary board Inverter board Power input board Resonant Board AEC board Console CPU board Console display board Display assy, LCD Remote fluoro display board Remote fluoro control board Low speed starter board Digital I/O board DAP interface board Dual speed starter board Dual speed starter subassembly Hand switch assembly Battery, lithium 3.0V Capacitor, DC bus 470 uF 450 VDC Capacitor, DC bus 9000 uF 400 VDC Contactor, line Diode, mains rectifier 160MT120K Diode, mains rectifier DD89N12K, DD90N12L, IRKD91-12 Fuse, A70QS10-14F Fuse, FNM-3 Fuse, FNQ-2 Fuse, FNQ-10 Fuse, GDC-1.6 Fuse, GDC-2 Fuse, GDC-2.5 Fuse, GDC-5 Fuse, MDA-2 Fuse, MDA-5 Fuse, MDA-7 Fuse, MDA-10 Fuse, MDA-12 Fuse, MDL-1 1/2
PART NUMBER See note See note 733184-00 732816-03 See note 732221-02 See note See note See note See note See note See note See note 729053-00 729038-00 See note See note 735992-00 728877-03 See note See note 7412290100 4150394100 4155001400 SC2715 6623071100 6623507000 6739951800 6711907400 5550005300 6711905500 5550033300 5550032600 5550034400 5550035600 6713000400 6713000100 6713000500 6713000200 6713746500 6713541500
NOTE 1b 1c 2 1a 3 4 5 6 7 8 1b 9 19 10 10 11 17 22 12 12 20 2 13 14a 2 13 14a 12 21 21 13 2 2 2 2 2 11 2 14a 2 14b
SUGGESTED QTY See note See note 1 1 See note 1 See note 1 1 1 See note 1 1 See note See note See note See note See note See note See note See note 2 6 4 1 1 1 7 See note See note 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Page 8-2
Rev. V
Ch # 740895-07
CPI Canada Inc 8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST INDICO 100 GENERATOR (Cont)
Spares
DESCRIPTION Fuse, MDL-4 Fuse, NLN-100 Fuse, OTS-60 Relay, DPST, 12V Connector, 4 pin Fan, axial Transformer, aux power supply Transformer, room I/F HT tank assembly (complete)
NOTE: 1a.
PART NUMBER 6713544000 6711906500 SC3434 7213011800 5618931800 2084022900 732417-00 735496-01 See note
NOTE 2 14a 13 2 12 18 2 2 15
SUGGESTED QTY 5 5 5 2 1 1 1 1 See note
The part number shown is the suggested replacement for the original power supply control board. The spares board is full featured and will replace the original board in your generator regardless of configuration. This is intended to eliminate the need to stock multiple configurations of this board. Two versions of generator CPU boards and four versions of console CPU boards are used in Indico 100 generators. Please confirm the original part number(s) of these boards in your generator before ordering spares. If your original generator CPU board is part number 732174-XX (where XX is a number from 00 to 08), order part number 732174-12. In this case, upgraded firmware will be required along with the new CPU board. Please consult the factory for details. If the original generator CPU board is part number 732174-12, it will be replaced with the same part number. In this case, a firmware upgrade is not required. If your original generator CPU board is part number 734573-00, order part number 734573-02. In this case, upgraded firmware will be required along with the new CPU board. Please consult the factory for details. If the original generator CPU board is part number 734573-02, it will be replaced with the same part number. In this case, a firmware upgrade is not required. The generator CPU board and the console CPU board must be matched per the table below:
1b.
APPLICATION 23 X 56 cm console
23 X 56 cm console
31 X 42 cm console
Rad-only console
GENERATOR CPU BOARD If the original board is 732174XX, order part number 732174-12 for spares usage. See note 1b. If the original board is 734573XX, order part number 734573-02 for spares usage. See note 1b. If the original board is 734573XX, order part number 734573-02 for spares usage. See note 1b. If the original board is 734573XX, order part number 734573-02 for spares usage. See note 1b.
<MUST USE WITH> <MUST USE WITH> <MUST USE WITH> <MUST USE WITH>
CONSOLE CPU BOARD 732218-00
733903-00
735852-00
736805-00
Ch # 740895-07
Rev. V
Page 8-3
Spares NOTE (Cont): 1c.
CPI Canada Inc
Two different generator interface boards are used in Indico 100 generators. For rad and R&F generators, use part number 732177-06, for pulsed fluoro generators use part number 732177-08. Spares should be stocked accordingly. This part is common to all models of Indico 100 generators. Three different filament boards are used in Indico 100 generators. RAD only generators use ONE filament board, part number 731407-00. R&F generators use TWO filament boards, part number 731407-01 (large focus) and part number 731407-02 (small focus). Spares should be stocked accordingly. The part number shown is the suggested replacement for the original auxiliary board. The spares board is jumper configurable in the field and as such will replace the original auxiliary board. This is intended to eliminate the need to stock multiple configurations of this board. Three different inverter board part numbers are used in Indico 100 generators. For 230 VAC 1 phase and 480 VAC 3 phase generators use part number 732813-00, for 400 VAC 3 phase 30 / 50 / 80 kW generators use part number 732813-04, for 230 VAC 1 phase 37.5 kW and for 400 VAC 3 phase 37.5 / 65 kW generators use part number 732813-05 (see note 17 for the definition of mains input voltage). 30 and 37.5 kW generators require one inverter board, 50 and 65 kW generators require two inverter boards, and 80 kW generators require three inverter boards. Spares should be stocked accordingly. Two part numbers of power input boards are used for spares. For 1 phase 230 VAC generators use part number 733798-01, for 3 phase 400 or 480 VAC generators use part number 732161-01. Five different resonant boards are used in Indico 100 generators. Refer to the table below for the correct part number for your generator. O/P POWER (kW) & MAINS VOLTS 30 kW (230 VAC 1, 400 / 480 VAC 3) 37.5 / 40 kW (230 VAC 1, 400 VAC 3) 50 kW (400 VAC 3) 50 kW (480 VAC 3) 65 kW (400 VAC 3) 80 kW (400 VAC 3) 80 kW (400 / 480 VAC 3) RESONANT BOARD RAD POWER SUPPLIES 732808-00 732808-05 732808-01 732808-02 732808-06 732808-03 RESONANT BOARD R&F POWER SUPPLIES 732964-02 732964-00 732964-03 732964-01
2. 3.
4.
5.
6. 7.
8.
The AEC board for your generator was selected to be compatible with specific AEC device(s). To maintain full compatibility, the original part number must be ordered as a replacement. Refer to chapter 9, section 9.2.0 for the part number of the original AEC board shipped in the generator for which this manual was prepared. THE CONSOLE DISPLAY BOARD IS ONLY USED WITH THE 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE. The console display board is supplied pre-mounted to the console front panel switch assembly. Consult the factory for the required spares part number for this assembly.
9.
Page 8-4
Rev. V
Ch # 740895-07
CPI Canada Inc NOTE (Cont): 10. 11. Remote fluoro control is an option; spares should be stocked accordingly.
Spares
These items only used on generators fitted with low speed starter, spares should be stocked accordingly. The low speed starter part number with a 33F phase shift capacitor for standard R type stators is 732752-00. The part number with a 12.5F phase shift capacitor is 732752-01, and the part number with a 45F phase shift capacitor is 732752-02. These items only used on dual speed starter option, spares should be stocked accordingly. Several part numbers of dual speed starter (which are tube stator dependent) are used in Indico 100 generators. To determine which dual speed starter assembly is in your generator, note the DUAL SPEED STARTER ASSY part number on a label on the dual speed starter chassis. This will be the part number that must be ordered for spares usage. For reference, this will be part number 733317-XX or 735925-XX where XX is a two digit number designating the exact configuration. The dual speed starter fuses listed are used on all versions of dual speed starter. These items are used on the 400/480 VAC 3 phase power input board. Spares should be stocked accordingly.
12.
13.
14a. These items are used on 1 phase 230 VAC units only (on the DC bus assembly or on the 1 phase power input board). Spares should be stocked accordingly. 14b. This fuse used on 1 phase 230 VAC rad two tube generators, and on 1 phase 230 VAC R & F one tube and two tube generators. Spares should be stocked accordingly. 15. 16. For replacement HT oil tank part numbers, consult factory. NOTE REGARDING MAINS (LINE) VOLTAGE AS DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION: The mains voltage referenced in this section is the mains voltage at the input to the generator (at the main fuses on the power input board). This is not necessarily the same as the voltage at the main disconnect box in the room, the reason being that an optional line adjusting transformer may be used with the generator which steps the incoming line voltage to the generator up or down. To ensure that the correct part number is selected for spares, it is suggested that the mains voltage be noted at the main input fuses INSIDE THE GENERATOR. The digital I/O board is optional, and used on generators intended to interface with digital imaging systems. To ensure full compatibility, please order the same part number that is in your generator(s). A cooling fan is used on R&F power supplies only. Spares should be stocked accordingly. For 23 X 56 cm consoles, use LCD display assembly part number 733396-00. For 31 X 42 cm consoles, use LCD display assembly part number 735895-00. For 23 X 56 cm consoles, use hand switch assembly part number 733176-00. For 31 X 42 cm consoles, use hand switch assembly part number 735203-00. Single phase generators use fuse FNM-3, three phase generators use FNQ-2. Spares should be stocked accordingly. DAP is an option, spares should be stocked accordingly.
17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22.
Ch # 740895-07
Rev. V
Page 8-5
Spares
CPI Canada Inc
Page 8-6
Rev. V
Ch # 740895-07
CPI Canada Inc
Schematics
CHAPTER 9 SCHEMATICS
CONTENTS:
9.1.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................ 9-2 9.2.0 FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC INDEX .............................................................................................................. 9-2 9.3.0 FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS............................................................................................................................ 9-2
Ch # 740895-08
Rev. B
Page 9-1
9 Schematics
9.1.0 INTRODUCTION
CPI Canada Inc
This chapter contains the functional schematics for your X-ray generator. Each schematic represents a major function in the Indico 100 generator; the fourteen functional schematics in this chapter represent all of the major functional blocks in Indico 100 generators.
9.2.0
FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC INDEX The functional schematic index follows this page. The part number for the AEC board originally shipped in your generator is listed at the bottom of this form.
9.3.0
FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS The functional schematics immediately follow the functional schematic index.
Page 9-2
Rev. B
Ch # 740895-08
CPI Canada Inc
Functional Drawing Index
INDICO 100 FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS DESCRIPTION DC Bus and Power Distribution System ON Room Interface X-Ray Exposure - Rad / Fluoro kV Control and Feedback Filament Drive and mA Control Low Speed Starter Dual Speed Starter Rad / Fluoro and Power Mode Select Interlocks and Tube 1 / Tube 2 Tellback Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) Automatic Brightness Stabilization (ABS) Remote Fluoro Control Digital Interface DAP (Dose Area Product) Serial Communications DRAWING NUMBER MD-0788 MD-0762 MD-0763 MD-0761 MD-0759 MD-0760 MD-0764 MD-0765 MD-0786 MD-0787 MD-0757 MD-0758 MD-0766 MD-0767 MD-0828 MD-0829
INDICO 100 SCHEMATICS DESCRIPTION Schematic, AEC Interface Board Schematic, AEC Board SCHEMATIC NUMBER 728401 734628
THE PART NUMBER OF THE ORIGINAL AEC BOARD IN THE GENERATOR FOR WHICH THIS MANUAL WAS PREPARED IS LISTED BELOW: AEC BOARD PART NUMBER (AS ORIGINALLY SHIPPED) N/A
MF-0718E
9 Schematics
CPI Canada Inc
Page 9-4
Rev. B
Ch # 740895-08
K5
D1
PHASE 1
F5B F5A F5C
REFER TO PAGE 5 FOR LOGIC LEVELS, NOTES, ETC, REFERENCED BY HEXAGONAL SYMBOL:
PHASE 2
3 PHASE AC MAINS INPUT
PHASE 3 NEUTRAL
R16, R17
R10
R11
~ ~ ~
5 1
+
R18, R19 R20
E23
3 PHASE INDICO 100 GENERATORS USE ONE, TWO, OR THREE INVERTER BOARDS DEPENDING ON GENERATOR OUTPUT POWER
E1 + E1 + E1 +
DC BUS OUT E11
INVERTER BOARD
E2 -
INVERTER BOARD
E2 -
INVERTER BOARD
E2 -
E16 E8
E9 E10
GROUND
F2 F1
560 VDC
K1
+ -**
DUAL SPEED STARTER IS OPTIONAL. LOW SPEED STARTER IS STANDARD IN INDICO 100 GENERATORS
+12V JW3 1 JUMPER POSITION: 1 PHASE GENERATORS 2 JUMPER PINS 2-3 3 PHASE GENERATORS 3 JUMPER PINS 1-2 K1 F2 SOFT START OK PROTECTION CIRCUIT (U1C, Q7, ETC) F1
DC BUS CHARGED SENSING CIRCUIT (R5-R8, D3)
DC BUS DISCHARGE CIRCUIT (Q1, D10) +12V J6-1
DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD T1
R48
380/400/480 VAC 240 VAC N/C 208 VAC 120 VAC 94 VAC
1
J4-10 J4-10 J4-8 J4-8
2
D3 S.S. OK +12V
U1 4 K2 +12V 2 D2 DC BUS OK
+12VDC OK D9
4 2
5 1
R12
U2
J6-5
JUMPER POSITION: 1 PHASE GENERATORS 2 JUMPER PINS 2-3 3 PHASE GENERATORS 3 JUMPER PINS 1-2
SOFT START DRIVER CIRCUIT (U3B, Q6, ETC)
R31
JW2 1
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
J2-1 P2-1 CNCTR CLOSED J4-13 J4-2 J4-13 J4-2 K2 D8 F4 +12V K1 D4 J2-2 P2-2 K5
J6-6
3
D2
73 VAC 52 VAC
J6-7
F1
RETURN
SOFT START FAULT SIGNAL TO AUXILIARY BOARD, PAGE 3
J1-1 J5-3 J5-4 +12V J3-3 J2-3 J2-4 J2-2 J3-4 J3-2 J1-3 J1-4
F1 F2
R1, R2 K1
J4-1 J4-4
J4-1 J4-4 D5
120 / 240 VAC 52 / 73 / 94 VAC

F3
COMMON
4
+12V J4-3 J4-14 TP1 J4-15 J4-16 TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SELECT COMMAND TO MD-0787 J4-3 J4-14 J4-15 J4-16 J4-18
+12V TP4 TP1
+12V J3-9 D7 K3 J2-9
J4-18
REFER TO MD-0764
J4-17
J4-17 J10-3 K4
LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD

FAN(S) USED ON FLUORO GENERATORS ONLY. DE PENDING ON THE APPLICATION, ONE, TWO, OR THREE FANS MAY BE USED
+12V R72 FLUORO FAN TIMER / DRIVER CIRCUIT (U11, Q9, ETC) D37 FLUORO FAN ON J4-5
J10-1
6
J4-5 D6
+12V K3
K4
J11-4 J11-6
F2
J5-4 J5-6 THREE FAN UNITS ONLY
R&F GENERATORS ONLY J5-6 J5-7 J5-3 J5-4 J1-6 J1-5 J1-3
E21
E17
H.T. TANK
TUBE 1 /TUBE 2 SOLENOID (TWO TUBE HT TANKS ONLY)
AUXILIARY BOARD
240V 200V
T2 (SHOWN TAPPED * FOR 400 VAC MAINS)

F3
J8-3 J8-1 J7-1 J7-3 J7-5 OPTIONAL 400/480 VAC

*** 480 VAC GENERATORS
***
FROM PAGE 3
230/277 VAC NEUTRAL GROUND OPTIONAL
***
180V
* **
T1 AND T2 MUST BE TAPPED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NOMINAL AC MAINS VOLTAGE. REFER TO CHAPTER 2 OF THE GENERATOR SERVICE MANUAL. THIS VOLTAGE IS APPROXIMATELY 560 VDC FOR 400 V GENERATORS, AND APPROXIMATELY 680 VDC FOR 480 V GENERATORS
0V 240V 200V
CONTINUED ON PAGE 4
ROOM INTERFACE CHASSIS
3 PHASE POWER INPUT BOARD (REFER TO PAGE 2 FOR 1 PHASE POWER INPUT BOARD)
G. SANWALD CHECKED ________ DES.\MFG.\AUTH. HTW
DRAWN
DATE 10 MAR 2000 ________
DC BUS & POWER DISTRIBUTION MD-0788 REV J

SHEET 1 OF 6
10 MAR 2000
0V
K5
LINE 1
E33 230 VAC MAINS RECTIFIER BUS CAPACITORS 650 VDC OUT
SINGLE PHASE INDICO 100 GENERATORS USE ONE OR TWO INVERTER MODULES DEPENDING ON GENERATOR OUTPUT POWER
E1 + E1 +
F5A F5B E34
1 PHASE AC MAINS INPUT
LINE 2 GROUND
INVERTER BOARD
E2 -
INVERTER BOARD
E2 -
VOLTAGE DOUBLER CIRCUIT

R10 R11
DC BUS ASSEMBLY
P1-4 K1 J12-4
P1-1 J12-1 NO CONNECTION
J6-1
380/400/480 VAC TAPS 240 VAC
*T1
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
F2 F1 DC BUS CHARGED SENSING CIRCUIT (R6-R8, R16-R21, D3, ETC)
J6-3 208 VAC J6-5 120 VAC 94 VAC U1 4 2 D2 52 VAC DC BUS OK J6-7 F1 RETURN J6-6 73 VAC
1
J4-10 J4-8 J4-10 5 J4-8 1
+12V J2-1 P2-1 D4 J4-13 J4-2 J4-13 J4-2 K2 D8 J2-2 P2-2 K5 K2
J5-3 J5-4 +12V K1 D5 F4 R12 +12V J3-3 J3-4 J3-2
AUXILIARY BOARD REFER TO PAGE 1
J4-1 J4-4
J4-1 J4-4
LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD REFER TO PAGE 1
J4-3 J4-14 J4-15 J4-16 J4-18
J4-3 J4-14 J4-15 J4-16 J4-18 D9
+12VDC OK
J3-9 +12V
D7 J4-17 J4-17 +12V
K3
J10-3 K4 J10-1
FAN(S) USED ON FLUORO GENERATORS ONLY. DE PENDING ON THE APPLICATION, ONE OR TWO FANS MAY BE USED
6
J4-5 J4-5 D6 K4
K3
J11-4 J11-6
H.T. TANK REFER TO PAGE 1
J8-3 E21 E17 J8-1 OPTIONAL 230 VAC
240V
T1 / T2 MUST BE TAPPED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NOMINAL AC MAINS VOLTAGE. REFER TO CHAPTER 2 OF THE GENERATOR SERVICE MANUAL.
T2 (SHOWN TAPPED * FOR 240 VAC MAINS)
F3
J7-1 J7-3 J7-5 230 VAC GROUND OPTIONAL
200V 180V
ROOM INTERFACE CHASSIS

0V 240V 200V
CONTINUED ON PAGE 4
1 PHASE POWER INPUT BOARD

G. SANWALD CHECKED ________ DES.\MFG.\AUTH. HTW DRAWN DATE 10 MAR 2000 ________

SHEET 2 OF 6
10 MAR 2000
0V
NOTE REFERENCE
REFER TO MD-0759 PAGE 2
K1
REMARKS
D36 LIT INDICATES RAD OR PULSED FLUORO MODE. D36 NOT LIT INDICATES CONTINUOUS FLUORO MODE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = K1 ON RESONANT BOARD ENERGIZED IN RAD / PULSED FLUORO MODE. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = K1 ON RESONANT BOARD DE-ENERGIZED IN CONTINUOUS FLUORO MODE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = K1 ON POWER MODE SELECT BOARD ENERGIZED IN FLUORO OR LOW POWER RAD MODE (< 20 kW APPROX). HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = K1 ON POWER MODE SELECT BOARD DE-ENERGIZED IN HIGH POWER RAD MODE (> 20kW APPROX).
+12V R44
+12V
2
J2-1 J2-1 J2-2 K1
D36
1
FROM J1-5 (AUXILIARY BOARD), SEE MD-0788, PAGE 3 R79
RAD MODE
J2-2
THESE CIRCUITS USED ON R&F GENERATORS ONLY

3
Q5
R47
RESONANT BOARD
+12V
D38
J10-1 J3-1
AUXILIARY BOARD ENERGIZING K1 DISABLES DRIVE TO INVERTER BOARD No. 3

J12-1 J12-2 J1-1 J1-2 J4-2 J12-3 J12-4 J1-3 J4-3 J1-4 J4-4 J1-4 J1-3 J1-2 K1 J4-1 J1-1
INVERTER DRIVE SIGNAL FROM MD-0759
R66
FROM J1-3 (AUXILIARY BOARD) SEE MD-0788, PAGE 3
D44
J10-2 R69
J3-2
K1
D1
Q4
THE POWER MODE SELECT BOARD IS USED ON 65 / 80 kW GENERATORS WITH THREE INVERTER BOARDS ONLY
INVERTER DRIVE SIGNAL TO MD-0759
CONTROL BOARD
POWER MODE SELECT BOARD
INVERTER BOARD
DRAWN
DATE 21 MAR 2000 ________
RAD / FLUORO AND POWER MODE SELECT MD-0786 REV B

SHEET 1 OF 1
21 MAR 2000
CS1, U10, U11 +5V RN7G SW1 * SW2 * +5V INVERTER FAULT DETECTOR 560 / 650 VDC (+)
HS
LS
TO 2.1 V CURRENT SINK U19, U16 BUFFER AND DRIVER J10-2 J10-21 J1-2 J1-21 U17, U18 U19, U22, U24 R40
R24
DS8
DS7
DS1 INVERTER FAULT
5
IGBT SWITCH (Q2) IGBT SWITCH (Q4)
1
U27 DATA LATCH
J4-6 J4-8
J1-6 J1-8
5 U12
2 +12V
HIGH SPEED SELECT
DRIVER CIRCUIT AND FAULT CURRENT LATCH (U1-U10, T1-T4, ETC).
IGBT SWITCH (Q1)
IGBT SWITCH (Q3) K4
R96
PREP COMMAND FROM MD-0761
+12V R41 Q7 J4-2 J4-4 J1-2 J1-4 2 4 DUAL SPEED STARTER CPU, BUFFERS, DRIVERS K1 U14 2 4 K2
TUBE 2 SELECT
D47
6
1 5 U13 560 / 650 VDC (-)
R94
3
CONTACTOR CLOSED SIGNAL FROM MD-0788, PAGE 3 +12V R42 J4-14 J4-16 J1-14 J1-16
TUBE 1
K5 K1-A TB2-3 SHIFT
PREP INITIATED
K2-A D47
Q5
R31 TB2-2 K6 C22 +12V K5 R32 TB2-1 COMM MAIN
4
+5V TUBE 1/TUBE 2 SELECT SIGNAL FROM MD-0788, PAGE 3 RN7A
K3 K6
ROTOR
DS21 +12V RED TO 2.1 V CURRENT SINK
OPTO-COUPLER ON = NO FAULT
HIGH SPEED PHASE SHIFT CAPACITOR
K1-B
DS20 GRN
TUBE 2
K4 K2-B TB3-3 SHIFT
U24 BUFFER
J10-1 5 U5 4 2 J10-20 1
J1-1 +12V R121 J4-10 J1-10 K3
R1
7
LOW SPEED PHASE SHIFT CAPACITOR
TB3-2 TB3-1
MAIN COMM
J1-20
RN4E R138
Q18
DATA BUS D0..D7
STATOR FAULT TO GENERATOR READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT ON CONTROL BOARD, SEE MD-0761
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
CONTROL BOARD
DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD
* REFER TO CHAPTER 2 OF SERVICE MANUAL FOR THE

PROCEDURE TO SET DIP SWITCHES SW1 AND SW2
G. SANWALD CHECKED STEVE BLAKE DES.\MFG.\AUTH. L.FOSKIN DRAWN DATE 30 MAR 2000 30 MAR 2000 30 MAR 2000
DUAL SPEED STARTER MD-0765 REV C

SHEET 1 OF 2
NOTE REFERENCE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
REMARKS
DS8 LIT INDICATES HIGH SPEED SELECTED, DS7 LIT INDICATES LOW SPEED SELECTED. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = HIGH SPEED SELECTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = LOW SPEED SELECTED. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 7 VDC) = CONTACTOR CLOSED AND PREP REQUESTED. THIS INITIATES THE BOOST CYCLE. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = BOOST NOT REQUESTED (PREP COMMAND NOT RECEIVED, OR CONTACTOR IS NOT CLOSED). LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = TUBE 2 DESELECTED. THIS CONDITION DEFAULTS TO TUBE 1. DS1 LIT INDICATES AN INVERTER CURRENT FAULT. POSSIBLE CAUSES INCLUDE INCORRECT DIP SWITCH SETTINGS FOR THE TUBE IN USE (SEE ** ON PAGE 1), INCORRECT STATOR IMPEDANCE, OR DEFECTIVE STATOR CABLE. K4 OPEN CIRCUITS THE STATOR COMMON LEAD AT ALL TIMES THAT THE DUAL SPEED STARTER IS IN STANDBY MODE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = NO STATOR FAULT, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = STATOR FAULT (LOW OR NO STATOR CURRENT). DS20 LIT INDICATES NORMAL STATOR CURRENTS. DS21 LIT INDICATES STATOR FAULT, OR DUAL SPEED STARTER IS IN STANDBY MODE.
G. SANWALD CHECKED STEVE BLAKE DES.\MFG.\AUTH. L.FOSKIN
DRAWN
DATE 30 MAR 2000 30 MAR 2000 30 MAR 2000
DUAL SPEED STARTER MD-0765 REV C

SHEET 2 OF 2
+12V J3-9 R1
TUBE 1
SHIFT
J1-1 +12V R121 K2
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
J1-20 RN4E R138
C3 J3-3 K4 MAIN COMM
Q18
J6-10
J5-10
2
Q3
R30
D7
R29
J4-9
J4-9
J3-8
J2-8
+12V
K1 J3-7 STATOR FAULT TO GENERATOR READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT ON CONTROL BOARD, SEE MD-0761 TP1 J3-5 K3
TUBE 2
SHIFT
MAIN COMM
PREP COMMAND FROM MD-0761, PAGE 2
J6-8
J5-8
3
COMMON FROM J1-4. REFER TO LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD ON MD-0788, PAGE 1 F3
J3-1
R36
JUMPER POSITION: INDICO 100 GENERATORS JUMPER 1.5S FOR 1.5 SEC BOOST, NO JUMPERS FOR 2.5 SEC BOOST. REFER TO CH. 2 OF SERVICE MANUAL. DO NOT USE JUMPER POSITION .15S JW1 .15S 1.5S
TP3
120 / 240 VAC FROM J1-1. REFER TO LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD ON MD-0788, PAGE 1
F1
Q2 +12V
ZERO CROSS CIRCUIT
TP3 J4-11 J3-7 J2-7
U2
BOOST AND RUN LOGIC CIRCUIT (U1, U10, U18 Q2, Q12, ETC.)
TP4
J4-11
5
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH & THERMOSTAT OPEN SIGNAL FROM MD-0787 12 VDC / SOFT START FAULT SIGNAL FROM MD-0788, PAGE 3 +12V R45 R35
52 / 73 / 94 VAC FROM J1-3. REFER TO LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD ON MD-0788, PAGE 1
F2
Q1 +12V
ZERO CROSS CIRCUIT
TP2 J4-12 J3-6 J2-6
U1
J4-12
+12V
8
J4-6 J4-6 J3-10 J2-10
D1 K1 +12V D2
7
ENABLE COMMAND FROM MD-0761, PAGE 2
D18
J8-4
J1-4
D15 Q15
R46 J2-9 TUBE SELECT SIGNAL FROM J2-9. REFER TO LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD ON MD-0788, PAGE 1
R1 K4
D17
POWER INPUT BOARD CONTROL BOARD AUXILIARY BOARD
LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD
R5
DRAWN
DATE 10 MAR 2000 ________
LOW SPEED STARTER MD-0764 REV E

SHEET 1 OF 2
10 MAR 2000
+5V RN7A DS20 GRN
ROTOR
DS21 RED TO 2.1 V CURRENT SINK OPTO-COUPLER ON = NO FAULT J10-1 5 U5 4 2 J10-20 J1-20 1 J1-1
U24 BUFFER
FROM PAGE 1
DATA BUS D0..D7
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
CONTROL BOARD
NOTE REFERENCE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
REMARKS
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 6-11 VDC) = NO STATOR FAULT, LOW (<APPROXIMATELY 2 VDC) = STATOR FAULT (LOW OR NO STATOR CURRENT). LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = NO STATOR FAULT, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = STATOR FAULT (LOW OR NO STATOR CURRENT). HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 10 VDC) = PREP REQUESTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC) = PREP NOT REQUESTED. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = BOOST REQUESTED, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = BOOST NOT REQUESTED (BOOST REQUESTED FOR APPROXIMATELY 1.5 SEC AFTER PREP INITIATED). LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = RUN REQUESTED, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = RUN NOT REQUESTED (RUN REQUESTED AFTER BOOST COMPLETE, AND FOR DURATION THAT PREP IS PRESSED). HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = LOW SPEED STARTER ENABLED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = STARTER DISABLED (SEE # 7). THIS POINT MUST BE HIGH (AS PER # 6) TO ENABLE THE LOW SPEED STARTER. THIS REQUIRES THE ENABLE COMMAND TO BE PRESENT (HIGH), AND THE TUBE 1 /TUBE 2 MISMATCH &THERMOSTAT OPEN SIGNAL TO BE HIGH. IF THE 12 VDC / SOFT START FAULT SIGNAL IS LOW (INDICATING A FAULT), J1-4 WILL NOT BE PULLED LOW DUE TO THE DIODE SHOWN CONNECTED TO THIS PIN ON PAGE 1. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) ENERGIZES K1 ON THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD, ENABLING THE STARTER. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) DE-ENERGIZES K1 ON THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD. AS PER # 6 AND 7, NO ENABLE COMMAND, OR PRESENCE OF A TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH & THERMOSTAT OPEN FAULT, OR A 12 VDC / SOFT START FAULT WILL INHIBIT LOW SPEED STARTER OPERATION. DS20 LIT INDICATES NORMAL STATOR CURRENTS. DS 21 LIT INDICATES STATOR FAULT, OR LOW SPEED STARTER IS IN STANDBY MODE.
DRAWN
DATE 10 MAR 2000 ________
LOW SPEED STARTER MD-0764 REV E

SHEET 2 OF 2
10 MAR 2000
+5V RN7C
J2-8 JW1 J2-7
5.5 A 6.5 A 1 3 2
JW1 SELECTS MAXIMUM FILAMENT CURRENT 5.5 OR 6.5 AMPS
FIL
DS14 +12V RED TO 2.1 V CURRENT SINK RN2H
OPTO-COUPLER ON = NO FILAMENT FAULT
J2-9
DS13 GRN
BUFFER & CURRENT LIMIT CIRCUIT
ERROR AMPLIFIER & DRIVER CIRCUIT
TP2
3
TP1 C22
BUFFER / AMPLIFIER & FILAMENT CURRENT COMPARATOR
U24 BUFFER
J10-4
J1-4
FILAMENT FAULT TO MD-0761, PAGE 2 FILAMENT CURRENT FEEDBACK SIGNAL (SM) TO PAGE 2 R137 +12V
J2-10 J2-4 J2-3 T1

RMS CONVERTER CIRCUIT
5 +5V RN7E U7 4
J5-4
J4
J5-3
SMALL FILAMENT DRIVE CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
J10-23
J1-23
RN4D
HV
DS12 RED TO 2.1 V CURRENT SINK U8 4 2 J10-24 J1-24 5 1 J10-5 J1-5 RN2G
Q15
J3-10
DS11 GRN
FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD (SMALL)
RN4C R136
U24 BUFFER
Q14
HV / MA FAULT FROM MD-0761, PAGE 2 J3-8 J3-7
J2-6 JW1 J2-5 J2-9
5.5 A 6.5 A 1 3 2
JW1 SELECTS MAXIMUM FILAMENT CURRENT 5.5 OR 6.5 AMPS
OPTO-COUPLER ON = NO HV / MA FAULT
J3-2 J3-10
J2-2 J2-10
1
R10 U18 D/A CONVERTER 13 12 + R7
TP3 R5
TP2 J3-9 J2-10 TP21 J2-2 FILAMENT CURRENT FEEDBACK SIGNAL (LG) TO PAGE 2 J10-9 J10-28 J1-9 J1-28 J3-6 J3-5 J2-1
3
TP1 C22
BUFFER / AMPLIFIER & FILAMENT CURRENT COMPARATOR
14
T1
RMS CONVERTER CIRCUIT
J5-2
U14D R17
TP1 R11
J8
J5-1
LARGE FILAMENT DRIVE CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
U22 D/A CONVERTER +5V RN11E
6 5
R24
FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD (LARGE) INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH OPTIONAL TWO FILAMENT BOARDS (TYPICALLY USED IN R&F GENERATORS) USE THE FILAMENT BOARD CONFIGURATION SHOWN ABOVE
U14B
DS24
DS25
JW5 JUMPER POSITION: INDICO GENERATORS JUMPER PINS 1-2 DO NOT USE JUMPER POSITION 2-3 JW5 1 U19, U16 BUFFER AND DRIVER 2 3
OPTO-COUPLER ON = LARGE FOCUS SELECTED LG/SM REQUEST DETECTOR CKT RN1A (U11C, Q2, ETC) 5 1
INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH STANDARD SINGLE FILAMENT BOARD (TYPICALLY USED IN RAD ONLY GENERATORS) USE THE FILAMENT BOARD CONFIGURATION SHOWN BELOW
J2-6 JW1 J2-5 5.5 A 6.5 A 1 3 2 JW1 SELECTS MAXIMUM FILAMENT CURRENT 5.5 OR 6.5 AMPS
LARGE
U27 DATA LATCH
SMALL
TO 2.1 V CURRENT SINK
J3-11
J10-17 J10-36
J1-17 J1-36
TO J3-6, J3-5, J3-9, J3-10 ON CONTROL BOARD
J2-9
+5V RN6E
OPTO-COUPLER ON = SMALL FOCUS SELECTED
U1 RN1B 2 RN2E 4 +12V J10-8 J1-8 FIL CURRENT FEEDBACK SIGNAL (SM) TO PAGE 2 FIL CURRENT FEEDBACK SIGNAL (LG) TO PAGE 2 4 2 J10-27 J1-27 RN4A R75 J2-10 J2-4 J2-3 J2-2 J2-1 J2-11
3
TP1 T1
BUFFER / AMPLIFIER & FILAMENT CURRENT COMPARATOR RMS CONVERTER CIRCUIT
C22
U24 BUFFER
5 U10 DATA BUS D0..D7
J5-3 +12V K1 K1 J5-4 J5-1 J5-2 LARGE FILAMENT DRIVE CONTINUED ON PAGE 2 SMALL FILAMENT DRIVE CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
TP2
Q3
FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD (UNIVERSAL) GENERATOR CPU BOARD CONTROL BOARD
DUE TO SPACE RESTRICTIONS, THIS PAGE SHOWS ONLY THE MAJOR FILAMENT BLOCKS. REFER TO PAGE 3 FOR A MORE DETAILED FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF THE FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD.
G. SANWALD CHECKED S. BLAKE DES.\MFG.\AUTH. L. FOSKIN
DRAWN
DATE 12 MAY 2000 12 MAY 2000 15 MAY 2000
FILAMENT DRIVE & MA CONTROL MD-0760 REV E

SHEET 1 OF 4
FILAMENT CURRENT FEEDBACK SIGNAL (SM) FROM PAGE 1
FROM J2-4 FROM J2-3
J3-4 J3-3
J2-3 J2-11 SM FILAMENT FEEDBACK CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
J5-1
J4-1 J4-2
J2 ** CATHODE C S L FILAMENT CURRENT FEEDBACK SIGNAL (LG) FROM PAGE 1 FROM J2-2 FROM J2-1 J3-2 J3-1 J1-13 J1-32 LG FILAMENT FEEDBACK CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
LARGE
J5-2
FROM PAGE 1
J5-3
5
J4-3 J4-4
8
TP4 TP5 R163
SMALL
J5-4
R5
CATHODE H.T. BOARD FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD

R216 R165
65+
R6
R4 R3
J1-11 J1-30 RAD MA FEEDBACK CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
H.T.TANK
2 R33, R32 3
R213
+
U9
R164
U30B
9
TP6 TP7 R36 HIGH MA FAULT TO GENERATOR READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT ON CONTROL BOARD, SEE MD-0761, PAGE 2 10 R17 R16 R15 R14 D72 HIGH ANODE CURRENT LATCH & LOGIC INVERTER (U32C, U33C) U33E 11
J1 ANODE S L C
HV ANODE BOARD
7
TP2 TP3 R34 R7 R9 R212
+12V R179
J2-1 J2-9 FLUORO MA FEEDBACK CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
J3-1
J9-1 R8
RN6C, RN6D
R19 65+ 7 D95
ANODE OVERVOLTAGE SIGNAL FROM MD-0759, PG 1 ANODE OVERCURRENT DETECTOR (U18, RN9E-H, ETC.)
ANODE I
D65
J3-2
J9-2
RN6A, RN6B
U6B R38
E18
mA TEST JACK
RESET COMMAND FROM MD-0761, PG 2 +12V R177 R39 J3-4 J9-4 R18 RN6G, RN6H 23+ RN6F, RN6E R40 1 D96 CATHODE OVERVOLT AGE SIGNAL FROM MD-0759, PG 1 CATHODE OVERCURRENT DETECTOR (U17, RN9A-D, ETC.) HIGH CATHODE CURRENT LATCH & LOGIC INVERTER (U32B, U33B) D71
+
E17
CATHODE
D64
J3-3 L S J2 CATHODE C
J9-3
U6A
H.T.TANK
HV CATHODE BOARD TANK LID BOARD
PART OF HV OIL TANK
CONTROL BOARD
DRAWN
DATE 12 MAY 2000 12 MAY 2000 15 MAY 2000

SHEET 2 OF 4
** ONE TUBE H.T. OUTPUTS ARE SHOWN. TWO TUBE TANKS WILL HAVE A SECOND PAIR OF H.T. OUTPUTS
6
TP25 TP24 R61 R57
MAXIMUM FILAMENT CURRENT LIMIT CIRCUIT
SET MAX CURRENT JW1

3 2 6.5 A 5.5 A
ERROR AMPLIFIER, PWM REGULATOR, AND FILAMENT CURRENT DRIVERS
RN8D J3-11 SM FILAMENT FEEDBACK FROM ON PAGE 2 J3-3 RN9C RN9D 65

+
7 U30B
R63 R62 D6 RN3G J2-8 RN2A RN2B RN3F 65+ RN5G RN4H
+
RN8C
7 U1B
6
TP23 TP22 R67 R64
J2-7
J2-6 J2-5
RN1A RN1B
RN8B J10-32 LG FILAMENT FEEDBACK FROM ON PAGE 2 J10-13 RN9A RN9B 23

+
RN3H
1 U30A
R59 R60 J2-9
RN8A
3 11
TP7 R39 R38 TP10 A/D CONVERTER U37 J2-10
TP1 TP2
RN5D
RN1D J10-30 RAD MA FEEDBACK FROM ON PAGE 2 J10-11 RN2C RN2D 910 + RN1C 8 U15C R29 13 R34
-
J2-11
12 +
14 U15D
R23
J2-4 J2-3
RN2C RN2D
Q1
U4A U2A 1.7 V Ref
+
12
TP11 TP14 R50 R45
J2-2 J2-1
RN1C RN1D
RN4C J3-9 FLUORO MA FEEDBACK FROM ON PAGE 2 J3-1 RN5D RN5C

-
23+ RN4D
1 U23A
R79 R88
R87
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
DATA BUS D0..D7
U1A -12V
+35V
11
U3
TP3
Q6
Q12
U4B
PWM REGULATOR
Q13 Q7 C22
10
TP4
+12V
-35V
J5-2 J5-1
K1 K1
K1 IS FITTED ON UNIVERSAL (LARGE/SMALL) FILAMENT BOARDS. J8 IS FITTED ON LARGE FILAMENT BOARDS, AND J4 IS FITTED ON SMALL FILAMENT BOARDS.
J5-4 J5-3
J8 J4
U7 RMS CONVERTER
D12, 13 D27, 28
T1
U2B
R21
FILAMENT CURRENT SENSE, RMS CONVERTER, AND FILAMENT FEEDBACK
FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD
DRAWN
DATE 12 MAY 2000 12 MAY 2000 15 MAY 2000

SHEET 3 OF 4
NOTE REFERENCE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
REMARKS
FILAMENT REFERENCE OUTPUTS, GENERATED BY THE CPU. SCALING IS 1 VOLT OUT = 1 AMP OF FILAMENT CURRENT. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = LARGE FOCUS SELECTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = SMALL FOCUS SELECTED. THIS SIGNAL IS USED IN SINGLE FILAMENT SUPPLY GENERATORS ONLY . HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = FILAMENT FAULT (FILAMENT CURRENT < 2 A). LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = NO FILAMENT FAULT. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = LARGE FOCUS SELECTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) SMALL FOCUS SELECTED. PRIMARY FILAMENT CURRENT AT THESE POINTS MAY BE CONFIRMED USING A CURRENT PROBE ON ONE OF THE OUTPUT LEADS ON THE SMALL OR LARGE PAIR OF OUTPUTS. THE VOLTAGE AT THESE TEST POINTS WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC = 1 AMP OF FILAMENT CURRENT. THESE TEST POINTS ALLOW MEASUREMENT OF A VOLTAGE PROPORTIONAL TO ANODE CURRENT. THE SCALING IS 0.4 VDC = 100 mA. SHORT EXPOSURE TIMES MUST BE CONSIDERED AND APPROPRIATE MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES MUST BE USED. THESE TEST POINTS ARE SCALED 1 VDC = 100 mA OF X-RAY CURRENT . THESE TEST POINTS ARE SCALED 1 VDC = 2.5 mA OF X-RAY CURRENT (R&F GENERATORS ONLY). FILAMENT FEEDBACK CURRENT TEST POINT. THIS IS SCALED 1 VDC = 1 AMP OF FILAMENT CURRENT. PWM OUTPUT. THE WAVEFORM WILL BE AS PER FIGURE 1 FOR LOW AND HIGH FILAMENT CURRENT DEMAND.
Approx 25 usec (40 kHz) +12 V

LOW FILAMENT DEMAND
FIGURE 1
0V
+12 V
HIGH FILAMENT DEMAND
0V
DRAWN
DATE 12 MAY 2000 12 MAY 2000 15 MAY 2000

SHEET 4 OF 4
2
TP6 TP8 R36 5 R31 R35 7
+
2
TP9 TP8 R41 R42 RN4A 1
+
R53 R68 R91 1

+
1 U12A
2 3 R52 R49 J9-6
6 R26
R67 2 3 R89 7
+
U15B
2 3
RN2A
J10-31 J10-12
J1-12 J1-31
R24
6 5 R54 R72 R69 R221 R220 7

+
R215
R48
J9-5 J9-7 KV FEEDBACK SIGNAL FROM PAGE 3
U15A RN4B RN2B
U16A R23 RESET COMMAND FROM MD-0761, PG 2
U16B
6 5 R50
R37
J9-8
HIGH KV / INVERTER FAULT TO GENERATOR READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT ON CONTROL BOARD, SEE MD-0761, PG 2 +12V U37 A/D CONVERTER R172 HV ON SIGNAL TO MD-0767, PG 1 10
U12B
D92 +12V D80 +12V D81 +12V D82 D93
ANODE OVERVOLTAGE SIGNAL TO MD-0760, PG 2 CATHODE OVERVOLT AGE SIGNAL TO MD-0760, PG 2
INV 3
R208 R209 D69
INV 2
R210
INV 1
INVERTER 1 FAULT LA TCH & LOGIC INVERTER (U39B, U35F) INVERTER 1 FAULT DETECTOR (T3, U36, D83, ETC) J14-1 J14-3
3
11 TP26
U33E
kV
D63 HIGH KV DETECTOR AND LATCH (U31, U32A, U33A)
HV ON DETECTOR CIRCUIT (U30C U30D, Q6, ETC)
JW3 125kV 150kV JUMPER POSITION: 125kV GENERATORS JUMPER 125kV 150 kV GENERATORS JUMPER 150kV D86
OR LOGIC
INVERTER 2 FAULT LA TCH & LOGIC INVERTER (U39C, U35E)
INVERTER 2 FAULT DETECTOR (T4, U37, D84, ETC)
J15-1 J15-3 INVERTER FAULT SIGNALS FROM PAGE 2
D87-D89, U35C INVERTER 3 FAULT LA TCH & LOGIC INVERTER (U39D, U35D) INVERTER 3 FAULT DETECTOR (T5, U38, D85, ETC) J16-1 J16-3
TP2
1
R46 J10-7 J1-7 R26, R45 23+ J10-26 J1-26 R25, R44 R43 +12V R175 1 R71 R70 D48
R25
4
+5V
U22 D/A CONVERTER
TP17 TP19
R180 R171
U14A
ERROR AMPLIFIERS INCLUDES U13B, U21A

+
R132
3+
R106 D49 R107 65+ R108 7
U24A 2 1 U24B 5 4 6 4 3 2
U26A 7 U26B 5
U13A D35
U13B
U21A
VCO INCLUDES U19, U20, U23, U25, U27, Q10
U21B
DRIVE PULSES CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
D66 D70
DATA BUS D0..D7
Ir
U15 R63 R66
R64
HIGH RESONANT CURRENT LATCH & LOGIC INVERTER (U32D, U33D)
3 2 +
-
R62 D27-D30 CURRENT SENSE R65 DRIVE ENABLE COMMAND FROM MD-0761, PAGE 2
T1 -12V
T2
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
CONTROL BOARD
J13-4
J13-1
H.T. PRIMARY CURRENT SENSE FROM PAGE 2
DRAWN
DATE 18 MAY 2000 18 MAY 2000 18 MAY 2000
KV CONTROL & FEEDBACK MD-0759 REV C

SHEET 1 OF 4
E1: 560 / 650 VDC (+)
J2-1 J2-3
* USED ON R&F GENERATORS ONLY

TO J14-1 TO J14-3 INVERTER FAULT SIGNAL, TO PAGE 1
K1 *
REFER TO MD-0786 FOR K1 DRIVE CIRCUITS
J10-1 J10-2
J1-1 J1-2
MOSFET SWITCHES
MOSFET SWITCHES E3
J10-3 J10-4
J1-3 J1-4 MOSFET SWITCHES MOSFET SWITCHES
*
E4
INVERTER BOARD #1
E2: 560 / 650 VDC (-)
E1: 560 / 650 VDC (+)
J2-1 J2-3
TO J15-1 TO J15-3
INVERTER FAULT SIGNAL, TO PAGE 1
J11-1 J11-2
J1-1 J1-2
MOSFET SWITCHES
MOSFET SWITCHES E3 H.T. PRIMARY CURRENT CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
GATE DRIVE CIRCUIT FOR MOSFET INVERTER (INCLUDES Q19 TO Q26)
J11-3 J11-4
J1-3 J1-4 MOSFET SWITCHES MOSFET SWITCHES E4
INVERTER BOARD #2
E2: 560 / 650 VDC (-)
E1: 560 / 650 VDC (+)
J2-1 J2-3
TO J16-1 TO J16-3
INVERTER FAULT SIGNAL, TO PAGE 1
J12-1 J12-2
J1-1
J12-3 J12-4 DRIVE PULSES FROM PAGE 2
POWER MODE SELECT BOARD (REFER TO MD-0786)
J1-2
MOSFET SWITCHES
MOSFET SWITCHES E3
J1-3 J1-4 MOSFET SWITCHES MOSFET SWITCHES E4
CONTROL BOARD
INVERTER BOARD #3
E2: 560 / 650 VDC (-)
RESONANT BOARD
H.T. PRIMARY CURRENT SENSE, TO PAGE 1 TO J13-1 TO J13-4
J1-1
J1-4
INDICO 100 GENERATORS USE ONE, TWO, OR THREE INVERTER MODULES DEPENDING ON GENERATOR OUTPUT POWER
DRAWN
DATE 18 MAY 2000 18 MAY 2000 18 MAY 2000

SHEET 2 OF 4
HV ANODE BOARD
J1 ANODE C S L
TO J9-8 KV FEEDBACK SIGNAL TO PAGE 1 TO J9-7 TO J9-5 TO J9-6
J3-8 J3-7 J3-5 J3-6
HV MULT ASSY + (ANODE)
E9
E10
HV MULT ASSY(CATHODE)
FROM PAGE 2
C
L S
TANK LID BOARD
HV CATHODE BOARD
J2 CATHODE
RESONANT BOARD
PART OF H.V. OIL TANK ** ONE TUBE H.T. OUTPUTS ARE SHOWN. TWO TUBE TANKS WILL HAVE A SECOND PAIR OF H.T. OUTPUTS
G. SANWALD CHECKED S. BLAKE DES.\MFG.\AUTH. L.FOSKIN DRAWN DATE 18 MAY 2000 18 MAY 2000 18 MAY 2000

SHEET 3 OF 4
NOTE REFERENCE
1 2 3 4
REMARKS
kV REFERENCE OUTPUT, GENERATED BY THE CPU. SCALING IS 1 VOLT OUT = 15 kV OF GENERATOR OUTPUT . kV FEEDBACK TO THE CPU. SCALING IS 1V = 20 KV OF GENERATOR OUTPUT. HV ON SIGNAL. THIS IS HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) WHEN HIGH VOLTAGE IS ON, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) WHEN HIGH VOLTAGE IS OFF. THE VOLTAGE AT TP17 AND TP19 SHOULD BE A 50% DUTY CYCLE SQUARE WAVE, RANGING IN FREQUENCY FROM APPROXIMATELY 80 kHz TO APPROXIMATELY 250 kHz, DEPENDING ON GENERATOR OUTPUT POWER. SEE FIGURE 1.
12 VDC 0 VDC
FIGURE 1
G. SANWALD CHECKED S. BLAKE DES.\MFG.\AUTH. L.FOSKIN
DRAWN
DATE 18 MAY 2000 18 MAY 2000 18 MAY 2000

SHEET 4 OF 4
+24V
+24V 1 5 U22 5 J12-17 J6-17 EXPOSURE ENABLE COMMAND TO J10-35 (PAGE 2)
1.
NOTE: THE PORTION OF THE REMOTE FLUORO EXPOSURE, REMOTE EXPOSURE, AND REMOTE TOMO SELECT INPUTS SHOWN WITHIN THE DASHED OUTLINES IS DETAILED ON MD-0763, PAGE 1
U44
5 LAST IMAGE HOLD CIRCUIT (U39, C30, ETC.)
3
EXPOSURE ENABLE COMMAND FROM MD-0767, PAGE 1
U32 2 4 R39, R57 2 4 +12V RN19B +5V
U42 2 4
U25, U12, U7 ADDRESS DECODER, DATA LATCH, AND DRIVER BUFFER AND ADDRESS DECODER (U18, U25) J12-6 J6-6 DS42
EXP SWT
R82 DS41
R92
U28 CPU
4
TO 2.1 V CURRENT SINK U46 2 1
REMOTE FLUORO EXPOSURE INPUT TP4 R113 TP5 R118 TP6
5 U30
2
SEE NOTE 1
1
R119
J9-8
R70
4 RN14C
J5-6 J5-7 J5-8 +5V R120 +5V R121 +5V J5-9 R102
J4-6 J4-7 J4-8
R19
R20
U18, U25 +24V 1 R24 U15 R25 2 4 5 +24V 1 5 U38 U25, U12, U7 ADDRESS DECODER, DATA LATCH, AND DRIVER U18, U25 BUFFER AND ADDRESS DECODER J12-4 J6-4 RN14E J12-7 J6-7 RN14B BUFFER AND ADDRESS DECODER J12-5 J6-5 RN14D
J4-9
U18 CPU
J16-3
FROM RAD-ONLY CONSOLE (PAGE 3)
1 J16-4 J16-5 R18 R72 U37 2
5
KV CONTROL REFER TO MD-0759
5 DATA BUS D0..D7 U24 4
1 +24V 2 U25 5 1
4
4 2 U26 4 2 5 1 J9-3 R77 J9-4
JW15
SEE NOTE 1
MA CONTROL REFER TO MD-0760
J13-7
FOOT SWITCH
J13-9
5 U43 U25, U12, U7 ADDRESS DECODER, DATA LATCH, AND DRIVER BUFFER AND ADDRESS DECODER (U18, U25) U41 J12-5 J6-5 RN14D
PREP HAND SWITCH X-RAY COM
J13-3 REMOTE EXPOSURE INPUT R76
2 1
4 5
J13-1
J13-5
CONSOLE BOARD
J3-18
J3-19
J3-20 +24V
P1-18
J9-24
JW2
SEE NOTE 1
RN14A
PREP
THE CONSOLE BOARD & KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY SHOWN ON THIS PAGE IS USED ON THE 31 X 42 CM CONSOLE ONLY. REFER TO PAGE 3 FOR THE 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE AND THE RAD-ONLY CONSOLE, AND PAGE 4 FOR THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE.
P1-19
R23 J9-25 1 5 U8 U25, U12, U7 ADDRESS DECODER, DATA LATCH, AND DRIVER BUFFER AND ADDRESS DECODER (U18, U25) U10 2 4 J12-8 J6-8 DATA BUS D0..D7
X-RAY
P1-20
REMOTE TOMO SELECT INPUT 2 1 4 5
4
DRAWN
GENERATOR CPU BOARD

DATE 26 APR 2000 26 APR 00 26 APR 2000
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
R21
G. SANWALD CHECKED S. BLAKE DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
X-RAY EXPOSURE RAD/FLUORO MD-0761 REV G

SHEET 1 OF 4
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
L. FOSKIN
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH & THERMOSTAT OPEN SIGNAL FROM MD-0787
13
J1-4
AUXILIARY BOARD
+5V RN11B
+5V RN11D
J8-4
+12V R174
KV EN
DS31 RED TO 2.1 V CURRENT SINK
+5V RN11C DS26 X-RAY YEL J1-14 RN2B 1 5 KV ENABLED DETECTOR CKT (U11A, RN8, ETC)
D19
U33F 13 12 RESET COMMAND TO MD-0759, PAGE 1 & MD-0760, PAGE 2 J9-9 J9-7 J3-9 J3-7
DS30 GRN
14
TP10
R173
ENABLE COMMAND TO MD-0764
PREP
DS28 RED TO 2.1 V CURRENT SINK
8 9 10
J10-33 U19, U16 BUFFER AND DRIVER J10-15 J1-15 RN1C U4 J10-14 J1-33 RN2A
H.T. TANK
DS27 GRN
RN5E +12V
7
U27 DATA LATCH
15
TP18 1 U2 5 PREP ENABLED DETECTOR CKT (U11B, U10C, ETC)
D21 RN2F
PREP COMMAND TO MD-0764 & MD-0765 D24 D25 GENERATOR READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT (U10A, Q6, D37, ETC)
J1-3 RN4B J1-22
J10-34
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
J1-34
RN1D
18
R133
11
DATA BUS D0..D7 EXPOSURE ENABLE COMMAND FROM PAGE 1
Q12
J10-16
12
J10-35 RN1H 1 U5 J1-35 RN1F 2 4 5 X-RAY REQUEST DETECTOR CKT (U11D, RN7, ETC)
+/- 12V/SS FAULT FROM MD-0788, PAGE 3 (CONTROL BOARD) J1-16 FILAMENT FAULT FROM MD-0760, PAGE 1 STATOR FAULT FROM MD-0764 & MD-0765 HIGH KV / INVERTER FAULT FROM MD-0759, PAGE 1 & HIGH MA FAULT FROM MD-0760, PAGE 2 HV / MA FAULT TO MD-0760, PAGE 1 TP14 LOGIC OR / NOR CIRCUITS (U10B, U14, Q4, Q13, D91, ETC)
16
TP12 X-RAY REQUEST DETECTOR CKT (U10D, RN7, ETC)
RN1G 1 U3 RN1E 2 4 5
17
DRIVE ENABLE COMMAND TO MD-0759, PAGE 1
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
CONTROL BOARD
DRAWN
DATE 26 APR 2000 26 APR 00 26 APR 2000

SHEET 2 OF 4
+5V RN7D +5V
P/S READY
DS18 R10 R8 RED TO 2.1 V CURRENT SINK R9
DS17 GRN
19
OPTO-COUPLER ON = GENERATOR READY J1-3 J10-3 J10-22 U6 2 4 1 5
J5-6 J5-7 U24 BUFFER U14 2 U3 BUFFER DATA BUS D0..D7 4 1 5 U12 2 4 1 5 U10 2 4 J5-9 1 5 J5-8
J4-6 J4-7 J4-8 TO GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD (PG 1)
FROM PAGE 2
J1-22
J4-9
5 U21 4 DATA BUS D0..D7
1 U13 2
1 U11
CONTROL BOARD
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
1
TP12 TP13 J8-4 J8-5 J8-3 R67 R66 TO GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD (PG 1) TB1-1
+5V
+5V
J16-4 J16-5 J16-3
FOOT SWITCH
TB1-2

5 1 U10 4 2 4 2 5 1
TB1-3
U17 CPU
TB1-4
TB1-5
CONSOLE CPU BOARD
J6-6
J6-8
J6-10
DATA BUS D0..D7
U9
P1-18
J2-18
J3-6
J3-3
J3-1
PREP X-RAY
P1-19
J2-19
J3-8
J3-5
P1-20
J7-3 J7-2 J7-1
J2-20
J3-10
CONSOLE CPU BOARD
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
P1-3
DISPLAY BOARD
CIRCUITS SHOWN WITHIN DASHED LINES ARE USED ON THE 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE ONLY.
PREP X-RAY
P1-2
P1-1
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
CIRCUITS SHOWN WITHIN DASHED LINES ARE USED ON RAD-ONLY CONSOLE.
DRAWN
DATE 26 APR 2000 26 APR 00 26 APR 2000

SHEET 3 OF 4
P1-6
J5-6
J3-7
J4-7 TO GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD (PG 1)
PREP X-RAY
P1-7
J5-7
J2-8
J4-8
P1-5
J5-5
J2-9
J4-9
KEYPAD ASSEMBLY PREP HAND SWITCH X-RAY COM

J3-3 J3-1 J3-5
CIRCUITS SHOWN WITHIN DASHED LINES ARE USED ON THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE ONLY.
TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE BOARD
NOTE REFERENCE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
REMARKS
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC) AT THESE POINTS INDICATES FOOT SWITCH INPUT CLOSED, PREP SWITCH PRESSED, OR X-RAY SWITCH PRESSED RESPECTIVELY HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 24 VDC) = . OPEN CIRCUIT (I.E. NOT PRESSED) FOOT SWITCH, OR PREP SWITCH, OR X-RAY SWITCH. FOR RAD-ONLY CONSOLE, LOW INDICATES PREP SWITCH PRESSED, OR X-RAY SWITCH PRESSED, RESPECTIVELY . LOW (APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC) = AN X-RAY EXPOSURE HAS BEEN REQUESTED VIA ONE OF SEVERAL EXPOSURE INPUTS. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 24 VDC) = NO X-RAY EXPOSURE HAS BEEN REQUESTED. EXPOSURE ENABLE LINE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) INDICATES AN X-RAY EXPOSURE REQUEST HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = NO X-RAY EXPOSURE HAS BEEN REQUESTED. , THE CATHODE OF THE ASSOCIATED LED IS HELD LOW UNDER CPU CONTROL DURING AN X-RAY EXPOSURE REQUEST ONLY. NO MEANINGFUL MEASUREMENTS CAN BE MADE ON THIS LINE AS THIS IS A DATA LINE. THE REQUIRED DATA IS LATCHED BY THE REGISTER CIRCUIT(S) AT THE APPROPRIATE TIME. THE OUTPUT OF THE ASSOCIATED LED IS LATCHED BY A REGISTER. THIS IS THEN READ BY THE DATA BUS AT THE APPROPRIATE TIME. AS THIS IS A DATA LINE, NO MEANINGFUL MEASUREMENTS CAN BE MADE AT THIS CONNECTION. DS30 LIT = KV ENABLE REQUEST SENT. THIS IS NECESSARY TO MAKE AN X-RAY EXPOSURE. DS31 LIT = KV ENABLE NOT REQUESTED. DS27 LIT = PREP REQUEST SENT. DS28 LIT = PREP NOT REQUESTED. DS26 LIT = X-RAY EXPOSURE IN PROCESS. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = KV ENABLED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = KV NOT ENABLED. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = PREP REQUESTED. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = PREP NOT REQUESTED. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = X-RAY REQUESTED. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = X-RAY NOT REQUESTED. LOW = X-RAY EXPOSURE REQUESTED AS PER # 3. THIS LINE MUST BE LOW IN ORDER FOR THE X-RAY EXPOSURE LEDS ON THE CONTROL BOARD TO BE ENERGIZED (SEE # 16). LOW = (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH OR THERMOSTAT OPEN FAULT. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = NO FAULT. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = KV ENABLED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = KV NOT ENABLED. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = PREP REQUESTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = PREP NOT REQUESTED. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = X-RAY REQUESTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = X-RAY NOT REQUESTED. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = OUTPUT DRIVE ENABLED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = OUTPUT DRIVE DISABLED. ALL INPUTS TO THE GENERATOR READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT MUST BE AT THE CORRECT LOGIC LEVEL IN ORDER TO BE ABLE TO MAKE AN X-RAY EXPOSURE. THIS MEANS ALL FOUR FAULT INPUTS SHOWN MUST BE CLEARED, AND THE KV ENABLE AND PREP COMMANDS MUST BE PRESENT. DS17 LIT INDICATES GENERATOR READY TO MAKE AN EXPOSURE. THIS REQUIRES THAT ALL CONDITIONS PER # 18 BE SATISFIED. DS18 LIT INDICATES A GENERATOR READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT INPUT IS NOT SATISFIED TO ENABLE AN X-RAY EXPOSURE.
DRAWN
DATE 26 APR 2000 26 APR 00 26 APR 2000

SHEET 4 OF 4
+35V
T1
26 VAC 0V 26 VAC J7-1 J7-3 D32 J7-6 F3 C21 R64 F4 R65 C22
+12V
+12V J7-4 J7-5 +5V U34 +5 V REGULATOR +12V J6-1 J7-1 TP1 TP15 J4-1 J4-3 J4-5 -12V J4-7 J4-9 J4-11 J4-12 J4-13 J4-15 J1-1 J1-3 J1-5 J1-7 J1-9 J1-11 J1-12 J1-13 J1-15 J1-17 J1-19 U27 +5 V REGULATOR +5V +12V TP16
R71
J6-4 D31 +/-35V D28 J6-5
FROM PAGE 1, 2
J7-2 15 VAC J7-4 0V J7-5 15 VAC TO PAGE 1
TP5 -35V U5,U6 +12 VDC REGULATOR D27 U4 -12 VDC REGULATOR D16 C19 +12V +12V -12V D29
F1
R70
J6-2 J6-3
J7-2 J7-3
C24, C25 F2 D33
R68
D30 -12V +12V
J4-17 J4-19
TO MD-0786
-12V
R32
D1 5.1V REF J5-6 J5-7 J5-3 J5-4 J1-6 J1-5 J1-3
+12V
+12V
+/- 12V/SS FAULT
D19
J5-5
J6-5
AUXILIARY BOARD
-
+/- 12V/SS FAULT TO GENERATOR READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT ON CONTROL BOARD, SEE MD-0761
DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD DUAL SPEED STARTER IS OPTIONAL. LOW SPEED STARTER IS STANDARD IN INDICO 100 GENERATORS
18
U3C +35V
CONTROL BOARD
J6-6
J6-7
J6-3
J6-4
J8-6
J8-5
J8-3
9
-
8
JW1
+35V J9-1 J9-4 J1-1 J1-4 J1-3 J1-2 J1-5 TP2 J9-6 J1-6 -35V F1 F2 +12V
7
CONTACTOR CLOSED SIGNAL TO MD-0765
TUBE 1/TUBE 2 SELECT SIGNAL TO MD-0765
FLUORO RAD
JUMPER POSITION: RAD GENERATORS JUMPER "RAD" R&F GENERATORS JUMPER "FLUORO" +12V
U3D
+12V
-12V
+
J9-3 U3A J9-2 -12V
+12V
R22 R223
+12V
-12V
R123
Q1
R227
R20 R21
SOFT START FAULT SIGNAL FROM AUXILIARY BOARD, PAGE 1
12VDC / SOFT START FAULT SIGNAL TO MD-0764, PAGE 1
R217
J9-5 -35V
RN4F
R228
Q16
+12V
4 2
5 1
AUXILIARY BOARD
FILAMENT BOARD
RN2D
RN2C
R225
R2
R11
R10
U7
U40
R226
U41
+35V J1-1 J1-4 J1-3 F2 +12V
ONE FILAMENT BOARD IS STANDARD IN INDICO 100 GENERATORS, THE SECOND FILAMENT BOARD IS OPTIONAL
CONTROL BOARD
J1-25
J1-6
J1-10
J1-29
J1-18
J1-19
J2-14
J2-6
J2-15
J2-7
+5V RN7F
J10-25
J10-6 R27, R32
J10-10 +15V
J10-29
J10-18
J10-19
J3-14
J3-6
J3-15
J3-7
13 10
D1 +5V
J1-2 +5V J1-5
F1
-12V -35V
RN11A
R9
DS9 GRN
DS10 RED TO 2.1 V CURRENT SINK 2 4
U9 1 5
RN11I
R14
CONT.
11
12 DRIVER U16
12
11 DRIVER U16
TUBE 1/TUBE 2 SELECT SIGNAL TO MD-0787
+5V
+5V
TP2 J1-6
Q4
FILAMENT BOARD
DS4
P/S ON
-15V 4 2 5 1 U17 DS34 GRN DS35 RED TO 2.1 V CURRENT SINK U27, U19 & U16
Q1 R13
DS23 DS2
DS22
FLUORO
FLUORO
LOW
HIGH
U24 BUFFER
DATA LATCH, BUFFER, & DRIVER DATA LATCH & BUFFER
R33
14
15
16
DATA LATCH U27 BIT 7
17
DATA LATCH U49 BIT 3
THE POWER SUPPLY ON COMMAND (P/S ON) WHICH ENERGIZES K1 / K2 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD IS ISSUED BY THE GENERATOR CPU BOARD AFTER THE +5 VDC RAIL IS DETECTED BY THE CPU. THE DC RAILS, INCLUDING THE +5 VDC RAIL, ARE ESTABLISHED WHEN THE SYSTEM ON COMMAND IS RECEIVED. REFER TO MD-0762.
DATA BUS D0..D7
BIT 0
U27, U19 BIT 2
DRAWN
DATE 10 MAR 2000 ________

SHEET 3 OF 6
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
10 MAR 2000
PAGE 3
J4-12 24 VDC RETURN K3 24 VDC +24V TP13 TP13 U5 +15 V REGULATOR +5V R1 +15V TP1 J4-14
J5-12 J5-14 J5-13 J5-15
REFER TO SYSTEM ON, MD-0762

TP11 TP7 F1 +5V TP8
J4-13 J4-15
+ 5 / -15VDC POWER SUPPLY & REGULATOR (U28, L1, D9-D13, ETC)

TP10
CONSOLE BOARD & LCD DISPLAY ASSEMBLY SHOWN WITHIN DASHED LINES USED ON 31 X 42 CM CONSOLE ONLY. REFER TO PAGE 5 FOR 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE AND FOR RAD-ONLY CONSOLE.
-15V
T2
R81
18 VAC 0V
J1-2 J1-1
F5
D3 C10
TP3 R3
TP2 +12V R2 U3
+5V J16-3 J16-8
TP9
19
F6 J1-3 18 VAC F3 K2 D1 C16
FROM PAGE 1, 2
+5 / +16VDC POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (U47, Q4, T1, D17, D18, ETC.)
U2
TO RAD-ONLY CONSOLE (PAGE 5)
+12 V REGULATOR TP7 R6
300 VAC BACKLIGHT POWER SUPPLY (Q7, Q8, T1, C57, ETC)
J10-1 J10-4
FLUORESCENT LAMP
J1-4 0V J1-5 18 VAC J1-7 110 VAC J1-9 220 VAC F1 F2 F4
LCD DISPLAY ASSEMBLY CONSOLE BOARD (31 X 42 CM CONSOLE)

TP5
-12 V REGULATOR U4 -15 V REGULATOR -12V
R5
R4
220 VAC 110 VAC +24V J2-1 J2-3 J2-6 J1-1 J1-3 J1-6 J1-7 J1-8 J1-9
220 VAC 110 VAC +24VDC
-24V TP6
-15V 110 VAC K1 220 VAC R78 D15 U40 ZERO CROSS DETECTOR
LINE SYNC TO MD-0767
J2-7 J2-8 J2-9
R7 DS1 POWER ON
ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
K1 +24V
+12V J10-13 J10-19 J10-11 J10-16 -12V J10-17 -24V
+12V +24V
K2
-12V -24V
REFER TO MD-0757 (AEC) FOR PINOUTS OF THE DC RAIL CONNECTIONS ON THE AEC BOARD
K3 +24V J17-3 J17-4 +5V +15V +24V +12V -15V J13-9 J13-21 J13-23 J13-11 J13-13 J13-17 J13-15 +5V
AEC BOARD
TO COIL OF POWER DISTRIBUTION RELAY (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) MAXIMUM 100 MA
+15V J3-3 J3-6 J3-1 J13-3 J13-6 J13-1 J13-8 J13-5
+15V R77
TP17 +12V R85 TP19
+15V R78 +5V R75 DS36
+12V R86
+5V R76
+12V J11-1
TP16
DS38
DS33
J3-8 J3-5
J11-5
TO REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL, PAGE 5
R89 R80 -12V TP18 TP21 TP20 DS37 DS39
THE DIGITAL I/O BOARD IS OPTIONAL WITH R&F GENERATORS REFER TO MD-0767 (DIGITAL INTERFACE) FOR PINOUTS OF THE DC RAIL CONNECTIONS SHOWN TO THE RIGHT OF THIS TEXT
-12V -15V TP4 +5V +15V +24V -15V J3-2 J3-4 J3-7 J13-2 J13-4 J13-7 -15V
R81
-15V
-12V
GENERATOR CPU BOARD DIGITAL I/O BOARD

G. SANWALD CHECKED ________ DES.\MFG.\AUTH. HTW DRAWN DATE 10 MAR 2000 ________
R90

SHEET 4 OF 6
10 MAR 2000
+12V J11-1 P1-1
+12V U8 +5 V REGULATOR
+5V
D4
J11-5
P1-5 +5V +12V J1-17 J1-18 J1-15 J1-19 J1-20 J2-17 J2-18 J2-15 J2-19 J2-20 +5V +12V
GENERATOR CPU BOARD (FROM PAGE 4)
REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL BOARD
REMOTE FLUORO DISPLAY BOARD
REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL OPTIONAL WITH INDICO 100 R&F GENERATORS
J5-12 FROM GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD (PAGE 4) J5-14 J5-13 J5-15

TP2 F1
+5V
+5V J8-1 J1-1 J1-2 J1-23 J1-24 J1-25 J1-26
+5V
+ 5 / -20VDC POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (U30, Q5, T1, D7, D8, ETC.)
J8-2 U31 -12 V REGULATOR J8-23 J8-24 J8-25 -12V J8-26
THESE ITEMS ARE USED ON THE 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE ONLY.

-12V
U32
CONSOLE DISPLAY BOARD
300 VAC BACKLIGHT POWER SUPPLY
J10-1 J10-5
FLUORESCENT LAMP
CONSOLE CPU BOARD (23 x 56 CM CONSOLE)
LCD DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
J16-3 FROM GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD (PAGE 4) J16-4
J8-3
TP3 TP7 TP2
+5V
J8-8
F1
+ 5 / -20VDC POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (U12, L1, D2, D3-D7, ETC.)

TP8
+5V
TP9
-20V
19
J5-1 J5-5
THESE ITEMS ARE USED ON THE RAD-ONLY CONSOLE ONLY.
300 VAC BACKLIGHT POWER SUPPLY (Q1, Q2, T1, C36, ETC.)
FLUORESCENT LAMP
CONSOLE BOARD (RAD-ONLY CONSOLE)
LCD DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
DRAWN
DATE 10 MAR 2000 ________

SHEET 5 OF 6
10 MAR 2000
NOTE REFERENCE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
REMARKS
THIS VOLTAGE WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC WHEN THE DC BUS CAPACITORS ARE NOT CHARGED. THIS WILL RISE TO APPROXIMATELY 6 VDC WHEN THE DC BUS CAPACITORS ARE FULLY CHARGED. THE DC BUS CAPACITORS MUST CHARGE WITHIN APPROXIMATELY 0.25 SECONDS OF THE GENERATOR BEING SWITCHED ON. IF THE DC BUS CAPACITORS DO NOT CHARGE NORMALLY THE SOFT START , OK PROTECTION CIRCUIT ENERGIZES RELAY K1 (SEE # 4) AND INHIBITS OPERATION OF THE SOFT START DRIVER CIRCUIT (SEE # 3). LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) COMMANDS THE MAIN CONTACTOR K5 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD TO CLOSE. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = CONTACTOR OPEN. THIS OUPUT WILL NOT SWITCH LOW IF THE DC BUS CAPACITORS ARE NOT CHARGED (SEE # 1 & 2). K1 REMAINS DE-ENERGIZED (CONTACTS AS SHOWN) IF NO SOFT-START FAULT IS DETECTED. THEREFORE, K1 AND K2 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD WILL ENERGIZE WHEN THE GENERATOR IS SWITCHED ON. A SOFT-START FAULT ENERGIZES K1 ON THE AUXILIARY BOARD, DE-ENERGIZING K1 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD. THIS WILL INHIBIT FURTHER DC BUS CHARGING. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = FLUORO FAN(S) ON, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = FLUORO FAN(S) OFF. FAN(S) ARE SWITCHED ON DURING PULSED OR CONTINUOUS FLUORO OPERATION, AND REMAIN ON FOR APPROXIMATELY 20 MINUTES AFTER SWITCHING TO RAD MODE. LOW INDICATES CONTACTOR CLOSED (SEE # 3). THE CONTACTOR CLOSED SIGNAL OCCURS APPROXIMATELY 10 SECONDS AFTER INITIAL GENERATOR TURN-ON, ASSUMING NORMAL DC BUS CHARGING. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = RAD / PULSED FLUORO MODE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = CONTINUOUS FLUORO MODE. USED ON R&F GENERATORS ONLY. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = PULSED FLUORO / LOW POWER MODE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = HIGH POWER RAD MODE. NOT USED ON ALL MODELS, REFER TO MD-0786 FOR DETAILS. 24 VDC (APPROXIMATELY) ENERGIZES K1 AND / OR K2 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD, INITIATING THE POWER-ON SEQUENCE. SEE # 4. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = RAD / PULSED FLUORO MODE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = CONTINUOUS FLUORO MODE. USED ON R&F GENERATORS ONLY. HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = PULSED FLUORO / LOW POWER MODE. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = HIGH POWER RAD MODE. NOT USED ON ALL MODELS, REFER TO MD-0786 FOR DETAILS. DS9 LIT = CONTACTOR CLOSED, DS10 LIT = CONTACTOR NOT CLOSED. DS34 LIT = GENERATOR ON COMMAND ISSUED (CONSOLE PASSED ALL SELF TESTS). DS35 LIT = GENERATOR ON COMMAND NOT ISSUED (DURING CONSOLE SELF TESTS, OR IF SELF TESTS FAILED). DS22 LIT = FLUORO SELECTED, DS23 LIT = RAD SELECTED. DS2 LIT = PULSED FLUORO / LOW POWER MODE. DS4 LIT = HIGH POWER RAD MODE. SEE # 13. D1 LIT INDICATES + OR - 12 VDC FAULT, OR SOFT START FAULT. THE VOLTAGE WAVEFORM AT THIS TEST POINT IS DEPICTED IN FIGURE 1 BELOW. 18 s
4V FIGURE 1 -8 V
DRAWN
DATE 10 MAR 2000 ________

SHEET 6 OF 6
10 MAR 2000
T2
24 VDC RETURN F5 D3 + 24 VDC J17-1 J17-2
*
S3
Q1
LOCKOUT
NORMAL
R15
24 VDC SUPPLY FOR SYSTEM ON/OFF. SEE MD-0788, PAGE 4
Q2
D4
K3
S1 OFF
Q3
R13
D16 K2
REFER TO DC BUS & POWER DISTRIBUTION, MD-0788, PAGE 4
P1-3
J3-3
J5-10
J4-10
31 X 42 CM CONSOLE
DS1
S2 ON
K1
ON OFF
P1-2
J3-2
J5-11
J4-11
P1-1
J3-1
J5-12
J4-12 JW1
23 X 56 CM CONSOLE
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
CONSOLE BOARD
JUMPER POSITION: TO ENERGIZE K1 ONLY WHEN THE CONSOLE IS SWITCHED ON JUMPER JW1 PINS 1-2 TO ENERGIZE K1 AT ALL TIMES THA T THE GENERATOR AC MAINS IS ON JUMPER JW1 PINS 2-3 (K1 SWITCHES THE 110 & 220 VAC SUPPLIES TO THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD)
P1-3
J2-3
J3-9
J6-9
J5-10
J4-10
ON OFF
P1-2
J2-2
J3-7
J6-7
J5-11
J4-11
P1-1
J2-1
J3-5
J6-5
J5-12
J4-12
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
DISPLAY BOARD
CONSOLE CPU BOARD
P1-16
J7-16
J8-7
J16-7
RAD-ONLY CONSOLE
ON OFF
P1-15
J7-15
J8-6
J16-6
P1-17
J7-17
J8-3
J16-3
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
CONSOLE BOARD
TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE
USE DRAWING DC BUS & POWER DISTRIBUTION, MD-0788, IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS DOCUMENT
P1-2
J5-2
J2-10
J4-10
* TO CONNECT AN EMERGENCY-OFF SWITCH, REMOVE JUMPER FROM J17-1 TO J17-2. THEN CONNECT THE EMERGENCY OFF SWITCH TO J17-1 AND J17-2.
ON OFF
P1-4
J5-4
P1-3
J5-3
J2-11
J4-11
J2-12
J4-12
KEYPAD ASSEMBLY
TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE BOARD
G. SANWALD CHECKED_________ DES.\MFG.\AUTH. L. FOSKIN
DRAWN
DATE 02 JUN 2000 _________
SYSTEM ON MD-0762 REV E

SHEET 1 OF 2
02 JUN 2000
NOTE REFERENCE
1 2 3
REMARKS
MOMENTARILY PRESSING ON CONNECTS THIS LINE TO 24 VDC RETURN. THIS LATCHES RELAY DRIVERS ON THE GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD, ENERGIZING K2 AND K3, AND POSSIBLY K1 (DEPENDING ON JW1 SETTING). SEE NOTE ADJACENT TO JW1 ON THIS DOCUMENT. MOMENTARILY PRESSING OFF CONNECTS THIS LINE TO 24 VDC RETURN. THIS UNLATCHES RELAY DRIVERS ON THE GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD, DE-ENERGIZING K2 AND K3, AND POSSIBLY K1 (DEPENDING ON JW1 SETTING). DS1 LIT INDICATES THE PRESENCE OF THE 24 VDC SUPPLY SHOWN. THIS 24 VDC SUPPLY WILL BE PRESENT IF THE GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO A LIVE AC MAINS SUPPLY.
G. SANWALD CHECKED_________ DES.\MFG.\AUTH. L. FOSKIN
DRAWN
DATE 02 JUN 2000 _________
SYSTEM ON MD-0762 REV E

SHEET 2 OF 2
02 JUN 2000
+24V
NOTE *
TB1-5 J2-15 J2-16 J2-13 J2-14 J2-11 J2-12 J2-24 J2-25 J2-22 J2-23 J2-21 J9-15
TABLE STEPPER INPUT
4
TB1-4 TB2-5 J9-16 +24V J9-13 +24V TB2-4 TB2-7 J9-14
1
1
JW7
5 U7, U12, U18, U19, U25
NOTE * NOTE * 4 3 2 1
1
R53
U21 R54 2 4
BUCKY CONTACTS
1
1
JW10
5 U31
JW9
R55 5 R56
J9-11 J9-12 J9-24 J9-25 R66 R67 U29 2 4
COLLIMATOR INTERLOCK
4 +24V
TB2-6 TB3-5
NOTE * 4 3 2 1 JW2 SEE MD-0761

R23 U8 U10 R21 J12-2 J6-2 D0 J12-1 J6-1
REMOTE TOMO SELECT
TB3-4 TB3-7
J9-22 J9-23 J9-21 U14 R29 R38 +24V 1 5 +24V 2 4 1 5
TOMO EXPOSURE
TB3-6 TB4-4
D1
ROOM DOOR INTERLOCK
+24V
TB4-5 TB4-6 J2-20 J9-20 R34 TB4-7 TB4-8 J2-19 J9-19 R33 TB4-9
NOTE *
U13 +24V R32 U9 R22 2 4
D2
J12-3
J6-3
1
1
JW3
5 D3 J12-4 J6-4
THERMAL SWITCH 2
R36
T2 FROM MD-0787 R37 T1 FROM MD-0787
U16
BUFFER, DRIVER AND ADDRESS DECODER CIRCUITS
D4
J12-5
J6-5
THERMAL SWITCH 1
TB5-12
J2-17 J2-18 J2-9 J2-10 J2-8 J2-7 J2-5 J2-6 J2-3 J2-4
J9-17 +24V J9-18 J9-9 J9-10 J9-8 J9-7 J9-5 J9-6 R71 U30, U42, U44 R70 +24V R68 U27 R69 2 4 +24V
D5
J12-6
J6-6
MULTIPLE SPOT EXPOSURE
TB5-11 TB6-4
NOTE * NOTE *
R35
1
1
JW6
5
D6
J12-7
J6-7
I.I. SAFETY
TB6-3 TB6-5
1
1
JW8
U20 5 R52
D7 2 4
J12-8
J6-8
REMOTE FLUORO EXPOSURE
**
TB6-6 TB6-8
DATA BUS DO..D7
REMOTE PREP
TB6-7 TB6-10
+24V
NOTE *
J9-3
REMOTE EXPOSURE
4
TB6-9 J9-4 +24V
1
1
JW14
5
NOTE * 4
R77 U41, U43
R75 U28 R74
TP14
J2-1 J2-2
J9-1 J9-2
JW15
**
R76
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
THIS PAGE SHOWS THE ROOM INTERFACE INPUTS. ROOM INTERFACE OUTPUTS ARE SHOWN ON PAGE 2
*
24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT POSITION FOR JW2, JW3, JW6, JW7, JW8, JW9, JW10, JW14, JW15 SHOWN. JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 2-3; 24 VDC APPLIED EXTERNALLY ACTIVATES THE INPUT(S) BY ENERGIZING THE APPROPRIATE OPTO-COUPLER.
*
DRY CONTACT INPUT POSITION FOR JW2, JW3, JW6, JW7, JW8, JW9, JW10, JW14, JW15 SHOWN. JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 1-2 AND 3-4; AN EXTERNAL DRY CONTACT CLOSURE ACTIVATES THE INPUT(S) BY ENERGIZING THE APPROPRIATE OPTO-COUPLER.
** ADDITIONAL CIRCUITS ARE USED IN THE AREAS INDICATED **. THESE CIRCUITS ARE NOT
RELEVANT TO THIS ROOM INTERFACE DIAGRAM, HOWEVER, THEY ARE PART OF THE X-RAY EXPOSURE FUNCTION AND ARE SHOWN ON MD-0761
DRAWN
DATE 13 APR 2000 14 APR 2000 13 APR 2000
ROOM INTERFACE MD-0763 REV C

SHEET 1 OF 2
FOR +24 VDC SOURCE, REFER TO MD-0788, PAGE 4, ON GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD U6, U7, U11, U12 U24, U25, U34
+24V J9-40 J9-39 J2-40 J2-39 J2-30 K1
+24V C2 R2 K1
JW12
TB1-2 TB1-1
TOMO / BUCKY 4 SELECT
DRIVE 1
J9-30
C1
JW1
8
K2
R1
JW9
TB1-11 TB1-12
DRY * LIVE *
DRIVE 2 J9-29 J2-29 K2
BUCKY 3 SELECT
TB11
DRIVE 3 J6-1 J12-1 D0 J9-27 J2-27 K4 J9-28 J2-28 K3
JW2
K6 K3 K4
1 2 3 4 5
K3 C3 R3
DRY * LIVE *
DRIVE 4 J6-2 J12-2 D1
K1 K2
JW11
TB2-2 TB2-1
BUCKY 2 SELECT
DRIVE 5 J6-3 J12-3 D2
J9-34
J2-34 K5
C4 220 VAC
JW3
8
K4
R4
JW10
TB2-11 TB2-12 TB3-1
TB10 1
DRY * LIVE *
BUCKY 1 SELECT COLLIMATOR BYPASS TOMO / BUCKY START
DRIVE 6 J6-4 J12-4 D3
J9-32
J2-32 K6
2 3 4 JW4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K5
TB3-2 TB3-11 TB3-12
J6-5
J12-5
D4
ADDRESS DECODERS, BUFFER, REGISTER, AND DRIVER CIRCUITS
DRY * LIVE *
DRIVE 7
J9-31
J2-31 K7
5
C6 110 VAC
JW14
R6
DRIVE 8 J6-6 J12-6 D5
J9-35
J2-35 K8
TB9 1 2
K6 R5
C5
K8
TB4-11 TB4-12
ROOM LIGHT TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 INDICATOR (COMM) TUBE 1 INDICATOR TUBE 2 INDICATOR
JW13 JW5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K7
DRIVE 9 J6-7 J12-7 D6
J9-36
J2-36 K9
3 4 5
TB4-1 TB4-3 TB4-2

+24V
DRY * LIVE *
DRIVE 10 J6-8 J12-8 D7
J9-37
J2-37 K10 24 VDC
TB8
DRIVE 11 DATA BUS DO..D7 DRIVE 12 J9-33 J2-33 K12 J9-38 J2-38 K11
NOTE THE FOLLOWING IF USING JW1, JW2, JW3, JW4, OR JW5 IN THE LIVE CONTACT POSITION: A JUMPER WIRE MUST BE CONNECTED TO TB11 PIN 1, 2, 3, 4 OR 5 AS APPROPRIATE FROM TB8, TB9, OR TB10 IN ORDER TO SUPPLY 24 VDC, 110 VAC, OR 220 VAC FROM THE SELECTED OUTPUT JW6 1 2 3 4
TB5-2
K9
1 2 3 4 5
TB5-4 TB5-3
MAG 3
DRY ** LIVE 24 VDC **

K10
TB5-7 TB5-6 TB5-5
MAG 2
DRIVE 13
J9-26
J2-26 K13
TB7 1 2 3 4 5 JW7 1 2 3 4
+24V
K12 K11
TB5-8 TB5-10 TB5-9

K13 +24V
DRIVE 1 TO DRIVE 13 = LOW ENERGIZES THE RELAYS
MAG 1
TB5-1 TB6-1
DRY ** LIVE 24 VDC ** JW8 1 2 3 4
TB6-2 TB6-11
ALE OUTPUT SPARE OUTPUT
DRY **
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
LIVE 24 VDC **
TB6-12
THIS PAGE SHOWS THE ROOM INTERFACE OUTPUTS. ROOM INTERFACE INPUTS ARE SHOWN ON PAGE 1
LIVE CONTACT
LIVE CONTACT
**
LIVE CONTACT 24VDC
LIVE CONTACT 24VDC
DRY CONTACT DRY CONTACT DRY CONTACT POSITION FOR JW1 TO JW5 SHOWN. JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 4-6 DRY CONTACT LIVE CONTACT POSITION FOR JW1 TO JW5 SHOWN. JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 6-8 DRY CONTACT POSITION FOR JW6 TO JW8 SHOWN. JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 2-3
DRY CONTACT LIVE CONTACT 24VDC POSITION FOR JW6 TO JW8 SHOWN. JUMPERS CONNECT PINS 1-2 AND 3-4
DRAWN
DATE 13 APR 2000 14 APR 2000 13 APR 2000
ROOM INTERFACE MD-0763 REV C

SHEET 2 OF 2
+12V JUMPER POSITION: R&F GENERATORS (WITH THERMAL SWITCH) JUMPER JW4 PINS 1-2 (ON) RAD GENERATORS (NO THERMAL SWITCH) JUMPER JW4 PINS 2-3 (OFF) R39 D42 R41 THERMAL CUTOFF OPEN R40
JW4
ON OFF 3 1 2
+12V
4
J2-4
Q10
R43
J2-3 THERMAL SWITCH ON INVERTER HEATSINK (R&F UNITS ONLY) +12V 1
+12V
D26
5
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 TELLBACK LOGIC CIRCUIT (U9, U10, R84) R7
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH & THERMOSTAT OPEN SIGNAL TO MD-0764 AND MD-0761, PAGE 2
R6
5 U7
Q8
+5V R8 RN7H +5V RN11H DS5 DS6
2 FOR TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SOLENOID DRIVE CIRCUITS SEE MD-0788, PAGE 1
INVERTER BOARD
1 5 U8 2 4 TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SELECT COMMAND FROM MD-0788, PAGE 1 +12V R28 J1-2 J1-1 J8-2 J8-1 J2-5 J2-13 J3-5 J3-13
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SELECT SIGNAL FROM MD-0788, PAGE 3 U35 DECODER/ DEMULTIPLEXER 1 5 U3 2 4
TUBE 2
TUBE 1
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 RELAY CONTACTS (SHOWN IN TUBE 1 POSITION)
J5-1 J5-2
J11-1 J11-2
J4-20 J4-19
J4-20 J4-19 R38
D39 TUBE 2 SELECTED
OPTO COUPLER ON = TUBE 2 SELECTED
H.T. TANK
POWER INPUT BOARD
AUXILIARY BOARD
CONTROL BOARD
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
REFER TO MD-0763 (ROOM INTERFACE) FOR INTERLOCKS ACCESSED VIA THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
TUBE 1 STATOR TERMINAL BLOCK
J5-1 TUBE 1 THERMOSTAT TO T1 ON MD-0763, PAGE 1
NOTE REFERENCE
1 2 3 4 5
REMARKS
LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 10 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED. LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED. DS6 LIT INDICATES TUBE 1 SELECTED. DS5 LIT INDICATES TUBE 2 SELECTED. NEITHER LED LIT INDICATES A MISMATCH BETWEEN THE TUBE THAT HAS BEEN REQUESTED, AND THE TUBE THAT HAS ACTUALLY BEEN SELECTED (SEE # 5). LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = INVERTER THERMAL SWITCH CLOSED (OR JUMPERED VIA JW4), HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = INVERTER THERMAL SWITCH OPEN, OR JW4 JUMPER OMITTED ON RAD GENERATORS. THE TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 TELLBACK LOGIC CIRCUIT ENSURES THAT THE TUBE ACTUALLY SELECTED MATCHES THE TUBE THAT WAS REQUESTED. FOR EXAMPLE, IF TUBE 2 WAS REQUESTED BY THE CONSOLE BUT TUBE 1 WAS ACTUALLY SELECTED BY THE H.T. TANK, THE LOGIC CIRCUIT WILL INDICATE A FAULT CONDITION.
THERMAL SWITCH
J5-2
TUBE 2 STATOR TERMINAL BLOCK

J5-3 TUBE 2 THERMOSTAT TO T2 ON MD-0763, PAGE 1 J5-4
THERMAL SWITCH
DRAWN
DATE 18 MAY 2000 18 MAY 2000 18 MAY 2000
INTERLOCKS & TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 TELLBACK MD-0787 REV C

SHEET 1 OF 1
J1-1 J1-2 J1-3 +5V +5V J1-4 J1-5 J1-6 DS15 DS19 J1-7 LS1 R46 J1-8 J1-9 R43 J1-10 J1-11 U11 RS-232 TRANSMITTER / RECEIVER RN3E RN3F RN3G RN3H U7 J11-3 J11-7 J11-2 J11-8 P1-3 P1-7 P1-2 P1-8 RS-232 RECEIVER / DRIVER J1-12
J2-1 J2-2 J2-3 J2-4 J2-5 J2-6 J2-7 J2-8 J2-9 J2-10 J2-11 J2-12 J2-13 J2-14 DATA LATCHES (U6-U9) DRIVERS (U1-U4, U10)
TXD
RXD
LED DISPLAYS
(7 SEGMENT DISPLAYS & STATUS LEDs) DS1-DS23
U20
UART
MICROCONTROLLER (CPU, EPROM **,

ADDRESS DECODERS & LOGIC CIRCUITS) U1, U2, U3, U4 ** U3 IS THE EPROM.
J1-13 J1-14
U5 J1-1 P1-1 P1-2 P1-3 P1-4 P1-5 P1-6 P1-7 P1-8 P1-9 P1-10 FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD SWITCHES
DATA BUS D0..D7
DATA & ADDRESS BUS
BUFFER
J1-2 J1-3 J1-4 J1-5 J1-6 J1-7 J1-8 J1-9 J1-10
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL BOARD
REMOTE FLUORO DISPLAY BOARD REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL UNIT
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
LIMITED TROUBLESHOOTING CAN BE PERFORMED ON THE REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL ASSEMBLY IN THE FIELD. THE DC RAILS CAN BE CHECKED (REFER TO MD-0788), AND THE TXD AND RXD LEDs ON THE GENERATOR CPU BOARD MAY BE OBSERVED (THESE WILL FLASH ON AND OFF TO INDICATE DATA FLOW). MEANINGFUL MEASUREMENTS CANNOT BE MADE ON COMMUNICATIONS, DATA, AND CONTROL LINES.
G. SANWALD CHECKED _________ DES.\MFG.\AUTH. L. FOSKIN
DRAWN
DATE 02 JUN 2000 _________
REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL MD-0766 REV C

SHEET 1 OF 1
02 JUN 2000
DIGITAL IMAGING ABS FROM MD-0767, PAGE 1 JW13 * JW12 * 1 R63 2 JW11 * 3 4 R64 R44 2 3
+
JW23 INSTALLED FOR UNITS FITTED WITH ANALOG POTENTIOMETER, OMITTED FOR UNITS WITH DIGITAL POTENTIOMETER
R43 JW21 * 1 2 1 3 R45 6 5

+
1
R27 JW4 * R42 D13 7 R41 R48 9 Set ABS gain 10 R51
+
JW23 C19 R52 13 12 + RN5A R56
TP13 TP15
R62
R65
R58
R54
U37 SAMPLE AND HOLD CIRCUIT (U47, R95, C102, ETC.)
U17A
J11-3
J7-3
14
A/D CONVERTER
U17B
U17C R31
U23D
J7-4 J7-10 R118
R61
+12V
**
JW24 (IN) JW25 (OUT)
TP8 C22
DIGITAL POTENTIOMETER U49
J7-12
R50
PMT / PHOTO DIODE / PROPORTIONAL DC VIDEO INPUT & AEC OUTPUT
J7-5 TP9 J7-7 -12V CONTROL SIGNALS FROM DATA BUS ADDRESS REGISTERS (U24, U25)
TP14
1 J8
**
JW19 * C21 R28 R47 13 12 + R26 D11 14 GAIN CONTROL SIGNAL TO MD-0757 R49 U34 DRIVER
DATA BUS D0..D7
COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT
2 3
C20
U17D R46
REFER TO CHAPTER 3E OF SERVICE MANUAL FOR DETAILS ON ABS INPUT CONNECTIONS
R30
JW20 *
JW5 *
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
* REFER TO CHAPTER 3E OF SERVICE MANUAL TO DETERMINE REQUIRED JUMPER POSITIONS FOR THESE CONNECTORS. ** ANALOG POTENTIOMETER R48 IS USED ON GENERATORS WITH THE CONVENTIONAL (CONTINUOUS) FLUOROSCOPY OPTION. THE DIGITAL POTENTIOMETER IS FITTED ON GENERATORS WITH THE PULSED FLUORO OPTION. THE DIGITAL POTENTIOMETER IS ADJUSTED VIA THE ABS SETUP MENU ON THE CONTROL CONSOLE.
NOTE REFERENCE
1
REMARKS
A DC VOLTAGE WILL BE PRESENT FROM TP8 (TO TP9 OR GROUND), AND FROM TP13 TO TP15 WHEN OPERATING WITH ABS ON. THIS VOLTAGE WILL TYPICALLY RANGE FROM 0.5 TO 5 VDC, AND WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE NOMINAL DOSE VALUE IN THE ABS SETUP MENU.
G. SANWALD CHECKED KVR DES.\MFG.\AUTH. L. FOSKIN
DRAWN
DATE 16 MAY 2000
ABS
(AUTOMATIC BRIGHTNESS STABILIZATION) 16 MAY 2000
16 MAY 2000
MD-0758 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 1
+24V
+12V J10-13
GAIN CONTROL SIGNAL FROM MD-0758
(NOT USED AT THIS TIME)
J10-19 J10-16 J10-11
-24V U25, U23 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 RN14B RN14A RN14D RN14C RN14F RN14E RN14H RN14G J6-1 J6-2 J6-3 J6-4 J6-5 J6-6 J6-7 J6-8 J12-1 J12-2 J12-3 J12-4 J12-5 J12-6 J12-7 J12-8 BUFFER & DATA LATCH 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DRIVER U33 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 +5V
-12V J10-2 J10-3 J10-4 J10-5 J10-7 J10-8 J10-9 J10-6
4 4 4 4 5 5 5 7
CH 4 SELECT CH 3 SELECT CH 2 SELECT CH 1 SELECT L FIELD SELECT M FIELD SELECT R FIELD SELECT START
CONTINUED ON PAGES 3 TO 5
R88
+5V
1
U28 CPU 8 U45C 9 10 R100 J7-19 J11-19 TP10
R87
Q6
R86
R99
6
R85
2
TP9 TP12
Q5
PTSTOP
J10-1
R44
R42
TP11 J11-4
2
PTRAMP
J10-15
U37 A/D CONVERTER 8

+
9 10 RN5B J7-4 J11-1
U23C
TP12 PTREF +12V J10-10
R117
J10-17
4 R30 2 J7-1 U18 D/A CONVERTER 9
5 1
R89
TP4
U46
Q7
10 +
R116
+12V
U14C
-12V
J14-6
J14-7
J14-14
J14-3
J14-1
J14-2
J14-4
J14-12
J14-13
J14-15
J14-8
J14-9
J14-10
J14-11
DATA BUS DO..D7
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
TO A EC DETECTOR CIRCUIT CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
G. SANWALD CHECKED __________ DES.\MFG.\AUTH. L. FOSKIN
DRAWN
DATE 02 JUN 2000 __________
AEC MD-0757 REV C

SHEET 1 OF 5
02 JUN 2000
FROM GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD, PAGE 1
J2-3
J2-4
J2-1
J2-6
J2-7
J2-14
J2-2
J2-12
J2-13
J2-15
J2-8
J2-9
J2-10
J2-11
OPTO-COUPLER "ON" = AEC START
S1 +8 VDC REGULATOR CIRCUIT
+8V -8 VDC REGULATOR CIRCUIT -8V
ANALOG SWITCH J1-1 J1-2 COMPARATOR & DRIVER CIRCUIT
PHOTO DIODE DETECTORS
J1-3 J1-4
INTEGRATOR CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT
PHOTO DIODE DETECTOR UNIT
A2EC2 DETECTOR CIRCUIT
OPTIONAL A EC
DRAWN
DATE 02 JUN 2000 __________
AEC MD-0757 REV C

SHEET 2 OF 5
02 JUN 2000
+12V DS1
+12V DS2
+12V DS3
+12V DS4
L SELECT R SELECT
J1-1 J1-2 J1-3 J1-4 J1-5 J1-6 J1 (shell)
AEC CH 1
ANODE CATH (L) CATH (R) CATH (M) GROUND GROUND ANODE CATH (L) CATH (M) CATH (R)
R37
R38
R39
R40
M SELECT
CHAMBER 4 SELECT CHAMBER 3 SELECT CHAMBER 2 SELECT CHAMBER 1 SELECT
J7-2 J7-3 J7-4 J7-5
J5-2 J5-3 J5-4 J5-5
D6 U2D D12 U2C D10 U2B D11 U2A
R43 R31
1
R75
+
R74
2 3 R73
R72
R71
J11-1 JW1 J11-2 J11-3 J11-4 J11-5
U11A
R30 R29
R28 R32 R42 R41 R1
D13
START LEFT FIELD SELECT MIDDLE FIELD SELECT RIGHT FIELD SELECT J7-6 J7-7 J7-8 J7-9 J5-6 J5-7 J5-8 J5-9 +12V
D16
D15
D14
U6A
L SELECT R SELECT J2-1 J2-2 J2-3 J2-4 J2-5 J2-6 J2 (shell)
AEC CH 2
+12V +12V
M SELECT
R69 R61 Q1
7
R76
+
R77
6 5 R59
R87 R54 Q2
R63 R55 Q3
R58
R57
J12-1 JW2 J12-2 J12-3 J12-4 J12-5
R62
D24
R22
+12V R45
R82
FROM PAGE 1
R64
R SELECT
D30 D18 D19
U6B
L SELECT R SELECT J3-1 J3-2 J3-3 J3-4 J3-5 J3-6 J3 (shell)
R2
M SELECT
R86
L SELECT
U11B
AEC CH 3
DS5 R11
M SELECT
R26 R21
J7-13 J7-14 J7-17 J7-18 J7-11 J7-12 J5-13 J5-14 J5-17 J5-18 -12V U2F +12V U2E D20 1 U1A R3 SAMPLE & HOLD
+
R20
2 3 R19
R18
R17
J13-1 JW3 J13-2 J13-3 J13-4 J13-5
TP2
TP4
J5-11 J5-12
R51
U12 C37 U6C

1
+
TP1 3
PT RAMP PT REF PT STOP J7-15 J7-10 J7-1 J5-15 J5-10 J5-1
2 TP3
R14 R88
2 3 R80
R23
+ +
R60
R81
L SELECT R SELECT M SELECT
J4-1 J4-2 J4-3 J4-4 J4-5 J4-6 J4 (shell)
AEC CH 4
U10B
U10A
U9B
6
TP5
D31 R84
3 2 R50 R4 7
R5
+
R6
6 5 R33
R56
R70
J14-1 JW4 J14-2 J14-3 J14-4 J14-5
R85
U1B
7 D33
U13
AEC BOARD
U6D
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 733347

REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION DETAILS.
DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. SWITCHES THAT ARE SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE LOGIC LEVEL (0V = OFF, 12V = ON).
DRAWN
DATE 02 JUN 2000 __________
AEC MD-0757 REV C

SHEET 3 OF 5
02 JUN 2000
+500V +12V RN6B +12V RN6A +12V RN6C +12V RN6D +12V RN6E
12
TP22
+12V
TP10
RIGHT JW8 1 2 3 LEFT
+/-300V H.V. +45V START MIDDLE J11-4 J11-3 J11-2 J11-6 L/R R/L J11-1
J1-2 J1-1 J1-3 J1-8 J1-10 J1-9 J1-11 J1-12 J1-7
+/-300 V
AEC CH 1
+/-300/+500 V +45 V START M FIELD SEL L FIELD SEL R FIELD SEL SIGNAL GROUND
DS5 CHAMBER 4 SELECT CHAMBER 3 SELECT CHAMBER 2 SELECT CHAMBER 1 SELECT START J10-2 J10-3 J10-4 J10-5 J10-6 J5-2 J5-3 J5-4 J5-5 J5-6 D6
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
TP24
RN4A
CH 4 U3C
+/-300V
H.V.
TP9
+12V +24V
D5 U3B D12 U3F D4 U3D D11 U3E U3A
RN3D
CH 3
RN3C
CH 2
CONVERTER CIRCUIT 12 VDC TO 45 VDC AND 300 / 500 VDC INCLUDES U7 AND T1
JW7 1 2 3
R66
TP11
J11-5
13
+45V
R89
J11-9
RN3A
CH 1
*
D16 Q1
STRT
CH 1 S1D R90
+/-300V JW6 1 2 3 LEFT H.V. +45V START MIDDLE J12-4 J12-3 J12-2 J12-6 L/R R/L J12-1
R79
RN3B
*
+12V +24V
SET VALUE
START +12V +24V
11
RIGHT
J2-2 J2-1 J2-3 J2-8 J2-10 J2-9 J2-11 J2-12 J2-7
+/-300 V
AEC CH 2
+12V +24V
LEFT FIELD SELECT MIDDLE FIELD SELECT RIGHT FIELD SELECT
J10-7 J10-8 J10-9
J5-7 J5-8 J5-9
*
D30 Q2 D40
*
D65 Q3
*
Q4
JW5 1 2 3
TP12
J12-5
LEFT
MIDDLE
RIGHT
13
CH 2
R67
J12-9
FROM PAGE 1 TP18

J10-19 J5-19 RIGHT
S1C
R68
+/-300V J3-2 J13-1 J3-1 J3-3 J13-4 J13-3 J13-2 J13-6 L/R R/L J3-8 J3-10 J3-9 J3-11 J3-12 J3-7 +/-300 V
AEC CH 3
TP17
+24V
2
-
TP20
8
STRT
CH 1
TP23
J10-13 J10-17 J5-13 J5-17 +12V
R1
S2A
CH 2 LEFT
JW4 1 2 3
H.V. +45V START MIDDLE
TP5
TP6
TP7
+ +
S4 C11 R32 R2 S2B
U4B
U4A
*
C4 R3 S2C
CH 3
TP4
J10-11 J10-16 J5-11 J5-16 -12V
JW3 1 2 3
TP21
-24V
CH 1
CH 4
R53
TP13
J13-5
S3A R11 S3B

CH 2
R4
S2D CH 3
13
R57
J13-9
U2B
TP3 3
PT RAMP PT REF PT STOP J10-15 J10-10 J10-1 J5-15 J5-10 J5-1
TP19
S1B
R58
+/-300V J4-2 J14-1 J4-1 J4-3 J14-4 J14-3 J14-2 J14-6 L/R R/L J4-8 J4-10 J4-9 J4-11 J4-12 J4-7 +/-300 V
TP2 10
RIGHT
R54 RN4C R12 S3C R13 D27 S3D R56 R14

7
+
AEC CH 4
CH 3
JW2 1 2 3
+ +
H.V. +45V START MIDDLE
CH 4
LEFT JW1 1 2 3
U2A RN4B
U1A
STRT
3 2
TP14
SAMPLE & HOLD
J14-5
13
CH 4 S1A R36
R35
J14-9
D22
U6
AEC BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 734614

REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION DETAILS. THE -24V OUTPUTS ON J1 TO J4 AND THE +/- 12V OUTPUTS ON J1 TO J4 AND J11 TO J14 ARE NOT SHOWN ON THIS DIAGRAM. THESE ARE DETAILED ON THE CONNECTOR PIN OUT TABLES IN CHAPTER 3D.
DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. SWITCHES THAT ARE SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE LOGIC LEVEL. DESIGNATES A FACTORY CONFIGURED LOGIC OR SIGNAL LEVEL. AEC BOARDS ARE CONFIGURED AT THE TIME OF ORDER TO BE COMPATIBLE WITH THE SPECIFIED AEC CHAMBER(S). FOR EXAMPLE, THE START SIGNAL TO THE CHAMBER MAY BE FACTORY CONFIGURED TO BE ACTIVE LOW (0 V), ACTIVE HIGH +12 V, OR ACTIVE HIGH +24 V.
DRAWN
DATE 02 JUN 2000 __________
AEC MD-0757 REV C

SHEET 4 OF 5
02 JUN 2000
FOR UNIVERSAL AEC ASSEMBLY 734630, REFER TO SCHEMATICS 734628, 728401
NOTE REFERENCE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
REMARKS
HIGH (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = NO PTSTOP (PHOTOTIMER STOP) SIGNAL RECEIVED FROM AEC BOARD. LOW (APPOXIMATELY 0 VDC) = PTSTOP SIGNAL RECEIVED FROM AEC BOARD. PTRAMP IS THE AEC RAMP FROM THE AEC BOARD. THE RAMP SLOPE AND MAGNITUDE WILL DEPEND ON THE AEC TECHNIQUE IN USE. THE MAXIMUM POSSIBLE RAMP MAGNITUDE IS 5 TO 10 VDC, DEPENDING ON MODEL. PTREF (THE AEC REFERENCE VOLTAGE FROM THE CONSOLE) WILL VARY FROM 0 TO 10 VDC, DEPENDING ON TECHNIQUE. HIGH (> 10 VDC) = AEC CHANNEL DESELECTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = AEC CHANNEL SELECTED. HIGH (> 10 VDC) = L, M, R, FIELD DESELECTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = L, M, R, FIELD SELECTED. HIGH (> 10 VDC) = NO AEC STOP REQUEST (INSUFFICIENT RAMP TO TERMINATE AEC EXPOSURE), LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = AEC STOP REQUESTED (AEC EXPOSURE TERMINATED). HIGH (> 10 VDC) = AEC START NOT REQUESTED, LOW (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = AEC START REQUESTED. THE VOLTAGE AND MAGNITUDE OF THE RAMP AT THIS POINT SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY THE SAME AS AT TP17 ON THIS BOARD (NOTE REFERENCE 2) . THIS WILL BE A NEGATIVE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP DEPENDING ON AEC CHAMBER OUTPUT. THE MAGNITUDE OF THE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP IS DEPENDENT ON THE AEC TECHNIQUE IN USE. , THIS WILL BE A POSITIVE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP, DEPENDING ON AEC CHAMBER OUTPUT. THE MAGNITUDE OF THE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP IS DEPENDENT ON THE AEC TECHNIQUE IN USE. R79 ADJUSTS THE +45V, +300V, AND +500V OUTPUTS FROM THE DC TO DC CONVERTER CIRCUIT. REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR DETAILS. THE VOLTAGE AT TP22 SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 1 (BELOW). THE MAXIMUM DUTY CYCLE WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 45%, DEPENDING ON THE LOAD ON THE HV SUPPLIES. THE VOLTAGE AT THIS TEST POINT IS THE OUTPUT OF THE AEC CHAMBER. REFER TO THE AEC CHAMBER MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR DETAILS.
200 kHz 12 VDC 0 VDC
FIGURE 1
DRAWN
DATE 02 JUN 2000 __________
AEC MD-0757 REV C

SHEET 5 OF 5
02 JUN 2000
CONSOLE CABLE
* FOR RS-232: U1, U2, AND R16 ARE NOT FITTED. FOR RS-422: U12, RN3C, RN3D, RN3A, AND RN3B ARE NOT FITTED.
+5V DS3
+5V DS1
RXD
R18
TXD
R15 U20
J5-1
J4-1 J4-2
J11-7 J11-18
J7-7 J7-18
RXD (RS-232) CTS (RS-232)
* 14 RN3C 3 * 13 RN3D 4
16 15
U12 2 4 3 5 RS-232 15 13 14 12
* RN3A
1 2
* RN3B
J5-4 J5-5 J5-3 DS40 +5V DS41 +5V DS42
J4-4 J4-5 J4-3
J11-6 J11-17
J7-6 J7-17
TXD (RS-232) RTS (RS-232)
* U2
J11-11 J11-10 J7-11 J7-10 TXD- (RS-422) TXD+ (RS-422) 7 6 RS-422 4 O/P
+5V
SERIAL PORT FOR REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL. REFER TO MD-0766 FOR INDICO 100, OR SCHEMATIC 734571 FOR MILLENIA GENERATORS.
C40 Y2
DUART
TP3
1 Hz
R101
TXD
R114
RXD
R115 J11-13 U23 11 14 R122 J16-1 J11-12 J11-9 J7-13 J7-12 J7-9 RXD- (RS-422) RXD+ (RS-422) 7 6
* U1
RS-422 I/P 1
C35
U18
* R16
+5V DS44 +5V DS43
12 CPU 9 RS-232
13 8
R123 R124
FROM RAD-ONLY CONSOLE (PAGE 2)
J16-2 J16-3
RXD
R93 J1 U42 5 RN12E 12 6 RN12F 11 7 RN12G 10 8 RN12H 9 R72 3 5 2 4 RS-232 14 12 15 13 +5V DS32 -12V J2 RS-232 (LAPTOP) U38 1 RN12A 16 2 RN12B 15 3 RN12C 14 4 RN12D 13 3 5 2 4 RS-232 14 12 15 13
TXD
R98
U31
3 7
J6-1
2
J6-2
8 ALTERNATE CONSOLE CONNECTIONS

J6-3 DS44 DS43 J6-4
+5V DS29 DUART
+5V
+5V
RXD
R71
TXD
R69
TXD
R117
RXD
R116
3 7
U27 11 10 12 14 7 13 8 RS-232 R126 R127 R128 R129
J2
3 7 2 8 5
TXD 2 RTS 8 RXD 5 CTS
DATA BUS D0..D7
THIS SHEET SHOWS THE CONSOLE BOARD FOR INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH THE 31 X 42 CM CONSOLE. REFER TO PAGE 2 FOR INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH THE 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE AND THE RAD-ONLY CONSOLE.
OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS PORTS ARE SHOWN ON PAGE 2

DATA BUS D0..D7
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
CONSOLE BOARD (INDICO 100) REFER TO PAGE 3 FOR MILLENIA GENERATORS.

G. SANWALD CHECKED J. BARNES DES.\MFG.\AUTH. L. FOSKIN DRAWN DATE 13 DEC 2001 9 JAN 2002 9 JAN 2002
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS MD-0829 REV D

SHEET 1 OF 3
COMMUNICATIONS PORTS SHOWN BELOW ARE OPTIONAL

* FOR RS-232: U5, U9, JP2, AND R6 ARE NOT FITTED. FOR RS-422: U6, RN4A, RN4C, RN4D AND R7 ARE NOT FITTED. * U9
6 4 RS-422 O/P 7 J5-1 J5-2 J16 U50 3 RN18B 4 5 RN18C 6 7 RN18D 8 1 RN18A 2 8 RN17D 7 5 RN17C 6 R94 J15 3 5 2 4 7 6 RS-232 14 12 15 13 10 11 CPU +5V DS16 +5V DS47 +5V DS45 +5V DS46 +5V DS48
TP5
1 Hz
RXD
RN16C
TXD
RN16D
RXD
RN16A
TXD
RN16B
R65
U28
+5V D4
* U5
6 J5-4 J5-5 1 RS-422 I/P 7 +5V D3 R6
TO GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD (PG 1)
3 7 2 8 5
TXD
RN2A +5V D6
*JP2
3 2 1
J5-3
1 Hz
R5
RN2B
TP1
Q4
RXD
U23
Q3
JP2 CLOSED FOR RS-422, OPEN CIRCUIT FOR RS-232
3 7
-12V
* U6
11 14 2
*RN4A
2 8
DATA BUS D0..D7
12 CPU 9 RS-232
13 8
* 6 RN4C 5
8
*RN4D
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
*
-12V U17
R7
+5V DS1
+5V
+5V DS3
TP1
1 Hz
R10
DS2
TXD
R19
RXD
R20
+5V D2
TXD
RN2D +5V D1
RS-232 (LAPTOP) U20 11 10 12 9 14 7 13 8 RS-232 6 RN1C 5 4 RN1B 3 2 RN1A 1 8 RN1D 7 J2 CPU
U8 R23 R24
TP10
TP11
J8-1 J8-2 J8-3 J16-1 J16-2 J16-3
RXD
RN2C Q1
3 7 2 8 5
TXD
+5V +5V DS4 RS-232
TO GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD (PG 1)
RTS
DS5
Q2 DATA BUS D0..D7
RXD CTS
TXD
R22
RXD
R21 U11 R25 R26 R27 R28
RS-232 (LAPTOP) J4
3 7 2 8 5
TXD RTS RXD CTS
THIS AREA SHOWS THE CONSOLE CPU BOARD FOR INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH THE 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE.
CONSOLE BOARD (INDICO 100)
DATA BUS D0..D7
RS-232
THIS AREA SHOWS THE CONSOLE CPU BOARD FOR INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH RAD-ONLY CONSOLE.
G. SANWALD CHECKED J. BARNES DES.\MFG.\AUTH. L. FOSKIN
DRAWN
DATE 13 DEC 2001 9 JAN 2002 9 JAN 2002

SHEET 2 OF 3
CONSOLE BOARD (INDICO 100)
* FOR RS-232: U9, U5, JP2, AND R6 ARE NOT FITTED. FOR RS-422: U6, RN4A, RN4B, RN4C, RN4D, AND R7 ARE NOT FITTED. * U9
6 4 RS-422 O/P 7
CONSOLE CABLE
* FOR RS-232: U1, U2, AND R8 ARE NOT FITTED. FOR RS-422: U12, RN4C, RN4D, RN4A, AND RN4B ARE NOT FITTED.
+5V DS2
+5V DS1
RXD
Q1 R15
TXD
R1 Q2 U24
J5-1 J5-2
J4-1 J4-2
J11-7 J11-18
J7-7 J7-18
RXD (RS-232) CTS (RS-232)
* 14 RN4C 3 * 13 RN4D 4
16
U12 13 8 14 7 RS-232 12 9 11 10
* RN4A
1 2
+5V D4
* U5
6 J5-4 J5-5 J4-4 J4-5 J4-3 J11-6 J11-17 J7-6 J7-17 TXD (RS-232) RTS (RS-232) 1 RS-422 I/P 7 +5V R6
15
* RN4B
TXD
RN2A
*JP2
3 2 1
J5-3
* U2
J11-11 J11-10 J7-11 J7-10 TXD- (RS-422) TXD+ (RS-422) 7 6 RS-422 4 O/P
SERIAL PORT FOR REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL. REFER TO MD-0766 FOR INDICO 100, OR SCHEMATIC 734571 FOR MILLENIA GENERATORS.
C39 Y1
DUART
D3 Q4 RN2B
RXD
Q3 U25 11 10 12 9
JP2 CLOSED FOR RS-422, OPEN CIRCUIT FOR RS-232 J11-13 J7-13 J7-12 J7-9 RXD- (RS-422) RXD+ (RS-422) R8 J11-9 3 7 6
* U1
RS-422 I/P 1
C30
* U6
14 7 13 8 RS-232
2 4
* RN4A * RN4B
J11-12 1
+5V DS47 TXD
+5V DS48 RXD U29
* 6 RN4C 5 * 8 RN4D 7
J1 R7 U43 5 RN13E 12 6 RN13F 11 7 RN13G 10 8 RN13H 9 R66 14 7 13 8 RS-232 11 10 12 9
R63
Q11
Q12
DUART
*
-12V J6-1
3 7 2
J6-2
C35 Y2 C41 +5V D2
8 ALTERNATE CONSOLE CONNECTIONS

J6-3 J6-4 RS-232 (LAPTOP) U20 11 10 12 9 RS-232 14 7 13 8 6 RN1C 5 4 RN1B 3 2 RN1A 1 8 RN1D 7 J2 J2
+5V DS31 TXD
+5V DS35 RXD DUART
-12V R47 Q8 U39 1 RN13A 16 2 RN13B 15 3 RN13C 14 4 RN13D 13 R65 14 7 13 8 RS-232 DATA BUS D0..D7 11 10 12 9 Q9 R48
TXD
D1 RN2D +5V
RXD
RN2C Q1
3 TXD RTS RXD CTS 7 2 8 5
3 7 2 8 5
Q2 DATA BUS D0..D7
-12V
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
CONSOLE CPU BOARD (MILLENIA) THIS SHEET SHOWS THE SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CIRCUITS FOR MILLENIA GENERATORS
G. SANWALD CHECKED J. BARNES DES.\MFG.\AUTH. L. FOSKIN DRAWN DATE 13 DEC 2001 9 JAN 2002 9 JAN 2002
R64

SHEET 3 OF 3
+15V
Q6 +15V +5V Q4 R2 Q3 +5V +5V R5 DS32 R71 DS29 R69 +5V R31 Q5 J2-1 J2-6 J2-7 J2-2 J2-3 J2-4 R7 R8 J2-5 J2-8 J2-9
SWITCHED +15V TEST +15V TEST +15V + DOSE - DOSE OPTO RELAY GROUND GROUND
+5V
+5V U1
DS1
DAP CHAMBER #1
U31
U38 RN12C J2-2 J2-3 RN12B J2-7 J2-5 J1-2 J1-3 J1-7 J1-5 RS-232 TRANSMITTER / RECEIVER RN12A
U2 RS-232 TRANSMITTER / RECEIVER
DAP CHANNEL 1 DS3
U5 RS-422 DRIVER
UART
MICROCONTROLLER R10
Q1 R11
DATA BUS D0..D7 +15V
D2
Q8 +15V Q7 J3-1 Q10 Q9 24 VDC +15V TP2 R25 +5V TP3 R26 +5V +5V R5 +5V R44 J3-6 J3-7 J3-2 J3-3 J3-4 R13 R14 J3-5 J3-8 J3-9
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
R9
+5V
SWITCHED +15V TEST +15V TEST +15V + DOSE - DOSE OPTO RELAY GROUND GROUND
TB8 1 2 3 4 5
J4-2 R45 +5 AND +15 VOLT REGULATORS (U7, U4, L1, D4 D5, ETC) TP1
DAP CHAMBER #2
DAP CHANNEL 2 DS2
U6 RS-422 DRIVER
1 2 3 4 5
R16 Q2 R17
D3
DAP INTERCONNECT BOARD
R15
TB7
J4-1
+5V
G. SANWALD CHECKED M. LODER DES.\MFG.\AUTH. L. FOSKIN
DRAWN
DATE 16 JULY 2001 21 AUG 2001 28 AUG 2001
DAP MD-0828 REV B

SHEET 1 OF 1
+24V
+15V
+5V J13-11 J13-13 J13-17 J13-15
-15V
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
RN14H RN14G RN14F RN14E RN14D RN14C RN14B RN14A
J6-1 J6-2 J6-3 J6-4 J6-5 J6-6 J6-7 J6-8 J6-9
J12-1 J12-2 J12-3 J12-4 J12-5 J12-6 J12-7 J12-8 J12-9 J12-11 J12-13 J12-20 J12-15 J11-20
RN4A RN4C RN4E RN4G
RN3A RN4B RN3C RN4D RN3E RN4F RN3G RN4H RN3H RN3F RN3D RN3B
J13-1 J13-2 J13-3 J13-4 J13-5 J13-6 J13-7 J13-8
WRITE ENABLE READ ENABLE RESET ADDRESS LATCH ENABLE R91
J6-11 J6-13 J6-20 J6-15 J7-20 HV ON SIGNAL FROM MD-0759, PAGE 1
J13-10 J13-12 J13-16 R115 R84 J13-18 J13-19 EXPOSURE ENABLE COMMAND TO MD-0761, PAGE 1 DIGITAL IMAGING ABS TO MD-0758 J13-14 J13-20
CONTINUED ON PAGES 2 TO 6
+5V RN19D
J13-22
6 U45B
4 5 3 3 2 1 JW3 U45A 1 2
DS40
SYNC
R97 5 1 J7-15 J11-15
3 2 1 JUMPER POSITION: INTERNAL (LINE SYNC) JUMPER PINS 1-2 EXTERNAL (DIGITAL IMAGING SYNC) JUMPER PINS 2-3 J13-9 J13-21 J13-23 JW22
U28 CPU
U51 4 2 LINE SYNC FROM MD-0788, PAGE 4
JUMPER POSITION: INVERTED SYNC JUMPER PINS 1-2 NON-INVERTED SYNC JUMPER PINS 2-3 DATA, ADDRESS, AND CONTROL BUS
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
DRAWN
DATE 16 MAY 2000 17 MAY 2000 17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL INTERFACE MD-0767 REV B

SHEET 1 OF 6
+5V J1-11 J1-13 J1-17
+15V
+24V
J3-7 J3-1
J1-15
J3-3
TP1
-15V J1-20 +24V J1-14 U7 R2 MUX R3
TP2
J2-20 J2-21 +24V
R11
J3-9 5 U16
1 R1 3 2 J1-19 FROM PAGE 1 4 5 U3B 6 1 5 JW1 4 2 1 R10 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 U10 F1 DS10 J2-1 +24V +24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
J3-10
DS4 J1-1 J1-2 J1-3 J1-4 J1-5 J1-6 J1-7 J1-8 J1-10 J1-12 J1-16 J1-18 R6 U8 +24V +24V ADDRESS DECODER CIRCUITS (U1, U2, U3A, U6A) DATA LATCH DRIVER
DS6
DS7
DS8
DS9
EXON
U4 U6
PFL
HCF
PREP
GEN READY
TOMO
J2-7 1 J2-3 J2-4 J2-5 J2-6 J2-22 2
R17
J3-5 5 U14 4 J3-6
J3-2 J3-4 J3-8 R7
BUFFER J1-9 J1-21 J1-23
1 U13
J2-9 DS1
OFL
+24V +24V
R8
U9
SW1 5
R5
1 U12
J2-23 DS2
BUFFER 4 2
STOP EXP.
+24V +24V R4
J2-2 J2-10 J2-12 R9 DS3 U11
O.EXP
J2-11
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 733752.

G. SANWALD CHECKED KVR DES.\MFG.\AUTH. L. FOSKIN DRAWN DATE 16 MAY 2000 17 MAY 2000 17 MAY 2000

SHEET 2 OF 6
+24VR +5V J1-11 J1-13 J1-17 J1-15 F1 R10 Q1 D3 12 U10D 11 13 U17 MONOSTABLE TIMER D4 U14 J1-1 J1-2 J1-3 J1-4 J1-5 J1-6 J1-7 J1-8 J1-10 J1-12 J1-16 J1-18 DATA LATCH FROM PAGE 1 +24V +24VR U12 R14 +24VR +24VR +24VR DRIVER D1 U13 U15 R13 Q2 ADDRESS DECODER CIRCUITS (U1, U2, U9, U10C) DATA LATCH DRIVER +24V +24VR U16 R9 -15V J1-19 D6 D5 +15V +24V +24VR J3-25 J3-27 J3-29 J3-31 J3-33 J3-35
+24VR J2-1 J2-3 J2-5 J2-7 J2-9 J2-11 J2-13 J2-17 J2-19 J2-18 J2-20 J2-14 J2-12 J2-10 J2-8 J2-6 J2-4 J2-2
R15
J3-34 J3-32 J3-30 J3-28 J3-26 J3-36
J2-23
R12 J1-9 J1-21 J1-23 U11 SW1 Q3 BUFFER U3 4 2 5 1 R1 U4 4 2 5 1 R2 U5 4 2 D2 J3-41 J3-39 J3-37 J3-38 BUFFER J3-40 J3-42 J3-44 5 U6 4 +24VR 2 1 R4 U7 4 2 5 1 R5 U8 4 2 J3-45 J3-43 R16 J2-24 J3-48 J2-21 J2-15 5 1 R6 J3-46 5 1 R3 J3-47 J2-16 J2-22
J1-22 J1-20
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 733947, 735921.


SHEET 3 OF 6
+24V
+5V J1-11 J1-13 J1-17
+15V
+24V U12 +5 V REGULATOR
+5V(A)
F1
J2-14
J2-21
+15V J1-1 J1-2 J1-3 J1-4 J1-5 J1-6 FROM PAGE 1 J1-7 J1-8 J1-10 J1-12 J1-16 J1-18 R9 ADDRESS DECODER CIRCUITS (U1, U2, U3A, U5A) DATA LATCH U4 U6 DS4 R2 2 DRIVER +24V DS3 R1 4 U10 2 4 1 5 U7 +15V 1 5
J2-8
J2-22
J2-11 J2-13
J1-14 5 U16 4 U8 J1-9 J1-21 J1-23 BUFFER 5 1 U15 +5V(A) U9 SW1 5 +24V 5 1 U13 4 2 R4 R5 DS1 1 U11 BUFFER 4 2 R3 DS5 4 2 2 5 R7 1 R6
R8
DS2
J2-15 J2-4 J3-1 J2-5 J3-4 J2-6
1 U14
J3-3 J2-16 J3-10 J2-18 J3-11 J2-17 J2-19 J3-12
J2-9 J2-12
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 735406.


SHEET 4 OF 6
+24V
F1 +5V J1-11 J1-13 J1-17 +15V +24V
J2-13 J2-7 J2-8 J2-9 J2-12 J2-5 J4-3 J2-6 J4-2
+15V 1 J1-1 J1-2 J1-3 J1-4 J1-5 J1-6 FROM PAGE 1 J1-7 J1-8 J1-10 J1-12 J1-16 J1-18 9 10 U3C J1-19 8 12 13 U3D 11 ADDRESS DECODER CIRCUITS (U1, U2, U3A, U5A) DATA LATCH DRIVER U4 U6 DS3 R1 DS4 R2 DS7 R7 DS8 R8 DS9 R9 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 5 U10 +15V 1 5 U7 +15V 1 5 U13 +15V 1 5 U14 +15V 1 5 U15
J2-20 J4-5 J2-24 J2-22 J2-21 J2-23
J2-1 J3-2 J2-2 J3-1 J2-3 J3-4 J2-4 J3-5 J2-11 J3-6
U8 J1-9 J1-21 J1-23
J2-15 J3-8 J2-16
BUFFER J2-17
J3-7
J3-12 U9 SW1 +24V J2-19 BUFFER +24V 5 1 U12 4 2 R5 R6 DS6 J2-25 5 1 U11 4 2 R3 R4 DS5 J2-10 J3-10 J2-18 J3-11
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 736153


SHEET 5 OF 6
+5V +15V +24V J1-11 J1-13 J1-17 J1-15
U1
U12 J2-8
+24V F1 J3-16 J3-17 +24V J2-13 U9 J3-8 J2-1 J2-2 J2-3 J2-4 J2-5 J2-6 J2-7 J2-8 J2-9 J2-10 U3 DS27 DS29 DS31 DS33 DS35 DS36 DS37 DS39 J3-23 J3-4 J3-22 J2-5 J3-3 DRIVER J3-21 J3-2 J3-20 J3-1 DS4 DS6 DS8 DS11 DS13 DS14 DS17 DS19 J2-11 J2-12 J2-14 J2-15 J2-16 J2-17 J2-18 J2-19 J2-20 J2-21 J2-22 J3-5 R77 J3-1 J3-2 J3-3 J3-4 J3-5 J3-6 J3-7 J3-8 J3-9 J3-10 J3-20 J3-21 J3-22 J3-23 J3-24 J3-25 J3-26 J3-27 J3-28 J3-29 J3-30 J3-31 J3-32 J3-33
*
DRIVER
DS38
J2-21 DS40 J2-9 DS41 J2-22 DS43 J2-23 DS45
*
-15V U11
*
J2-17 J2-4 J2-16 J2-3 DRIVER
DS16
J3-27 DS18 J3-9 DS20 J3-28 DS21 J3-10 DS22 J3-29 DS23 J3-31 DS24
DRIVER J1-1 J1-2 J1-3 J1-4 J1-5 J1-6 J1-7 J1-8 J1-10 J1-12 J1-18 J1-19 J1-22 DRIVER
J2-15 J2-2 J2-14 J2-1
*
CPLD U10
DS25
J2-18 DS26 J2-6 DS28 J2-19 DS30 J2-7 DS32 J2-20 DS34 U2
*
FROM PAGE 1 U17 +24V +24V
*
Q1 DRIVER
DS1
J2-23 J2-24 J2-25
J3-24 DS3 J3-6 DS5 J3-25 DS7 J3-7 DS10 J3-26 DS12
R78 DRIVER DS46 R72
D3
J3-34 J3-35 J3-36

J2 1 -1
+15V
-3 2 -1 0 U U J2 J3 1 1
J3-37
-2 4 -1 2 -3 3 -3 0 U U U
J3
J2
J2
D1 J1-20 D2 R63
DS2 5 U4 4 2 1 U6 4 2 5 1
DS9 5 U15 4 2 1
DS44 5 U13 4 2 1
DS42 5 U8 4 2 R30 1
DS15
J3
+24V K1
-15V J1-14 J1-9 J1-21 J1-23 U5 4 2 R17 5 1 U7 4 2 R25 5 1 U16 4 2 R69 5 1 U14 4 2 R68 5 1 24V FROM ROOM INTERFACE J5-1 J5-3
J3-18 J3-19
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 736894
* DUE TO SPACE RESTRICTIONS, SERIES RESISTORS ARE NOT SHOWN FOR THE INDICATED LEDS
DRAWN
DATE 16 MAY 2000 17 MAY 2000 17 MAY 2000

SHEET 6 OF 6
2 REVISIONS
NOTES: 1. ALL RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN OHMS 1/4W 5% UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. 2. ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. 3. TAB "-01" INSTALL ONLY J1-J6, TP5.
ZONE
LTR 2 3 A B C D E F
DESCRIPTION INC PER ENG. J.C. INC PER ECO No. 14083 INC PER ECO No. 14084 INC PER ECO No. 14133 INC PER ECO No. 15473 INC PER ECO No. 16111 INC PER ECO No. 16121 INC PER ECO No.18348
DWN Emir Emir Emir Emir Emir Emir Emir Emir
CHKD S.C Emir Emir Emir Emir Emir Emir Emir
APPROVED J.C. G.SANWALD G.SANWALD G.SANWALD M.PHILLIPS S.CARTWRIGHT D.YAKE S.CARTWRIGHT
DATE 01SEP94 27SEP94 27SEP94 20OCT94 10DEC96 20JUN97 26JUN97 28FEB00
J7 1 2 3 4 J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -1000V R48 100K TP4 R49 100K +12V -12V -24V D11 T1 5 1N3070 TP5 START (1) L (1) N (1) R (1) SIG (1) C15 .01 L1 E2 23 uH 6 4 C18 C5 E3 1 uF 3 .01 200V +50V .01 200V .01 200V .01 200V 1 D12 C14 .01 200V D13 C17 D14 .01 200V D15 C19 D16 .01 200V D17 C21 D18 C20 C22 2 C3 C2 C1 .01 600V D6 D5 .01 600V D4 D3 .01 600V D2 D1 C4 C9 C8 R1 1K
R7
R8
R9
R17
R18
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
.01 600V
.01 600V
.01 600V C24 C25
+300V
+500V .01 200V D19 C23 D20 .01 200V D21
.01 200V
R44 100K R45 J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 100K
C START (2) L (2) N (2) R (2) SIG (2)
J6 1 1 1 1 1 9 7 5 3 1 9 7 5 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 0 8 6 4 2 0 8 6 4 2
+12V
TP1 R39 100K R47 R46 R43 R42 R41 R36 R35 R34 R26 R22 R23 100K C12 .01 C16 6.8nF R30 R11 1M J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 R40 100K R27 90.9K -12V 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 10K 220 R33 10K D7 Q1 6 5 START (3) L (3) N (3) R (3) SIG (3) U1B 7 LF353N C27 0.1 +12V 2 1 3 R28 49K9 +12V B R31 R32 475K 121K U2A 14016 TP3 2 1 R16 1K U2D 14016 9 8 1 3 R15 10K C11 .01 R6 10 R4 10 R3 10 R5 10 3 -24V J5 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 -12V +12V 3 U2C 14016 4 6 2 8 LF353N U1A 1 11 U2B 14016 10 R10 20K R19 20K R24 20K SG3525 C10 .01 R21 1K R20 1K C26 10 8 U3 +V -V SYNC CSS CT RT DISC COMP SD VREF OSC OUTA OUTB 5 6 7 9 10 16 4 11 14 R25 22 C13 2.2nF R12 220 D8 Q2 Q4 R14 220 D10 B R29 2.74K TP2 Q3 220 D9 C7 10
C6 1 R13
E2
E3
SPARE
R37 100K J4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 R38 100K
4 +12V 1 2
START (4) L (4) N (4) R (4) SIG (4)
A HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
DRAWN Emir CHECKED Emir C27, D21, J7, Q4, R49 APPROVAL TP4, T1, U3 ENGINEER J.CUNNINGHAM 27SEP94 DATE SCHEMATIC 27SEP94 07SEP94 Communications & Power Industries Canada Inc.
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE CONTROL INTERFACE

SIZE D CAGE CODE DWG NO REV
DES/MFG AUTH. S.CARTWRIGHT REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS NOT USED 27SEP94
-----------------------
R2 728399 MANUALS USED ON
CONTRACT No.
02845
NTS LEVEL 3
728401
SHEET 1 1 OF 1
COMPUTER GENERATED
8 7 6 5 4 3
NEXT ASSY
February 28, 2000
SCALE 2
REVISIONS ZONE LTR _ DESCRIPTION SEE SHEET 1 FOR REVISIONS DWN --CHKD --APPROVED ----DATE
UNIVERSAL A.E.C. TAB CONFIGURATION "TAB" APPLIES TO ASSY 734757-TAB

C
J1 INPUT OF ASSY 734396

CHAMBER TYPE ASSY 734630 SWITCH CLOSURE 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 50


TAB
00 ** 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CHAMBER TYPE
ASSY 734630 SWITCH CLOSURE 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 44
MODIFICATION
D69 = 10 OHMS, R29= NOT FITTED; R90= 10 OHMS
VACUTEC/SPECIAL
AID
PMT
PMT
NOTE : ** INDICATES CONFIGURATIONS DEFINED ON SCHEMATIC No. 728398

B B
PMT = PHOTO MULTIPLIER TUBE
HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
DRAWN CHECKED
Emir D.YAKE APPROVAL
29APR99 08OCT99 DATE 08OCT99 08OCT99 SCHEMATIC
Communications & Power Industries Canada Inc.
ENGINEER S.CARTWRIGHT DES/MFG AUTH. D.YAKE REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS NOT USED MANUALS 734630 NEXT ASSY
5 4 3 2
SCHEMATIC AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE CONTROL

DWG NO Rev
GENERATORS USED ON
CONTRACT No.
Size
CAGE Code
D
Scale
02845
NTS LEVEL 3
1
734628
Sheet
H
5
of
Monday, November 03, 2003
REVISIONS ZONE LTR _ DESCRIPTION SEE SHEET 1 FOR REVISIONS DWN --CHKD --APPROVED ----DATE
UNIVERSAL A.E.C. TAB CONFIGURATION

J1 INPUT OF ASSY 728399 J2 INPUT OF ASSY 728399
CHAMBER TYPE ZIEHM/COMET ASSY 734630 SWITCH CLOSURE 39, 48, 51, 52, 67, 68, 74

CHAMBER TYPE ZIEHM/COMET ASSY 734630 SWITCH CLOSURE 37, 53, 56, 57, 63, 69, 70

CHAMBER TYPE SIERRA/NICAL ASSY 734630 SWITCH CLOSURE 42, 60
TAB
50
CHAMBER TYPE ZIEHM/COMET
ASSY 734630 SWITCH CLOSURE 2, 43, 46, 47, 71, 72, 73
MODIFICATION
C21 SHORTED; R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R52,R71,R75,R80 = 33K
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 ZIEHM/COMET 2, 43, 46, 47, 71, 72, 73 ZIEHM/COMET 39, 48, 51, 52, 67, 68, 74 ZIEHM/COMET 37, 53, 56, 57, 63, 69, 70 PMT 41, 59 C21 SHORTED; R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R52,R71,R75,R80 = 33K
58 59
C C
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 G.E. (12V) VACUTEC 3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45 2, 5, 13, 21, 43, 45 G.E. (12V) VACUTEC 7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48; 50 7, 15, 23, 39, 48, 50 G.E. (12V) VACUTEC 9, 17, 25, 33, 38, 53, 55 9, 17, 25, 37, 53, 55 PMT PMT 41, 59 41, 59 C21 SHORTED; R29 = NOT FITTED. R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R84=R85=R86=7.5K C21 SHORTED; R29 = NOT FITTED. R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS AID 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45 AID 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50 PMT 37, 54 PMT 41, 59 C21 SHORTED; R29 = NOT FITTED. R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS PMT 39, 49 PMT 37, 54 PMT 41, 59 C21 SHORTED; R29 = NOT FITTED. R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS
76 77 78 79 80 81 97 AID/COMET ION N/A 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45 UNCONFIGURED + 24V AID/COMET ION N/A 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50 UNCONFIGURED + 24V KEITHLEY N/A 10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 54 UNCONFIGURED + 24V PMT N/A 41, 59 UNCONFIGURED + 24V C21 SHORTED; R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS R29= 10 OHMS, R90= NOT FITTED; R5=R8=R9= 2.49K; R83= R84= R85= R86= 7.5K
98 99
N/A N/A
UNCONFIGURED + 12V UNCONFIGURED + 12V
N/A N/A
N/A N/A
N/A N/A
R29= NOT FITTED; R90= 10 OHMS; U5, U7-U11, U13, U15= AD708; C9, C19-C21= 2.2uF R29 = NOT FITTED. R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS
DRAWN CHECKED ENGINEER
Emir D.YAKE APPROVAL S.CARTWRIGHT D.YAKE
DES/MFG AUTH. REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS NOT USED MANUALS 734630 NEXT ASSY
5 4 3 2

DWG NO Rev
GENERATORS USED ON
CONTRACT No. Monday, November 03, 2003
Size
CAGE Code
D
Scale
02845
NTS LEVEL 3
1
734628
Sheet
H
4
of
REVISIONS ZONE LTR _ DESCRIPTION SEE SHEET 1 FOR REVISIONS DWN --CHKD --APPROVED --DATE ---
UNIVERSAL A.E.C. TAB CONFIGURATION

J1 INPUT OF ASSY 728399 J2 INPUT OF ASSY 728399
CHAMBER TYPE ASSY 734630 SWITCH CLOSURE 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50 7, 15, 23, 39, 48, 50

CHAMBER TYPE ASSY 734630 SWITCH CLOSURE
TAB
00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C

CHAMBER TYPE ASSY 734630 SWITCH CLOSURE
CHAMBER TYPE
ASSY 734630 SWITCH CLOSURE 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45 2, 5, 13, 21, 43, 45
MODIFICATION
R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS
AID VACUTEC
AID VACUTEC
VACUTEC ZIEHM/COMET KIETHLEY/APELEM
2, 5, 13, 21, 43, 45 2, 43, 46, 47, 71, 72, 73 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 44
VACUTEC ZIEHM/COMET
7, 15, 23, 39, 48, 50 39, 48, 51, 52, 67, 68, 74
VACUTEC ZIEHM/COMET
9, 17, 25, 37, 53, 55 37, 53, 56, 57, 63, 69, 70
VACUTEC ZIEHM/COMET
11, 19, 27, 41, 58, 60 41, 58, 61, 62, 64, 65, 66
R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R52= R71= R75= R81 = 33K R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS
KIETHLEY/APELEM 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 49
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
G.E. (12V) G.E. (12V) AID/COMET ION
3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45 3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45
7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50 7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50
9, 17, 25, 33, 38, 53, 55 9, 17, 25, 33, 38, 53, 55 10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 53, 55
G.E. (12V) PMT AID/COMET ION
11, 19, 27, 35, 42, 58, 60 41, 59 12, 20, 28, 36, 42, 58, 60
R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R83=R84=R85=R86= 7.5K R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R84=R85=R86= 7.5K R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS
SIEMENS SIEMENS G.E. (24V)
2, 5, 13, 21, 43, 44 2, 5, 13, 21, 43, 44 3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45
SIEMENS SIEMENS G.E. (24V)
7, 15, 23, 39, 48, 49 7, 15, 23, 39, 48, 49 7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50
ZIEHM/COMET
37, 53, 56, 57, 63, 69, 70
ZIEHM/COMET
41, 58, 61, 62, 64, 65, 66
R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS;R71= R81 = 33K R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS
G.E. (24V) KIETHLEY/APELEM SIEMENS
9, 17, 25, 33, 38, 53, 55
G.E. (24V)
11, 19, 27, 35, 42, 58, 60
R29= 10 OHMS; R90 NOT FITTED; R83=R84=R85=R86= 7.5K;R5=R8=R9= 2.49K
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
B
KIETHLEY/APELEM AID FISCHER PHOTODIODE AID PMT PMT AID G.E. (12V) G.E. (12V) SIEMENS ZIEHM/COMET AID AID G.E. (24V)
3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 44 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45 2, 45 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45 2, 44 2, 44 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45 3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45 3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45 2, 5, 13, 21, 43, 44 2, 43, 46, 47, 71, 72, 73 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45 3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45
KIETHLEY/APELEM AID FISCHER PHOTODIODE AID PMT PMT AID G.E. (12V) G.E. (12V) SIEMENS ZIEHM/COMET AID AID G.E. (24V)
8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 49 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50 39, 50 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50 39, 49 39, 49 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50 7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50 7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50 7, 15, 23, 39, 48, 49 39, 48, 51, 52, 67, 68, 74 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50 7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50
10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 54 9, 17, 25, 37, 53, 54
KIETHLEY/APELEM SIEMENS
12, 20, 28, 36, 42, 59 11, 19, 27, 41, 58, 59
R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; ASSY-72839900, D12-D21=REVERSED R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS
PHOTODIODE PMT PMT AID PHOTODIODE AID PMT ZIEHM/COMET KEITHLEY G.E. (12V) G.E. (24V)
37, 55 37, 54 37, 54 10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 53, 55 37, 55 10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 53, 55 37, 54 37, 53, 56, 57, 63, 69, 70 10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 54 9, 17, 25, 33, 38, 53, 55 9, 17, 25, 33, 38, 53, 55
PMT PMT PMT PMT PMT PMT PMT PMT PMT PMT PMT
41, 59 41, 59 41, 59 41, 59 41, 59 41, 59 41, 59 41, 59 41, 59 41, 59 41, 59
R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R85=R86=7.5K R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R85=R86= 7.5K R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS R29= NOT FITTED; R90= 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R52, R71, R75, R81 = 33K R29= NOT FITTED; R90= 10 OHMS; D69 = 10 OHMS R29= NOT FITTED; R90= 10 OHMS; D69 = 10 OHMS; R84=7.5K R29 = 10 OHMS; R90 = NOT FITTED; R84=R85=R86= 7.5K; R5=R8=R9 = 2.49K ;C29=220pF ; R83= 100 OHMS R29= NOT FITTED; R90= 10 OHMS; D69 = 10 OHMS R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS
B
24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32 33 34 35 36
VACUTEC VACUTEC PHILLIPS FISCHER G.E. (12V) PHILLIPS
2, 5, 13, 21, 43, 45 2, 5, 13, 21, 43, 45 3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45 3, 6, 14, 22, 30, 43, 45 3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45 3, 5, 13, 21, 29, 43, 45
VACUTEC VACUTEC PHILLIPS FISCHER G.E. (12V) PHILLIPS
7, 15, 23, 39, 48, 50 7, 15, 23, 39, 48, 50 7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 50 7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50 7, 15, 23, 31, 40, 48, 50
VACUTEC PMT AID FISCHER G.E. (12V) PHILLIPS
9, 17, 25, 37, 53, 55 37, 54 10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 53, 55 10, 18, 26, 34, 38, 53, 55 9, 17, 25, 33, 38, 53, 55 9, 17, 25, 33, 38, 53, 55
PMT
41, 59
PMT PMT PHOTODIODE PHILLIPS
41, 59 41, 59 41, 60 11, 19, 27, 35, 42, 58, 60
R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R85=R86=33K R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; ASSY-72839900, D12-D21=REVERSED R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R84= R85= R86= 7.5K R29 = NOT FITTED; R90 = 10 OHMS; D69= 10 OHMS; R83= R84= R85= R86= 33K

A
DRAWN CHECKED
ENGINEER S.CARTWRIGHT DES/MFG AUTH. D.YAKE REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS NOT USED MANUALS 734630 NEXT ASSY
5 4 3 2

DWG NO Rev
GENERATORS USED ON
CONTRACT No.
Size
CAGE Code
D 02845
Scale
734628
LEVEL 3
1
J
3
of
Monday, November 03, 2003
NTS
Sheet
REVISIONS ZONE LTR --DESCRIPTION SEE SHEET 1 FOR REVISIONS DWN --CHKD --APPROVED --DATE ---
+12V R23 10K +12V -12V
J1
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
R15 10K +12V
12
U1F
13
-24V
J5
1 2 3 4 5 6
PTSTOP CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 EXP START L FIELD M FIELD R FIELD RST VREF -12Vdc +12Vdc RAMP DQ CLK +24Vdc -24Vdc GND
2
U3-12 D45
U1A 1 4584
R21 10K
D40
D39
11 U1E
10
+12V R20 10K +12V R18 D41 D38
7 8 9 12 10 11 13 15 14 18
C27 10 + C40 330 C24 0.1 C30 0.1 C34 0.1 + C7 330 -24V
4
U3-13 D46
U1B 3
6
U3-5 D47
U1C 5
10K
D42
D37
+12V R16
FROM PAGE 1
U3-6
U1D 9
10K
D43
D44
VSS -12V
TP5
+24V
19 20 16 17
TP4 RAMP
TP3 VREF
VDD +12V
TP1
TP2 R53 100 R17 10K R24 X 100K +12V C3 0.1 D49 1N4148 +12V R25 10K E (4) D36 R14 10K Y +12V C45 1nF R5 1K D9 D8 N (1) JW 13 JW14 D2 L (2) JW 23 JW24 D33 L (3) JW 25 JW26 START (2) JW 31 JW32 +12V R89 10K +5V -12V R119 681 D66 1N4728A +12V A1 +12V +5V L (2) JW 74 R112 100 +12V D68M -3V START (4) D48 1N4733A START (3) JW 33 JW34 JW 35 JW36 D22 D24 L (4) JW 27 JW28 D26 D28 D10 D12 N (2) JW 15 JW16 D4 D11 D14 N (3) JW 17 JW18 D6 D15 D16 N (4) JW 19 JW20 R6 10K R11 10K D13 1N4733A R7 10K D7 D5 D3 C46 1nF R26 10K Q1 MPS8599 D1
10K D17 R42 10K D69 Q3 MPS8599
1K D31 R (1) JW 5 JW6 R (2) JW 7 JW8 R (3) JW 9 JW10 R (4) JW 11 JW12
10K
8 5 6
Q2 MPS8599 D19
R19 10K R22 10K
3 2
7
U2 LM311 D50 1N4733A START (1)
R43 1K
L (1)
JW 21 JW22
1N4733A D34 JW 29 JW30 Q4 MPS8599
D20
C2 0.1
D21
D23
-12V
D25
D27
D29
R10 10K
R12 10K D35 1N4733A R13 10K

B
D30
D32 +12V
D18 1N4733A
1 11 11
D68N U19D 6 S D 7 IN 8 DG445DJ +12V +5V
A2
+12V
1
Y +24V +12V L (1) D68G JW 71 R109 100
1
D64C L (3) JW 69 R105 100 +12V
A3 D64I
+12V
R27
R8
13
12
7 7
D68H 14 +12V -12V
-12V +12V
+5V
3 S
U19A DG445DJ
GND
* R29
10
D 2 IN 1
3 3
14 S
* R90
10
1
D68O N (2) JW 67 R103 100
14
-12V
D 15 IN 16 DG445DJ
U16B
L (4)
JW 64
13
12 12
D68P 14 -12V +12V
12
1 D 2 IN 1
D64E N (3) JW 70 R107 100
D64D
14
-12V
-12V +12V
-12V U19B 14 S D 15 IN 16 DG445DJ +12V
GND
1
D68I N (1) JW 72 R110 100
3 S U17A DG445DJ
+5V
5 5 14
-12V D64F D64G
11 S
+12V
D 10 IN 9 DG445DJ
U16C
N (4)
JW 65
8 8
D68J
1 7 7
U16D 6 S D 7 IN 8 DG445DJ JW 66 R102 100
1
D64A R (2) JW 68 R104 100
13
14
-12V R (1) JW 73 R111 100 D68L D68K
2
D64B
14
-12V
9 14
14
-12V
-12V
DG445DJ
-12V
-12V HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
U19C 11 S D 10 IN 9
14
GND
-12V U17B 14 S D 15 IN 16 DG445DJ
-12V +12V
100 D64H
11
D64N
U16A DG445DJ
+5V
R (3)
JW 63
R99
R (4)
11
3 S
12
DRAWN CHECKED
ENGINEER
S.CARTWRIGHT DES/MFG AUTH. D.YAKE
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS NOT USED 734630 NEXT ASSY

8 7 6 5 4 3
MANUALS GENERATORS USED ON CONTRACT No. Wednesday, April 02, 2003

2
C47 1nF Y R28 R9 1K
1
R100 100 +12V
A4 U17C
8 8 1
D64J 14 -12V
11 S
D 10 IN 9 DG445DJ
D64K R101 100
9 9
D64L 14 -12V D64M +12V
U17D 6 S D 7 IN 8 DG445DJ +12V
+5V
D 2 IN 1

DWG NO Rev
Size
CAGE Code
D
Scale
02845
NTS LEVEL 3
734628
Sheet
1
H
2
of
NOTES: 1. ALL RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN OHMS 1/4W 5% UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. 2. ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. 3. FOR COMPONENTS VALUE/TYPE OF ITEMS WITH SEE SHEET 3 TO 5 FOR A LISTING OF COMPONENT VALUE CHANGES. 4. D69 AND C48 NOT ON PWB LAYOUT. 5. E (4)
REVISIONS ZONE LTR A B C JW 43 R52 D E F G DESCRIPTION INC PER ENG. INC PER ECO No. 19065 INC PER ECO No. 19263 INC PER ECO No. 19348 INC PER ECO No. 20684 INC PER ECO No. 20781 INC PER ECO No. 20859 INC PER ECO No. 21803 INC PER ECO No. 22412 DWN Emir Emir Emir Emir Emir Emir Emir J.H. G.F. CHKD Emir Emir Emir Emir Emir Emir Emir J.H. G.F. APPROVED D.YAKE S.CARTWRIGHT S.CARTWRIGHT S.CARTWRIGHT S.CARTWRIGHT S.CARTWRIGHT S.CARTWRIGHT S.CARTWRIGHT S.CARTWRIGHT DATE 08OCT99 25OCT99 28JAN00 29FEB00 05OCT01 14NOV01 14DEC01 01APR03 16OCT03
14
** NOT FITTED.
R86 100
C41 +12V 1nF D62I
1 R50A 16 33K
4.99K
+12V
-3V
5 R50E 12 33K 3
4
U4C 14016 R36 1K
H J
1
D
8 14
-12V D62J +12V
**
1
D62A
C22
JW45 10 R50G 7 JW46 33K
R50H 33K
R41 LF412 100K
14 R50C 3 33K 4
U4A 14016 +12V
* U5B
9
R38 1M R67 100 +12V E (4)
13
R50D 33K 13
D51 1N4148 -12V
12
100
2
D62B
1
U6A LF412 C9 * .22
-12V A (1)
-12V R66 100 R65 1M JW 48 R75
-12V
D53
D52
R40 1K
4.99K +12V
1 R51A 16 33K
C42 1nF
1
R85 100
9
D62L
C17
**
JW50 JW51
14 R51C 3 33K
4
R51D 33K
LF412 R39 100K
10 R51G 7
33K U4B 14016 +12V R51H 33K
10
14
-12V
C
U10B 8 LF412
+12V
13
D62C R44 1M R46 100 E (4)
1 3 3
D62D
11
J2
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
B
13
N (1) R (1) SIG1 START2 L (2) N (2) R (2) SIG (2) START (3) L (3) N (3) R (3) SIG (3) START (4) L (4) N (4) R (4) SIG (4) START (3) JW 57 R73 100 D62F SIG (3)
-12V A (2)
R47 100
R48 1M JW 53
-12V
D57
D58
R60 1K
* 4.99K
R71
1 R70A 16 33K
C43 1nF
+12V D62M
+12V
14
1 11
JW 54
100
11
D62N
C13
**
JW55 JW56
14 R70C 3 33K
4
R70D 33K
14
-12V
10 R70G 7 33K
U12A 14016 +12V
+12V
U9B LF412
1
D62E
13
R68 1M R80 100 C28 1 A (3) R62 100 +12V E (4)
13
R70H 33K
5 5 14
-12V
3 2
9
R30 1K
R69 1M JW 58 R81
-12V
D55
D54 R55 1K
+12V
+12V 4.99K D62O R106 JW 59
1 R82A 16 33K
C44 1nF -
D62P
14
-12V +12V
C29
**
JW60 JW61
33K
R82D 33K
U15B LF412
R63 100K
10
1
D62G START (4) JW 62 R87 100
13
R59 1M R54 100 E (4)
10 R82G 7 33K 8
R82H 33K +12V
7 7
D62H
12
5 6
U12B 14016
+ -
7
U14B LF412
11
-12V A (4) +12V
R57 100
R64 1M
U15A LF412
D60 -12V
D61
R78 1K
C25 0.1
C6 0.1
C18 0.1
C1 0.1
C38 0.1
-12V C35 0.1 C31 0.1 C26 0.1 C23 0.1 C16 0.1 C5 0.1 C37 0.1 REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS NOT USED D63, D67, J3, J4, R115, R117 734630 NEXT ASSY
8 7 6 5 4 3
* C21 .22
14
C8 1
-12V
1
U13A LF412 +12V
R35
9
U3D 14016
100
12
SIG (4)
* R83
12
15 R82B 2 33K 14 R82C 3
5 R82E 12 33K 11 R82F 6 33K 6 7

U13B LF412
*
CW
R4 100K
CH4 AEC TIME ADJUST
U12D 14016 C15 .47 R61 10K JW 41 JW 42 D65 1N4148
R79 1K
-12V
U8A LF412
* .22
C19
14
-12V
1
LF412 *U9A +12V
R33 100
U14A LF412
R84
R56 100K
15 R70B 2 33K
U8B LF412
5 R70E 12 33K 11 R70F 6 33K 6 7 3
R3 100K
CH3 AEC TIME ADJUST

CW
U12C 14016 C14 JW 37 .47 R72 10K 1N4148 D59 JW 38
+ +
L (1)
14
C11 1
.22
U11A LF412
START (1)
U6B LF412
* C20
4 -12V 2 1
U10A LF412 +12V R32
R91 20K
100
R121 4.99K CW C39 0.1
U18A LF412 +12V
2
U3A 14016
100
CH1
AEC SHORT TIME COMPENSATION

R113 49.9K R92 20K R76 1K CH2 CW R108 4.99K C36 0.1
E (4) -3V
+12V
-3V
3
U3C 14016
R98 49.9K R93 20K CH3 CW R97 4.99K C33 0.1
E (4)
8
R77 1K R94 20K CH4
AEC SHORT TIME COMPENSATION

R96 49.9K R95 4.99K CW C32 0.1
100
HIGHEST REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS C48, D69, J5, Q4, R120, TP5 U19
DRAWN CHECKED
ENGINEER
S.CARTWRIGHT D.YAKE
DES/MFG AUTH.
MANUALS GENERATORS USED ON CONTRACT No. Thursday, October 16, 2003

2
Size
CAGE Code
D
Scale
+ +
+ +
START (2)
JW 52
R74
R31 1K
1N4148
49.9K
49.9K
D56
R120
12
+ +
SIG (2)
JW 49
D62K
15 R51B 2 33K
U11B
5 R51E 12 33K 11 R51F 6 33K 6 7
9
U4D 14016
R2 100K CW
CH2 AEC TIME ADJUST
C12 .47 R49 10K
14
U7A LF412
C10 1
START (1)
JW 47
R88
+ + LF412
SIG (1)
11 R50F 6 JW 44 33K
U7B
15 R50B 2 33K
C4
R1 100K CW
CH1 AEC TIME ADJUST
.47
JW 2 R34 JW 3
11
U3B 14016
10
R45 10K
100
R37 1K
U3-12
1
U5A LF412 +12V E (4)
U3-13
*
U3-5 U3-6
SEE SHEET 2
8
C48 470pF R58 1K R118 49.9K R114 49.9K -12V
C
JW 39 JW 40
R116
7
U18B LF412

DWG NO Rev
02845
NTS LEVEL 3
734628
Sheet
1
J
1
of

8000-INIS RevA

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

8000-INIS RevA

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

IN Series X-Ray Generator Installation & Service Manual

P/N 8000-INIS Revision: A, May 12, 2006

CPI Canada Inc.

SERVICE AND INSTALLATION MANUAL

Indico 100 Rad Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc.

(This page intentionally left blank)

Indico 100 Rad Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc

Indico 100 Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Indico 100 Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc.

CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1A INTRODUCTION

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc.

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc. 1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Figure 1A-1: Generator outline drawing (Millenia)

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc.

Figure 1A-2: Generator outline drawing (Indico 100)

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc.

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc.

Electromagnetic environment - guidance

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc.

IEC 60601 test level

Electromagnetic environment guidance

Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital environment.

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc.

IEC 60601 test level

Electromagnetic environment - guidance

Radiated RF IEC 61000-4-3

3 V/m 80MHz to 2.5 GHz

3 V/m 80MHz to 2.5 GHz

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc. 1A.9.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc.

(This page intentionally left blank)

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc.

CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1B SAFETY

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc.

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc. SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS (cont) WARNING:

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc.

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

1B.5.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES COMMON TO MILLENIA AND INDICO 100

1B.5.1 Caution HV Behind Cover Label

Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual

CPI Canada Inc.

1B.5.2 Weight Label